JP7029081B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

Conventionally, gaming machines include slot machines (rotating drum type gaming machines), pachinko gaming machines, arrange ball gaming machines, and ball game machines. Among these types of gaming machines, for example, Patent Document 1 shows. There is such a slot machine.

JP-A-2017-144015

In the conventional gaming machine, various measures have been taken in order to improve the playability and improve the interest of the game and to enable the game to be played smoothly, but there is room for further improvement.

An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of gaming.

The present invention has the following features. In the following description of the feature configuration, an example of the corresponding configuration in the embodiment described later is shown in parentheses.

In order to solve the above-mentioned problems, the present invention
A set value display (for example, payout number display lamp 46j) and
With a start switch (for example, start lever 25),
With a specific switch (eg, setting change switch 84)
Equipped with
If power is supplied and certain conditions are met, the setting change mode can be activated.
In the setting change mode, the setting value display corresponding to the setting value can be displayed on the setting value display.
In the setting change mode, the first state in which the setting value display displayed on the setting value display is changed when a specific switch is operated, and the setting value display displayed on the setting value display even if a specific switch is operated. There is a second state where the setting value display is not changed,
In the first state, the setting value display displayed on the setting value display can be changed when a specific switch is operated .
In the first state, when the start switch is operated, it becomes the second state, and in the second state, the display content of the set value display cannot be changed by operating a specific switch.
The power is turned off in a specific situation where the first set value is set, and then the power is turned on in a situation where both the start switch and the specific switch are operated, and the power is supplied by the power on. After the predetermined condition is satisfied and the setting change mode is activated, the setting value display corresponding to the second setting value, which is the first state and is different from the first setting value, can be displayed on the setting value display. ing
It is characterized by that.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

It is a front view of the slot machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows schematic structure of the said slot machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the position where the start lever of the said slot machine is turned on. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the operation at the time of changing a setting value in the said slot machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the setting value which is displayed when it shifts to the setting change mode with the setting change switch turned on in the said slot machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the fixed state of the setting value at the time of shifting to the setting change mode with the start lever turned ON in the said slot machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the state at the time of shifting to the setting change mode with various switches turned on in the said slot machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the configuration about the state when the setting change mode is changed with the various switches turned on in the said slot machine. It is a figure which shows the symbol arrangement of the reel of the said slot machine. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination 1 in the said slot machine. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination 2 in the said slot machine. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination 3 in the said slot machine. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination 4 in the said slot machine. In the slot machine, (A) shows a bonus condition device, and (B) is a diagram showing a winning replay condition device (1). It is a figure which shows the winning re-game condition device (2) in the said slot machine. It is a figure which shows the winning re-game condition device (3) in the said slot machine. It is a figure which shows the winning re-game condition device (4) in the said slot machine. It is a figure which shows the winning re-game condition device (5) in the said slot machine. It is a figure which shows the winning re-game condition device (6) in the said slot machine. It is a figure which shows the winning number assigned to each condition device in the said slot machine. It is a block diagram which conceptually shows the function of the said slot machine. It is a figure which shows the relationship of each RT state in the said slot machine. It is a figure which shows the relationship of each game mode in the said slot machine. It is a figure which shows the variable used in the control of the said slot machine. In the above slot machine, (A) is an advantageous section transition lottery, (B) is a chance mode 1 lottery, (C) is a chance mode 2 lottery-1, (D) is a chance mode 2 lottery-2, and (E) is a chance game. It is a figure which shows the content of each of 3 lottery. In the slot machine, (A) is a chance game number lottery, (B) is a chance cycle lottery, (C) is an EX1 mode lottery, (D) is an EX2 mode lottery, (E) is an AT mode lottery-1, (F). Is a diagram showing the contents of the AT mode lottery-2, and (G) is a diagram showing the contents of the AT mode lottery-3. In the slot machine, (A) is a seven 1 lottery, (B) is a seven 2 lottery, (C) is an AT mode rewrite lottery, (D) is a seven loop lottery, (E) is a gold seven loop lottery, and (F) is a gold seven loop lottery. The gold seven loop rewriting lottery and (G) are diagrams showing the contents of the addition mode lottery. In the slot machine, (A) is a lottery for switching the number of bells, (B) is a seven stock 1 lottery, (C) is a seven stock 2 lottery, and (D) is a diagram showing the contents of an effect lever weight lottery. In the above slot machine, (A) is AT cycle lottery-1, (B) is AT cycle lottery-2, (C) is pullback 1 lottery-1, and (D) is pullback 1 lottery-2. be. In the slot machine, (A) is a pullback 1 lottery-3, (B) is a pullback 2 lottery, and (C) is a diagram showing the contents of the AT cycle preferential game number lottery. In the slot machine, (A) is a diagram showing the contents of the Seven Table 1 lottery, and (B) is a diagram showing the contents of the Seven Table 2 lottery. In the above slot machine, (A) is a number of bells 1 lottery-1, (B) is a number of bells 1 lottery-2, (C) is a number of bells 2 lottery, and (D) is a diagram showing the contents of the number of bells 3 lottery. be. In the slot machine, (A) shows the correspondence relationship between the bonus condition device and the effect group A number, and (B) is a diagram showing the correspondence relationship between the winning replay condition device and the effect group B number. It is a figure which shows the correspondence relationship between the effect group number and the condition device group number in the said slot machine. In the slot machine, (A) is a diagram showing the contents of the symbol combination display 1 and (B) is a diagram showing the contents of the symbol combination display 2. In the slot machine, (A) is a suggestion pattern 1, (B) is a suggestion pattern 2, (C) is a suggestion pattern 3, and (D) is a diagram showing the contents of the suggestion pattern 4. In the slot machine, (A) is a diagram showing the contents of the ending effect 1, and (B) is a diagram showing the contents of the ending effect 2. In the slot machine, (A) is a diagram showing the contents of the ending effect 3, and (B) is a diagram showing the contents of the ending effect 4. In the slot machine, (A) is a lottery for ending effect 1, (B) is a lottery for ending effect 2, (C) is a lottery for ending effect 3, and (D) is a diagram showing the contents of the lottery for ending effect 4. be. In the slot machine, (A) is a setting change process, (B) is a game progress control process, and (C) is a flowchart showing a flow of a game start standby process. In the slot machine, (A) is a flowchart showing the flow of internal lottery processing, and (B) is a flowchart showing the flow of group number set processing. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the section type number management lever processing in the said slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the continuation flow of the said section type number management lever processing. In the slot machine, (A) is a flowchart showing the flow of advantageous section transition processing, and (B) is a flowchart showing the flow of chance game number lottery processing. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the AT winning processing in the said slot machine. In the slot machine, (A) is a seven number correction process, (B) is a correction counter process, and (C) is a flowchart showing a flow of arrival flag processing. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the lever processing at the time of AT entry in the said slot machine. In the slot machine, (A) is a loop CU rank set process, (B) is a seven-loop lottery process, and (C) is a flowchart showing the flow of a gold seven-loop lottery correction process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the bell count counter correction processing in the said slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the weight processing at the time of a lever in the said slot machine. In the slot machine, (A) is a main game state number 1 lever process, (B) is a chance mode number determination process, and (C) is a flowchart showing the flow of the main game state number 2 and 5 lever process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the lever processing after AT winning in the said slot machine. In the slot machine, (A) is a flowchart showing the flow of main game state number 3 lever processing, and (B) is a flow chart showing the flow of gold seven loop rewriting lottery correction processing. In the slot machine, (A) is a flowchart showing the flow of main game state number 4 lever processing, and (B) is a flow chart showing the flow of AT cycle preferential game number lottery processing. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the standby effect processing in the said slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the section type number management game end processing in the said slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the cumulative counter processing in the said slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main game state number 0 total stop processing in the said slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the end processing after the AT rush in the said slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the continuation flow of the end process after the AT rush. In the slot machine, (A) is a flowchart showing the flow of the main game state number 1 full stop process, and (B) is a flowchart showing the flow of the main game state number 2 and 5 all stop process. In the above slot machine, it is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main game state number 3 total stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows the continuation flow of the said main game state number 3 total stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows another continuation flow of the said main game state number 3 total stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main game state number 4 total stop processing in the said slot machine. In the slot machine, (A) is a flowchart showing the flow of the main game state number 6 all-stop processing, and (B) is a flowchart showing the flow of the main game state number 7 all-stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of advantageous section clear counter management processing in the said slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the timer interrupt processing in the said slot machine. It is a front view of the stop switch unit which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the lighting pattern of the stop switch lamp of the said stop switch unit in the normal state 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows the lighting pattern of the said stop switch lamp in the normal state 2. It is a figure which shows the lighting pattern of the said stop switch lamp in an abnormality state 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows the lighting pattern of the said stop switch lamp in an abnormal state 2. The AT notification display according to the third embodiment is shown, (A) is a front view of the AT notification display, (B) is a diagram showing the arrangement of segment LEDs in the 7-segment display, and (C) is a 7-segment display. It is a figure which shows the lighting mode of a vessel. It is a figure which shows an example of the operation content according to the progress state of the game of the AT notification display. It is a figure which shows an example of the display content according to the progress of the game of the AT notification display. It is a figure which shows an example of the display content according to the timing of power-off and power-off recovery of the AT notification display. It is a transition diagram of the gaming state in the 4th embodiment. In the fourth embodiment, (A) is a diagram showing the contents of the charge suggestion mode lottery, and (B) is a diagram showing the contents of the AT lottery. In the fourth embodiment, (A) is a charge suggestion generation lottery (when charge suggestion mode = 1), (B) is a charge suggestion generation lottery (when charge suggestion mode = 2), and (C) is a charge suggestion generation lottery (when charge suggestion mode = 2). It is a figure which shows the content of each of the charge suggestion mode = 3). It is a figure which shows an example of the transition from the AT game state to the ending game state in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the game progress control processing in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of each game state lever processing in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the AT number counter update process in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main game state 5 lever processing in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of advantageous section flag management all stop processing in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main game state 5 total stop processing in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the limit determination process in 4th Embodiment. In the fifth embodiment, (A) is a diagram showing a first conversation effect display, and (B) is a diagram showing a second conversation effect display. In the fifth embodiment, (A) is a diagram showing another aspect of the range image in the dialogue display of the conversation effect display, and (B) is a diagram showing an embodiment in which the dialogue display of the conversation effect display is superimposed and displayed. In the fifth embodiment, (A) is another embodiment in which the dialogue display of the conversation effect display is superimposed, and (B) is a diagram showing an embodiment in which the error notification display is superimposed on the conversation effect display. In the fifth embodiment, (A) is a mode in which the conversation effect display is displayed while the push navigation effect display is being displayed, and (B) is another mode in which the conversation effect display is displayed while the push navigation effect display is being displayed. It is a figure which shows. In the fifth embodiment, (A) is a diagram showing a first subtitle effect display, and (B) is a diagram showing a second subtitle effect display. In the fifth embodiment, (A) is a diagram showing another aspect of the first subtitle effect display, and (B) is a diagram showing another aspect of the second subtitle effect display. In the fifth embodiment, (A) is a diagram showing a mode in which a background frame is attached to the characters of the second subtitle effect display, and (B) is a diagram showing a mode in which an error notification display is displayed together with the second subtitle effect display. .. In the fifth embodiment, (A) is a diagram showing a mode in which the subtitle effect display is displayed while the push navigation effect display is being displayed, and (B) is a diagram showing a mode in which the characters in the subtitle effect display are displayed as if they are garbled. be. It is a figure which shows the expectation degree effect display in 5th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the transition of the display at the time of performing a GET effect in 5th Embodiment in the order of (A)-(F). It is a timing chart which shows the relationship of the timing of the third stop operation, push navigation effect display, game value addition, GET effect voice, GET effect display, and subtitle effect display when executing GET effect in the fifth embodiment. In the fifth embodiment, (A) is a diagram showing a first scene switching effect, and (B) is a diagram showing a second scene switching effect. In the fifth embodiment, (A) is a diagram showing a display state of the image display unit immediately before the darkening effect is executed, and (B) is a diagram showing a display state of the image display unit when the darkening effect is executed. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the blackout effect in 5th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the TOTAL display in 5th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the TOTAL display in 5th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the TOTAL display in 5th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the TOTAL display in 5th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the TOTAL display in 5th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the TOTAL display in 5th Embodiment.

A slot machine (rotating drum type gaming machine), which is a typical gaming machine, generally has a control related to the progress of a game using a reel (also referred to as a “rotating cylinder”) (for example, a reel drive control and a combination determination (“turning cylinder”). A main control board ("combination lottery") control, game media such as game medals input / payout control, game state transition control between multiple game states with different winning combination determination probabilities, etc.) (Also referred to as "main control means") and various effects for the purpose of improving the interest of the game according to the game situation (image effect by image display device (also referred to as "liquid crystal display device"), voice effect by speaker device, etc.) It is equipped with a sub-control board (also referred to as "sub-control means") that controls the execution of the above, and information transmission (transmission) between both boards is performed in only one direction from the main control board to the sub-control board. It is possible.

Further, in a slot machine, an effective line is generally set by inserting a specified number of game media, and a reel rotation start operation such as tilting a start lever (also referred to as a "start lever" or "start switch") is a game. By being performed by a person, a combination determination process (also referred to as "role lottery process" or "internal lottery") is performed, and one of the game roles (also simply referred to as "role") or loss is determined, and then a plurality of game combinations are determined. The reel starts to rotate. When a predetermined rotation speed is reached after the rotation of a plurality of reels starts, the reel rotation stop operation such as pressing the stop switch is enabled, and the player performs the reel rotation stop operation for each reel, so that each reel can be stopped. Is designed to stop rotating in sequence.

Usually, the rotation stop of a plurality of reels is controlled based on the timing of the reel rotation stop operation by the player and the determined combination. That is, each reel is controlled so that it can be stopped at an arbitrary timing within a predetermined time (usually, a time during which a maximum of 5 symbols can be moved) from the timing when the reel rotation stop operation is performed, whereby the winning combination is determined. The winning combination (also referred to as "establishment allowable combination") determined by processing (also referred to as "election" or "winning") is established as much as possible (combination of symbols constituting the establishment allowable combination (also referred to as "corresponding symbol")). Is stopped and displayed on the valid line), and the winning combination that has not been determined by the winning combination determination process is not established (the corresponding symbols constituting the winning combination other than the winning combination are not stopped and displayed on the valid line). In addition, the symbol combination that is stopped and displayed is also referred to as a "roll".

Further, as a game role, a special role also called a bonus role is generally provided in addition to a normal role called a re-game role or a small role. A re-game combination is a re-game (a player can perform the next game without introducing a new game medium), although the game medium (game value) is not given (cannot be acquired) even if it is established. Also known as a "replay role" in the role. A small role is a role that enables the acquisition of a predetermined number of game media at the time of establishment, and is also called a "winning role". A bonus role (special role) is a role in which a special game state (also referred to as a "special role", "special game", or "bonus game (game)") can be activated (settable) when the game is established. Is. The special gaming states are, for example, the role determination probability of a predetermined small role (simply "decision probability" is also possible, and other "role lottery probability" (simply "lottery probability" is also possible), "role selection probability" (simply). It is a gaming state in which the "selection probability" is also possible) and the "winning probability" (may be simply referred to as the "winning probability") is higher than usual.

In many cases, only a small number of symbols are arranged on each reel. Therefore, even when a special combination is determined, the player performs a reel rotation stop operation for each reel at a timing at which the corresponding symbol can be stopped and displayed while discriminating the symbol to be rotated and displayed (such as this). If the operation cannot be performed (also called "pushing"), it is difficult to establish a special role. However, if a special role has been decided but it cannot be established, the information indicating that the special role has been decided will be carried over to the next game ("Special". It is also called "carrying over the winning of the role", "carrying over the winning of the special role", etc.), and even for players who are not good at pushing, the opportunity to establish the decided special role is guaranteed (having a winning). There are also special roles that cannot be surpassed).

Further, in the conventional slot machine, a plurality of RT states (game states) having different probability of determining the combination of the re-game combination are provided, and the predetermined conditions are satisfied (for example, the special combination is won based on the combination determination process). , The corresponding symbol of the special role is displayed, the game related to the special role is completed, the predetermined symbol combination is stopped and displayed), and it is generally made to shift to another RT state. Are known. Such a transition between RT states is controlled by the main control board because the combination (re-game combination) has a variation in the combination determination probability. Further, the period in which the winning combination probability of the replaying combination is controlled to the highest set RT state may be referred to as a replay time.

On the other hand, it is also possible to set a game period called AT (assist time) to notify information so that the player can play a game advantageously, and perform a predetermined notification effect (assist effect) within this game period. ing. Such an AT may be set during a period (replay time) controlled to the RT state in which the probability of determining the role of the replaying combination is set to the highest, and the AT during such a replay time may be set. It is generally called ART (assist replay time). Actually, even if the winning combination probability of the replaying combination is not controlled to the highest set RT state, ART (assist) is a state in which it is decided to control to such an RT state. Replay time) is also called. As an assist effect performed during AT, for example, when a small winning combination that enables acquisition of a game medium is determined, the small winning combination is notified or the determined small winning combination is established (a corresponding symbol is an effective line). The operation mode of the stop switch (operation order indicating the order in which multiple stop switches should be operated (also referred to as "push order") and the stop switch, which are required to display the stop on the top, are displayed. It is known to notify the operation position (also referred to as "push position") indicating when the reel should be operated at what rotation position. It should be noted that a game combination (combination determination result) in which the symbol combination stopped and displayed differs depending on the difference in the pushing order is also referred to as a "pushing order combination". Further, a game in which an assist effect is performed during AT is also referred to as an "assist game".

There is also a slot machine (also referred to as a "sub AT machine") in which the above-mentioned control process related to AT (also referred to as "AT-related control process") is performed exclusively by a sub control means. However, since there was a problem that AT could be forcibly set by performing fraudulent acts (goto acts) on the sub-control means, it is more difficult to perform fraudulent acts than the sub-control means these days. There are many slot machines (also referred to as "main AT machines") that perform a part of AT-related control processing by the main control means. For example, the main control means exclusively performs the process related to the AT setting and the process of determining the push order to be notified during the AT, and the sub control means is mainly determined by the main control means during the AT set by the main control means. There is known a main AT machine that performs a process of executing notification (assist effect) of the pressed order. In such a main AT machine, various information about the AT is managed by the main control means, and the information is appropriately transmitted from the main control means to the sub control means.

Generally, in slot machines, on the game store side, the role determination result ("role lottery result" (simply "lottery result" is also possible), "role selection result" (simply "selection result" is also possible), "role winning result" (It may be referred to simply as "winning result"). The setting value for setting the probability of determining (may be simply referred to as "winning result") can be changed within a range of multiple stages. Since the difference in the winning combination probability (also referred to as "setting difference") affects the payout rate of the slot machine, the set value is an index for the game store to manage the payout rate, and is used by the player. It has become of great interest as an index for acquiring more game media. Among the combination determination results (winning combinations), those in which the combination determination probability does not change at any set value (also referred to as "combination determination result without setting difference") and those in which the combination determination probability changes depending on the setting difference (also referred to as "combination determination result without setting difference"). It is also divided into "results of winning combinations with different settings").

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the above drawings.
In the following description, the "combination determination process" is defined by a plurality of preset combination determination result numbers (composed of one or more game combinations or losses (except when no loss is set)). It means a selection act (also referred to as "role determination") such as a lottery performed using an electronic device or the like in order to randomly select one or more combination determination result numbers (winning items). .. Here, the combination determination result number is one or more game combinations (also referred to as "establishment allowable combination" or "winning combination") that are allowed to be established in the game in which the combination determination result number is determined (elected). It defines) or loss. In addition, the combination determination is also referred to as "internal lottery" or "role lottery", and the "selection" in the lottery or winning is also referred to as "lottery" or "sen".

In addition, when describing "establishment of a game combination", "establishment of a game combination", etc., "establishment" means a game combination corresponding to the determined combination determination result number (a game combination with a payout of a game medal). A combination of symbols (corresponding symbols) constituting a game combination (regardless of whether it is a small combination) or a game combination without payout (re-game combination or special combination) is a predetermined stop mode (for example, a mode in which it is lined up on an effective line described later). It is used as a concept to indicate that it is displayed in. However, regarding the timing of establishment, for example, when the reel stop operation is performed at the timing when the corresponding symbol of the game combination can be stopped and displayed on the effective line, or the corresponding symbol of the game combination is stopped on the effective line. It can be set to an appropriate timing, such as when it is displayed, when the slot machine identifies that the corresponding symbol of the game combination is stopped and displayed on the valid line, or when the identified result is stored in the storage area. ..

Further, in the following description, the provisions necessary for playing a game among the operation (maintenance operation) for inserting a game medal into the medal insertion slot 21, which will be described later, and the credited (stored) game medal by the player. The pressing operation of the 1-BET switch 22 or the MAX-BET switch 23 for using a number of game medals for a game is collectively referred to as a betting operation. Further, this bet operation, the pressing operation of the clearing switch 24 described later, and the tilting operation of the start lever (also referred to as “start switch”) 25 by the player (more specifically, by moving the grip attached to the tip of the shaft). The operation of tilting the shaft) and the pressing operation of the stop switch (also referred to as "stop button") 26a, 26b, 26c are collectively referred to as a game operation. In general, "insertion" in a slot machine means "inserting a game medal into a slot machine" or "using a game medal for a game". There is. In the following explanation, basically, the word "input" is used in the former meaning, and the word "bet" is used in the latter meaning.

Further, the "number of payouts" (also referred to as "number of payouts") of game medals means the number of game medals given to the player in one game. In addition, the act of paying out the game medal includes the act of actually paying out the game medal from the slot machine (also referred to as "actual payout") and the game medal stored in the slot machine electrically. There is an act of increasing the stored numerical value (also called "storage addition payout").

Further, the "number of acquired medals" (also referred to as "number of acquired medals") is a game medal acquired by a player during a predetermined period (which can be arbitrarily set, for example, an AT period or a bonus period). It means a numerical value counted as the total number of. The "difference number" (also referred to as "difference number") of the game medals is a value obtained by subtracting the total number of bet game medals from the total number of game medals paid out in a predetermined period (negative value). Sometimes) means. Although the "number of acquired medals" and the "number of differences" of game medals can be used as different concepts, they are treated as synonymous below.

Further, "freeze" means that the execution of a predetermined control process related to the progress of the game is delayed for a certain period of time. Freezes are set when the operation of the start lever 25 is accepted (also referred to as "freeze at the start of reel rotation") and freeze set after the rotation of all reels is stopped ("freeze when the reel rotation is stopped"). Also referred to as) can be provided as appropriate. During the freeze period, the game operation by the player is not effectively accepted. In addition, during the freeze period, a rotating cylinder effect (also referred to as "reel effect") may be performed. The rotating cylinder effect is an effect of rotating the reels 3a, 3b, and 3c, which will be described later, to stop and display an arbitrary symbol combination regardless of the game operation by the player.

In the following description, the "push navigation" refers to a process (act) of notifying the push order and the push position in order to assist the establishment of the game combination selected by the combination determination. Among the push navigation, the one that assists the establishment of the replay role is "RP navigation" (RP is an abbreviation for replay), the one that assists the establishment of the winning role (small role) is "winning navigation", and the specific design is What assists the stop display is also referred to as "eye-pushing navigation" (mainly performed on the sub-control means side). Also, when you want to distinguish between the push navigation performed on the main control means side and the push navigation performed on the sub control means side, the former is referred to as "main side push navigation" ("main side RP navigation", "main side winning navigation"". , "Main side push navigation"), and the latter is also called "sub side push navigation" ("sub side RP navigation", "sub side winning navigation", "sub side push navigation"), or "push navigation" It is also called "directing" ("RP navigation directing", "winning navigation directing", "pressing navigation directing").

Further, in the following description and drawings, numerical values may be expressed as binary numbers or hexadecimal numbers in addition to decimal numbers. Therefore, in order to distinguish between them, "B" is added to the end of the numerical value when it is expressed in binary, and "H" is added to the end of the numerical value when it is expressed in hexadecimal. In addition, when expressing in decimal, nothing is added to the end of the numerical value.

[First Embodiment]
FIG. 1 shows a slot machine (referred to as “slot machine 1”) as a first embodiment of the gaming machine according to the present invention, and hereinafter, FIGS. 1 to 20 describe the basic configuration of the slot machine 1. Will be explained with reference to.
≪Appearance of slot machine≫
As shown in FIG. 1, the slot machine 1 is provided with a front door 2 that can be opened and closed by a hinge on the front surface of the main body housing, and this hinge is attached to the left side of the front door 2 in FIG. The right side of the front door 2 in the figure opens and closes. The upper panel assembly 10, the middle panel assembly 20, the lower panel assembly 30, and the saucer assembly 40 are attached to the front surface of the front door 2 in this order from the top.

At the center of the upper panel assembly 10, the display screen 11a of the image display device (also referred to as “liquid crystal display device”) 11 (see FIG. 2) arranged on the back surface side thereof is arranged so as to face the front. A first effect lamp 12, a second effect lamp 13a, 13b, and a third effect lamp 14a, 14b are arranged in the peripheral portion. Further, a pair of upper speakers 15a and 15b are arranged on the lower left and right sides of the display screen 11a.

At the center of the middle panel assembly 20, a central panel is provided in which a display window W facing the surfaces of the three reels 3a, 3b, and 3c arranged side by side in the main body housing is formed, and this display is provided. Below the window W is a medal slot 21 for inserting a game medal (game medium), a 1-BET switch 22 for betting one game medal within the credited range, and a maximum bet allowance (maximum bet allowance). MAX-BET switch 23 for betting game medals at once (for example, 3), clearing switch 24 for paying out bet game medals and / or credited game medals, all reels 3a, 3b, The start lever 25, which is operated when starting the rotation of 3c (the reel is also referred to as a "rotary cylinder"), and the three stop switches 26a, 26b for individually stopping the rotation of each of the reels 3a, 3b, 3c. , 26c (the stop switch 26a on the left side in the figure corresponds to the reel 3a, the stop switch 26b in the center corresponds to the reel 3b, and the stop switch 26c on the right side corresponds to the reel 3c), and is inserted from the medal insertion slot 21. A reject switch 27 or the like for returning the accumulated game medals is provided.

The inside of the medal insertion slot 21 is a receiving passage (leading to the hopper 50 described later) through which the inserted game medal is passed when the inserted game medal is effectively accepted, and the inside is the case where the inserted game medal is not accepted. It branches into a return passage through which the game medals pass (leading to the game medal payout exit 41 described later), and a blocker 48 (see FIG. 2) is provided at the branch portion. The blocker 48 guides the game medals inserted into the medal slot 21 to the receiving passage during the period when the inserted game medals are effectively accepted, and is inserted into the medal slot 21 during the other period. The receiving passage and the returning passage are selectively configured so that one can be opened and the other can be closed so that the game medal is guided to the return passage. In the following description, the ON state of the blocker 48 indicates a state in which the game medal inserted in the medal insertion slot 21 is guided to the receiving passage (game medal acceptable state), and the OFF state of the blocker 48 means that the medal is inserted. It is assumed that the game medal inserted into the mouth 21 is guided to the return passage (game medal unacceptable state).

Further, inside the medal insertion slot 21, three insertion medal sensors 28a, 28b, 28c (see FIG. 2) for detecting a game medal are provided. The inserted medal sensor 28a detects that the inserted game medal has been inserted into the medal insertion slot 21, and is located upstream of the position where the blocker 48 is installed on the passage through which the inserted game medal flows down. It is installed in. The insertion medal sensor 28b detects that the game medal inserted in the medal insertion slot 21 is guided to the receiving passage and is effectively accepted, and is downstream from the position where the blocker 48 is installed (hopper described later). It is located at the position (close to 50). The insertion medal sensor 28c detects that the game medal inserted into the medal insertion slot 21 has passed the branch portion between the receiving passage and the return passage, and is near the branch portion (position where the blocker 48 is installed). It is located at a position slightly closer to the inserted medal sensor 28b).

When both the inserted medal sensor 28a and the inserted medal sensor 28b detect a game medal, it means that the game medal has been inserted into the medal insertion slot 21 and the inserted game medal has been effectively accepted. On the other hand, if the inserted medal sensor 28a detects the game medal but the inserted medal sensor 28b does not detect the game medal, the game medal is inserted into the medal insertion slot 21, but the inserted game medal is effectively accepted. It means that it was returned without. Further, when the three inserted medal sensors 28a, 28b, 28c detect the passage of the game medal in an order different from the predetermined order (the order of 28a, 28c, 28b), or when some of the inserted medal sensors pass the game medal. If is not detected, it means that an abnormal passage such as a backflow of a game medal has occurred.

The display window W is configured so that when all the three reels 3a to 3c are stopped, three symbols for each reel, a total of nine symbols, are visually displayed by the player. The winning line 29 that horizontally connects the symbol display areas in the middle of the reels 3a, 3b, and 3c is a winning line that is activated by betting a specified number of game medals, and is on the activated winning line. It is configured so that it can be determined whether or not a game combination has been established based on the combination of symbols displayed as stopped. The activated winning line is also referred to as a "valid line". Further, the symbol display areas DA1 and DA2 (areas surrounded by the two-dot chain line in the figure) are provided on the left side and the upper side of the display window W in the middle panel assembly 20. The symbol display areas DA1 and DA2 are areas for displaying symbols related to symbol combinations that are important for playing games, and will be described in detail later.

Further, various display lamps composed of LED lamps and the like are arranged in the slot machine 1. In the present embodiment, as display lamps, MAX-BET switch display lamp 46a, BET number display lamp 46b, insertable display lamp 46c, game start display lamp 46d, re-game display lamp 46e, status display lamp 46f, number of times display lamp It is provided with 46 g, a storage number display lamp 46h, and a payout number display lamp 46j. These display lamps are configured to be controlled by the main control board 60 (main control means 100) described later.

The MAX-BET switch indicator lamp 46a is lit in a situation where a game medal can be bet, and is arranged inside the MAX-BET switch 23. When the MAX-BET switch 23 is lit, the MAX-BET switch 23 is partially or wholly lit. It is designed to make it shine. Other display lamps are arranged laterally or below the display window W in the middle panel assembly 20.

The BET number display lamp 46b (hereinafter, also referred to as “BET lamp 46b”) displays the number of bet game medals, and is a 1-BET display that lights up when there is one or more bet game medals. It is composed of a lamp 46bC, a 2-BET indicator lamp 46bB that is lit when two or more lamps, and a MAX-BET indicator lamp 46bA that is lit when three lamps are used. The insertable indicator lamp 46c is lit in a situation where a game medal can be inserted, and the game start indicator lamp 46d is lit in a situation where a game can be started by operating the start lever 25. Is to be done. The re-game display lamp 46e is turned on when the re-game combination described later is established in any game and the game medal is automatically bet by the automatic bet process described later.

The status display lamp 46f is lit when the stored (credit) game medals are settled, and the number display lamp 46g is, for example, the number of executable push navigations (when AT is set). Every time the push navigation is executed, it is subtracted by 1, and it may be increased by lottery or the like). The stored number display lamp 46h (hereinafter, also referred to as “CRE lamp 46h”) displays the number of stored game medals while incrementing by 1, and the payout number display lamp 46j has a small winning combination described later. The number of game medals to be paid out is incremented by 1 and displayed. The stored number display lamp 46h and the payout number display lamp 46j each display two 7-segment indicators (seven-segment lamps for displaying numbers and a decimal point (dot)) in order to display the numbers in the upper digit and the numbers in the lower digit. It consists of one segment lamp representing).

Further, the payout number display lamp 46j is also configured to display characters (alphabet) and numbers indicating the type of the error when some abnormality (error) occurs in the slot machine 1. The errors set in this embodiment include HP error, HE error, H0 error, CE error, CP error, CH error, C0 error, C1 error, FE error, E1 error, E5 error, E6 error, E7 error, and the like. There is. The HP error is an error when it is determined that the game medal has accumulated at the medal payout exit of the hopper 50, which will be described later, and the HE error is an error when it is determined that the game medal in the hopper 50 is empty (hopper empty error). The H0 error is an error when it is determined that the game medal has passed the payout sensor abnormally. The CE error is an error when it is determined by the inserted medal sensor that the game medal has accumulated (game medal retention error), and the CP error is an error when it is determined that the inserted game medal has been illegally passed. The C0 error is an error when it is determined that there is an abnormal input in the inserted medal sensor, and the C1 error is an error when it is determined that there is an abnormality in the passage of the inserted medal sensor. The FE error is an error (full error) when it is determined that the auxiliary storage 85 described later is full, and the E1 error is an error (RAM error) when the contents of the storage device (RAM) are not normal when the power is turned on. Yes, the E5 error is an error (rotation stop error) when the combination of symbols at the time of stopping all rotations becomes abnormal (corresponding symbols constituting the winning combination other than the establishment allowable combination are stopped display). The E6 error is an error (set value error) when the value (set value) of the set value described later for determining the winning combination determination probability is out of the range, and the E7 error is the update of the built-in random number used in each lottery or the like. This is an error (built-in random number error) when an abnormal state is detected. Each error of E1, E5, E6, E7 (collectively referred to as "E system error") is canceled by the setting change described later, and other errors are canceled by the operation of the reset switch 82 described later. It has become like.

Further, the payout number display lamp 46j also has a function of displaying a navigation number described later, which indicates the operation order (pushing order) of the stop switches 26a to 26c. The payout number display lamp 46j for displaying the navigation number is also referred to as a "main side push order display". Further, the payout number display lamp 46j also has a function of displaying the set value described later at the time of confirming the setting and changing the setting described later. The payout number display lamp 46j for displaying the set value is also referred to as a “set value display”. In addition to the payout number display lamp 46j, a dedicated set value display (7-segment display) only for displaying the set value may be provided in the housing of the slot machine 1. As the mounting position of the set value display, for example, the display of the set value display is external on the main control board 60 with the main control board 60 mounted at a predetermined position in the housing of the slot machine 1. The position that can be visually recognized from the above can be mentioned.

A transparent lower panel cover 31 is attached to the central portion of the lower panel assembly 30, and decorative lamps 32a and 32b are arranged at both left and right ends thereof. A translucent lower panel base and a lower panel illuminating lamp (neither of which is shown) provided with a predetermined pattern are attached to the back surface side of the lower panel cover 31, and the lower panel illuminating lamp is lit. By doing so, the design of the lower panel base is configured to be illuminated from the rear surface side.

The saucer assembly 40 is provided with a game medal payout outlet 41 for paying out game medals, and a game medal storage plate 42 for storing game medals so as to face the game medal payout outlet 41. An ashtray 43 is provided on the left side of the game medal storage plate 42. Further, on the left and right sides of the game medal payout outlet 41, a speaker port 45a composed of a large number of small holes facing the front surface of a pair of lower speakers 44a and 44b (see FIG. 2) arranged on the back side of the saucer assembly 40. , 45b are formed.

Further, a hopper 50 (see FIG. 2) for paying out a game medal obtained when a predetermined winning mode is configured as a result of the game is provided in the main body housing, and the hopper 50 is provided. A medal detection unit 51 (see FIG. 2) for detecting a game medal is provided. Further, the hopper 50 has a function of physically accommodating a game medal that has been inserted and effectively accepted. Further, an auxiliary storage 85 (see FIG. 2) for storing game medals overflowing from the hopper 50 is provided in the vicinity of the hopper 50, and the auxiliary storage 85 is in a full state (from the auxiliary storage 85). A full detection unit 86 (see FIG. 2) is provided to detect whether or not the game medal is in a state where it may overflow.

≪Reel≫
Each reel 3a, 3b, 3c is configured to be rotated by being driven by a stepping motor 35a, 35b, 35c (see FIG. 2), respectively. Further, each reel 3a, 3b, 3c is composed of a translucent member, and a translucent reel tape on which a plurality of types of symbols (see FIG. 9) are displayed is displayed on the outer peripheral surface thereof. It is pasted. Further, back lamps 38a, 38b, 38c (see FIG. 2) are arranged on the inner surface side of each reel 3a, 3b, 3c, and by turning on the back lamps 38a, 38b, 38c, a display window is displayed. The area of each reel 3a, 3b, 3c facing in W is illuminated as a whole from the inner surface side, or a predetermined symbol combination (for example, on the effective line 29 or on the effective line 29, which is stopped and displayed on each reel 3a, 3b, 3c, etc. It is configured to illuminate only a part of each reel 3a, 3b, 3c so as to make the corresponding symbols of the game combinations arranged at different positions from the effective line 29 stand out.

≪Start lever≫
The position where the start lever 25 is turned on will be described with reference to FIGS. 3A and 3B. Here, the start lever 25 illustrated in FIGS. 3A and 3B is shown by omitting configurations other than the grip 25g shaft 25s in order to make it easier to see the movement of the lever. 3A shows a state in which the start lever 25 is not operated, FIG. 3A shows a side view, FIG. 3A shows a front view, and FIG. 3C shows a top view. The start lever 25 is shown as a single unit in (a) side view and (b) front view, but in the (c) top view, the central part of the middle panel assembly 20 (more specifically, the start lever 25). The mounting surface) is also shown in the figure.

When the start lever 25 is not operated, the start lever 25 is stationary at the initial position, and the initial position when the slot machine 1 is viewed from the side is as shown in FIGS. 3 (a) and 3 (a). , The central axis Lx of the cylindrical shaft 25s is parallel to the horizontal direction. Further, as shown in FIGS. 3A and 3C, the initial position when the slot machine 1 is viewed from above is such that the central axis Lx of the shaft 36s is relative to the mounting surface of the start lever 25 in the middle panel assembly 20. It forms a right angle.

The start lever 25 can be tilted in the vertical and horizontal directions (see FIGS. 3A and 3B) from the initial position. Here, the tilting axis in the shaft 25s when the lever tilts upward (also referred to as “directly above”) or downwardly (also referred to as “directly below”) in the vertical direction is shown in FIGS. 3 (a) and 3 (a). Indicated by O _UD . Here, the shaft 25s does not necessarily have to be pivotally supported by the tilt axis _OUD in the vertical direction, and the main case does not depend on the tilt axis, for example, as in the start lever disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-21434. The shaft of the lever may be tiltably gripped in all directions (up / down / left / right 360 °) by the washer, the receiving member, and the spring. The start lever disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-21434 can be tilted in all directions, and can be turned on even if it is pulled toward the front (player side) or pushed toward the gaming machine side. The shaft is gripped on.

Next, with reference to FIG. 3B, a position where the start lever 25 changes from off to on by tilting operation from the initial position (hereinafter, also referred to as “on position”) will be described. The position where the start lever 25 changes from off to on is also the position of the lever where it is determined that the start lever 25 has been operated in the main control means 100. Here, when the tilt of the lever is detected by a sensor such as a photointerruptor having a light emitting portion and a light receiving portion, the light emitted from the light emitting portion is emitted from the shaft of the lever depending on the method of detecting the tilt of the lever. The state in which the light receiving portion can detect the reflected light on the rear end surface may be set as the off state of the start lever 25, and the state in which the light receiving portion cannot detect the reflected light described above may be set as the on state of the start lever 25. .. Further, by adopting a known configuration different from this, the state in which the light receiving unit cannot detect the light from the light emitting unit is set to the off state of the start lever 25, and the light receiving unit can detect the light from the light emitting unit. The state in which the start lever 25 is on may be set to the ON state.

Hereinafter, a point on the surface of the grip 25g located on the extension of the central axis Lx of the shaft 25s is referred to as a reference point P, and this reference point P is referred to as the tip of the lever. In particular, the reference point P when the lever is in the initial position is referred to as a reference point _PN . Further, as shown in FIG. 3 (b), the reference point when the lever is tilted from the initial position in the upward direction to reach the on position is described as _PU , and the lever is tilted in the downward direction from the initial position. The reference point when the on position is reached is described as _PD . In the present embodiment, the lever is turned on before reaching the limit position (indicated by the broken line in FIG. 3B) where the lever can be tilted in the upward direction. In other words, if the reference point at the limit position in the straight upward direction is P _UL , the angle of _∠ P NO _UD P _UL is larger than the angle of _∠ P NO _UD P _UL . However, the on position and the limit position in the direction directly above may be matched.

Further, although not shown in FIG. 3 (b), the on position may be set before reaching the limit position where the lever can be tilted even in the direct downward direction, and the on position and the limit position in the direct downward direction are used. May match.

In the present embodiment, the length of the locus (arc P _N P _U ) drawn by the tip of the lever (reference point P) when the lever is tilted from the initial position to the on position in the straight upward direction is set to L _U , and the lever is set to the initial position. If the length of the locus (arc P _N P _D ) drawn by the tip of the lever (reference point P) when tilted from the position to the on position in the downward direction is _LD , the length L _U is the length L _D. Is longer than. In other words, the _angle of _∠PNOUDPU is _{larger than} the _angle of _∠PNOUDPUD .

Generally, when starting a game, most players operate the start lever 25 downward. Therefore, as described above, the burden on the player can be reduced by reducing the operation amount (operation width) until the start lever 25 is turned on. On the other hand, by increasing the amount of operation in the upward direction, for example, when the player picks up the dropped medal and then raises his / her head, the lever of the start lever 25 is moved upward by the head or the like. Since the distance until the lever reaches the on position is longer than in the downward direction, the effect that the possibility that the start lever 25 is unintentionally turned on can be expected to be reduced. Furthermore, when operating the lever of the start lever 25 from directly below to directly above, the force required to tilt it to the on position is greater than when operating it from directly above to directly below due to the influence of gravity applied to the grip 25g. Since a large amount is required and the distance to reach the on position is long, it is possible to make it difficult for the start lever 25 to be turned on in the operation of the lever from directly below to directly above, contrary to the player's intention.

≪Basic operation for playing games≫
To play a game on the slot machine 1, first bet by actually inserting a game medal into the medal slot 21, or by operating either the 1-BET switch 22 or the MAX-BET switch 23, the range of credits. By betting a specified number of game medals within, the winning line 29 is activated. In the present embodiment, the specified number of game medals required to activate the winning line 29 is set to 3 in each of the non-RT, RT1, RT2, and RT3 RT states described later. However, the specified number is not limited to this, and it is possible to change the specified number as appropriate, such as setting the specified number to a different value according to the RT state or the like. Further, a plurality of winning lines may be provided, and the number of activated winning lines and the like may be changed according to the number of bets on the game medal.

Next, when the player operates the start lever 25, the number of bets is fixed (the bet game medals are used for the game), the combination determination process described later is performed, and then the minimum game time (minimum game time (). The time (for example, 4.1 seconds) that must be secured at the minimum between the start of rotation of all reels in one game and the start of rotation of all reels in the next game has elapsed. After confirming that, each reel 3a to 3c starts to rotate, and a plurality of types of symbols displayed on the outer peripheral surface of the reels 3a to 3c move up and down (usually from top to bottom) in the display window W. Will be done. Then, when the rotation of the reels 3a to 3c reaches a predetermined speed and becomes a constant speed rotation, each of the stop switches 26a to 26c is activated (the operation of the stop switch can be effectively accepted), and the player can use the stop switch 26a. Is configured to stop the rotation of the reel 3a, the stop switch 26b to stop the rotation of the reel 3b, and the stop switch 26c to stop the rotation of the reel 3c.

Here, if it is determined that the symbol combination stopped and displayed on the valid line 29 is in a predetermined winning mode (corresponding symbol of a game combination capable of winning a game medal), each winning mode The number of game medals corresponding to the above is paid out by the hopper 50 or added as credits.

≪Connection between control board and each device≫
In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 2, as a main control board for controlling the slot machine 1, three control boards, a main control board 60, a sub-main control board 70A, and a sub-sub control board 70B, are provided (sub). The main control board 70A and the sub-sub control board 70B are collectively referred to as the sub control board 70). Main control related to the progress of the game (including drive control of reels 3a to 3c, combination determination processing, etc.) is performed by a control circuit arranged on the main control board 60, and illumination by lamps such as back lamps 38a to 38c. The control and the like are configured to be performed by a control circuit arranged on the sub-main control board 70A. Further, the effect image display control by the image display device 11 and the sound generation control from the speakers such as the upper speakers 15a and 15b are configured to be mainly performed by the control circuit arranged on the sub-sub control board 70B. There is. Further, information transmission between the main control board 60 and the sub control board 70 can be performed in only one direction from the main control board 60 to the sub-main control board 70A, and the sub-main control board 70A and the sub-sub Information transmission with the control board 70B can be performed in both directions.

The main control board 60 includes a main CPU 61 that performs various arithmetic processes related to the game, a ROM 62 that is a read-only storage device that stores control programs and the like, and a RAM 63 that is a storage device that can write and read information (““ The "RAM" is also referred to as "RWM"), and each drive circuit or the like operates according to the control program stored in the ROM 62 to control the progress of the game in the slot machine 1. It has become like. The ROM 62 and the RAM 63 are non-volatile storage devices, and are configured to hold the stored information even when power is not supplied.

The main CPU 61 has a clock pulse generator 64 for generating a clock pulse (clock signal), a divider 65 for dividing the clock pulse generated by the clock pulse generator 64, and a clock pulse (or divided). A random number generator 66 for generating a random number used for determining a winning combination and the like, and a random number acquisition circuit 67 for capturing a random number generated by the random number generator 66 are connected based on the clock pulse). The clock pulse generator 64 is composed of two oscillators (not shown), and clock signals asynchronous to each other are output from each oscillator. Hereinafter, a clock signal having a predetermined frequency output from one oscillator is referred to as an internal clock, and a clock signal having a predetermined frequency output from the other oscillator (the frequency may be different from the internal clock but may be the same). Is called an external clock. For example, the internal clock is used as the operation clock of the main CPU 61 and the update clock of the random number used for a predetermined lottery other than the combination determination, and the external clock is used as the update clock of the random number used in the combination determination. The main CPU 61, ROM 62, RAM 63, frequency divider 65, random number generator 66, random number acquisition circuit 67, interface circuit 68, etc. may be mounted on one IC chip and configured as a one-chip microcomputer. Further, the main CPU 61 transmits signals to the motor drive circuit 36a, the display lamp control circuit 47, the hopper drive circuit 52, and the sub-control board 70 via the interface circuit 68, and the reel position detection circuits 37a and 37b. , 37c, configured to receive signals from the payout detection signal circuit 53 and the stowed state signal circuit 87.

The motor drive circuit 36a is a circuit for driving the stepping motors 35a, 35b, 35c that rotationally drive the reels 3a, 3b, 3c, respectively, and the display lamp control circuit 47 is the lighting of the various display lamps described above. -It is a circuit for turning off the lights. The reel position detection circuits 37a, 37b, 37c are circuits that transmit each detection signal from a reel sensor (not shown) installed on each of the reels 3a, 3b, 3c to the main control board 60 (detection circuit 37a). Corresponds to the reel 3a, the detection circuit 37b corresponds to the reel 3b, and the detection circuit 37c corresponds to the reel 3c). The hopper drive circuit 52 is a circuit that drives the hopper 50 to pay out the game medals when a small winning combination is established, and the payout detection signal circuit 53 indicates that the game medals are paid out from the hopper 50. This circuit transmits a payout detection signal to the main control board 60 when it is detected by the medal detection unit 51. The storage state signal circuit 87 is a circuit that transmits a storage state signal indicating whether or not the auxiliary storage 85 is full to the main control board 60 according to the detection result of the full detection unit 86.

Further, power from the power supply device 80 is supplied to the slot machine 1 via the main control board 60. A power switch 81, a reset switch 82, and a setting key type switch 83 are connected to the power supply device 80, and signals from each of these switches are configured to be transmitted to the main CPU 61 via the interface circuit 68. ing. Further, the main CPU 61 is configured to receive a signal from the setting change switch 84 via the interface circuit 68.

The power switch 81 is a switch that accepts power-on and power-off operations from the power supply device 80 to the slot machine 1, and the reset switch 82 has a predetermined error (an error other than the above-mentioned E system error) in the slot machine 1. When it occurs, it is a switch operated by a game clerk or the like when the cause of the error is removed and the error is resolved. By operating the reset switch 82, the error occurrence information stored in the main control board 60 and the sub control board 70 is cleared, and accordingly, the processing at the time of error resolution is performed by the main control board 60 and the sub control board 70. Will be executed. Further, the setting key type switch 83 is a switch that is operated when the setting confirmation and setting change of the setting value that determines the degree (rank) of the combination determination probability is performed, and the setting change switch 84 is, for example, the front door 2. It is a switch provided on the back side (inside the housing) and for changing the set value in a plurality of stages (6 stages in this embodiment).

When the front door 2 is open (also referred to as "door open state") and power is being supplied to the slot machine 1 (power switch 81 is ON), the setting key type switch 83 is turned ON. By being operated, the mode shifts to the setting confirmation mode in which the setting can be confirmed. Further, in the state where the door is open and the power is not supplied to the slot machine 1 (the power switch 81 is in the OFF state), the setting key type switch 83 is operated in the ON state, and the power switch 81 is operated in that state. Is operated in the ON state (the power is turned on to the slot machine 1), and the mode shifts to the setting change mode in which the setting can be changed.

In the setting key type switch 83, a predetermined key member (setting key) is inserted into a predetermined lock member (keyhole) provided on the main body side, and the setting key is rotated to turn on the setting key type switch 83. By adjusting the direction of the setting key to the position of or the position of OFF, the ON state and the OFF state can be switched. In addition, the transition to the setting confirmation mode cannot be executed when the game is being executed (when the game medal is bet (including the case where the game medal is automatically bet) or when the reel is rotating). , It is possible to execute only while waiting for a game. On the other hand, the transition to the setting change mode can be executed even when the game is being executed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 4, a procedure for shifting to the setting change mode in the state where the setting value is “4” and changing the setting value will be described. In FIG. 4, the “set value display” may be the payout number display lamp 46j, or may be a dedicated set value display provided inside the slot machine 1.

First, while the game is waiting, the door is opened, the power switch 81 is turned off, and the direction of the setting key inserted in the keyhole of the setting key type switch 83 is kept aligned with the ON position (FIG. 4, (A)). When the power switch 81 is turned on (FIG. 4, (a)), the mode shifts to the setting change mode. When the mode shifts to the setting change mode, the current setting value (more strictly, the number corresponding to the setting value) "4" is displayed on the setting value display. Here, the set value that can be displayed on the set value display is an integer of "1" to "6". Each time the setting change switch 84 is operated in this state (FIG. 4, (c)), the setting value displayed on the setting value display is incremented by 1, and the setting value can be updated step by step. .. However, if the setting change switch 84 is operated once when the setting value displayed on the setting value display is "6", which is the upper limit, the displayed setting value returns to "1". After that, each time the setting change switch 84 is operated again, the displayed setting value is incremented by 1. In this way, by operating the setting change switch 84, the set value can be changed cyclically in the range of "1" to "6".

Then, when the start lever 25 is turned on when the desired set value (“2” in the case shown in FIG. 4) is displayed (FIG. 4, (d)), the set value is “2”. After that, even if the setting change switch 84 is operated, the setting value displayed on the setting value display does not change (FIG. 4, (e)). Then, by turning off the setting key type switch 83 after the setting value is confirmed, the setting change mode ends, the setting value displayed on the setting value display disappears, and the game is on standby. Here, as the end condition of the setting change mode in the present embodiment, first, the start lever 25 is operated during the setting change mode to confirm the set value, and then the setting key type switch 83 is changed from the ON state to the OFF state. It is supposed to be. If the end condition of the setting change mode is satisfied, even if the start lever 25 is left ON (FIG. 4, (f)), the setting change mode can be set by turning the setting key type switch 83 into the OFF state. Can be terminated.

When the power switch 81 is turned off again during the game standby, and then the power switch 81 is turned on with the direction of the setting key inserted in the keyhole of the setting key type switch 83 aligned with the ON position (FIG. 4, FIG. (G)), The setting value "2" confirmed in the immediately preceding setting change mode is displayed on the setting value display. Here, when the power switch 81 is turned off without satisfying the above-mentioned end condition of the setting change mode (FIG. 4, (c)), when the power switch 81 is turned on again (FIG. 4, (FIG. 4)). K)), it will continue to shift to the setting change mode instead of waiting for the game. Further, after the power switch 81 is turned off (FIG. 4, (c)), the direction of the setting key inserted in the setting key type switch 83 is tentatively aligned with the OFF position (FIG. 4, (c)). Even if the power switch 81 is turned on (FIG. 4, (K)), the mode continues to shift to the setting change mode. In this case, in order to end the setting change mode and shift to the game standby mode, the setting key type switch 83 may be turned on and then turned off. The procedure for updating the above-mentioned set values is also referred to as a "normal procedure".

As described above, since the setting change switch 84 is provided on the back side of the front door 2, for example, when the above-mentioned dedicated setting value display is provided inside the housing of the slot machine 1, the setting value is changed. The game clerk puts his body between the opened front door 2 and the chassis of the slot machine 1, and operates the setting change switch 84 while checking the setting value displayed on the dedicated setting value display. Become.

Further, in this type of slot machine, in order to confirm whether or not the connection between the main control board 60 and each switch (see FIG. 1) provided in the middle panel assembly 20 is normally performed. Some monitor lamps corresponding to each switch (for example, an LED that lights up when the corresponding switch is turned on) are provided on the main control board. In such a slot machine, it is sufficient to check the monitor lamp on the main control board to check whether the start lever 25 can be operated correctly, so that it is not necessary to look directly at the start lever 25.

Due to the above circumstances, when operating the start lever 25 to confirm the changed set value, the game clerk turns only his arm to the front side (player side) of the front door 2 and extends his elbow to the front door 2. It can be said that there is a high possibility that the start lever 25 provided at a position close to the hinge of the door (in other words, a position far away from the game clerk) is operated without looking directly at it.

In such a situation, the start lever 25 of the present embodiment is turned on regardless of whether it is tilted up or down. Therefore, for example, the wrist of the extended arm is used as an axis, the finger is straightened, and the palm is moved up and down. By the action of making the start lever 25 (a motion similar to a beckoning action), it is possible to easily turn the start lever 25 into the ON state without directly looking at the start lever 25. Therefore, it can be said that the start lever 25 of the present embodiment has a structure that makes it easy to turn it on without directly looking at the start lever.

Further, as described with reference to FIG. 3B, the length _LD of the locus drawn by the tip of the lever when the start lever 25 is tilted from the initial position to the on position in the direct downward direction is the initial position. The length of the locus drawn by the tip of the lever when tilted from to the on position in the upward direction is shorter than the length _LU . Therefore, even if the fingertip moved from the top to the bottom slightly touches the grip of the start lever 25, there is a high possibility that the start lever 25 will be turned on. In this way, since the start lever 25 is likely to be turned on by the operation performed without looking directly at it, it is possible to minimize the movement of the body due to the setting change work, and it is related to the setting change work. The burden can be reduced.

As described above, each time the setting change switch 84 is turned on in the setting change mode, the setting value displayed on the setting value display is incremented by 1, but the setting is made with the setting change switch 84 turned on. When shifting to the change mode, the setting value displayed on the setting value display may be a setting value obtained by incrementing the setting value before shifting to the setting change mode by one.

For example, as shown in FIG. 5, when the door is open, "1" is displayed on the setting value display during the setting change mode, and the setting value is confirmed as "1", the setting change mode It is assumed that the power switch 81 is turned off without satisfying the termination condition of (FIG. 5, (a)). After that, when the power switch 81 is turned on (Fig. 5, (c)) with the direction of the setting key inserted in the setting change switch 84 aligned with the ON position (Fig. 5, (a)), the set value is displayed. "2" is displayed on the vessel. Here, if the set value when the power switch 81 is turned off during the setting change mode is "6", the set value is displayed when the power switch 81 is turned on while the setting change switch 84 is on. The set value displayed on the device is "1".

When such a configuration is adopted, the set value is already incremented by one when the setting change mode is entered. Therefore, when updating the set value by one step, the start switch 25 is turned on as it is. Setting change work is completed just by operating the state. Therefore, it is possible to shorten the time from turning on the power switch 81 until the setting change work is completed. Even if the setting change mode is entered with the setting change switch 84 turned on without adopting such a configuration, the setting values before the transition to the setting change mode are displayed on the setting value display. You may try to do it.

After the power switch 81 is turned off while the setting value is "1" in the setting change mode (FIG. 5, (a)), the direction of the setting key inserted in the setting key type switch 83 is turned off. When the power switch 81 is turned on (Fig. 5, (a)) while the setting change switch 84 is turned on (Fig. 5, (c)) in the state of being aligned with the position (Fig. 5, shown by the broken line (d)), Since the end condition of the setting change mode is not satisfied, the setting change mode is resumed. Even in such a case, "2" may be displayed on the setting value display. In order to end the setting change mode from this situation, the setting key type switch 83 may be turned on and then turned off again after the setting value is confirmed by operating the start lever 25.

With this configuration, the work time required to update the setting values can be shortened, and even if the power switch 81 and the setting key type switch 83 are unintentionally turned off during the setting change work, they can be turned off again. When the power switch 81 is turned on, the set value corresponding to the operation of the setting change switch 84 can be displayed.

Further, in the normal procedure shown in FIG. 4, when the start switch 25 is turned on in the setting change mode (FIG. 4, (d)), the set value displayed on the set value display is confirmed, and then the set value is confirmed. Even if the setting change switch 84 is operated (FIG. 4, (e)), the setting value displayed on the setting value display does not change. In such a configuration, when the setting change mode is entered with the start switch 25 turned on, the setting value displayed on the setting value display may be fixed.

For example, as shown in FIG. 6, when the door is open and "1" is displayed on the setting value display during the setting change mode, the power switch 81 is set to the power switch 81 without satisfying the end condition of the setting change mode. It is assumed that the switch is turned off (FIG. 6, (a)). After that, when the power switch 81 is turned on (FIG. 6, (c)) with the start lever 25 tilted to the ON position (FIG. 6, (a)), it is temporarily inserted into the setting key type switch 83. Even if the direction of the setting key is set to the OFF position (FIG. 6, (d)), the setting change mode is set again, and at this time, "1" is displayed in the confirmed state on the setting value display. That is, even if the setting change switch 84 is operated (FIG. 6, (e)), the display of the setting value display remains "1" and does not change.

With such a configuration, for example, if the power switch 81 is unintentionally turned off immediately before the set value is determined, the power is supplied with the start switch 25 turned on (that is, tilted). Since the set value is determined when the switch 81 is turned on, the set value can be determined easily and surely as compared with the case where the start switch 25 is operated without looking directly at the start switch 25, as described above. Also, when shifting to the setting change mode, the setting values before shifting to the setting change mode are fixed as they are, so for example, even though you do not intend to update the setting values, you unintentionally change the settings. It is possible to prevent a situation in which the set value is changed unintentionally when the mode is changed.

Even if the setting change mode is entered with the start lever 25 turned on without adopting the above-mentioned configuration, the setting value displayed on the setting value display is not fixed (setting). It may be started from the state where it is incremented by 1 according to the operation of the change switch 84).

Further, when the setting change mode is entered with the setting change switch 84 and the start lever 25 both turned on, the setting value display is a setting value obtained by incrementing the setting value before the setting change mode by one. Is displayed, but the displayed setting value may not be finalized.

For example, as shown in FIG. 7, when "1" is displayed on the setting value display (hereinafter, also referred to as "setting value display A") of the pattern A in the setting change mode with the door open. The power switch 81 is turned off (FIG. 7, (a)) without satisfying the end condition of the setting change mode, and then the setting change switch 84 and the start lever 25 are turned on (FIG. 7, (FIG. 7,)). B), (c)) When the power switch 81 is turned on (Fig. 7, (d)), if the direction of the setting key inserted in the setting key type switch 83 is aligned with the ON position, or OFF. In any case (FIG. 7, (e)), the setting change mode is set again, and at this time, "2" is displayed on the setting value display of the pattern A. If the setting value before shifting to the setting change mode is "6" and the setting change mode is shifted with the setting change switch 84 and the start lever 25 turned on, the setting value display A is displayed. The set value is "1".

Each time the setting change switch 84 is operated in this state (FIG. 7, (f)), the setting value displayed on the setting value display A is incremented by one. That is, the set value displayed on the set value display A when the power switch 81 is turned on (FIG. 7, (d)) is in an undetermined state. Then, when the start lever 25 is turned on (FIG. 7, (g)), the set value displayed on the set value display A is confirmed, and then even if the setting change switch 84 is turned on (FIG. 7, FIG. 7. (H)), the set value displayed on the set value display A does not change.

Before the set value is confirmed, when the setting change switch 84 is operated (FIG. 7, (f)) and when the start lever 25 is turned on to confirm the set value, MAX-BET is assumed. Even if either the switch 23 or the stop switches 26a to 26c is in the ON state (FIG. 7, (K)), the set value can be changed and the set value can be confirmed.

Then, when the setting key type switch 83 is turned off after the start lever 25 is turned on and the set value is confirmed (FIG. 7, (co)), even if the start lever 25 is turned on (FIG. 7, FIG. 7. The setting change mode is completed (indicated by the broken line in (sa)), and the game is on standby. Further, with the power switch 81 turned off (FIG. 7, (a)) and the direction of the setting key inserted in the setting key type switch 83 aligned with the OFF position (FIG. 7, (e)), the start lever. When the power switch 81 is turned on (FIG. 7, (d)) while operating the 25 and the setting change switch 84 so as to be in the ON state, and the setting change mode is entered, the setting value is confirmed and then the setting is changed. In order to terminate the mode, it is necessary to turn on the setting key type switch 83 and then turn it off (FIG. 7, (s)) (FIG. 7, (s)).

When such a configuration is adopted, when the start lever 25 and the setting change switch 84 are operated to ON and the setting change mode is entered, the setting value is displayed in an incremented state by one, so the setting change is made again. It is not necessary to operate the switch 84, and it is possible to simplify the work related to updating the set value. In addition, when changing the setting value in multiple steps instead of one step, the setting value displayed on the setting value display is not fixed, so the setting change switch continues without re-shifting to the setting change mode. By operating 84, it is possible to change to a desired set value.

Not limited to the above-mentioned configuration, when the start lever 25 and the setting change switch 84 are operated to be ON and the setting change mode is entered, for example, (i) the setting value displayed on the setting value display A is , The setting value is incremented by 1 to the setting value before shifting to the setting change mode, and the setting value is fixed. (Ii) The setting value display of pattern B in FIG. 7 (hereinafter, (Iii) The setting in FIG. 7 where the displayed setting value is the same as before the transition to the setting change mode and the setting value is not fixed, as in the case of “setting value display B”). Similar to the value display B, the displayed setting value may be the same as before the setting change mode, but may be fixed by the displayed setting value.

As described above, the display contents of the set values (see FIG. 5) and the start switch when the power switch 81 is turned off during the setting change mode and then the setting change mode is entered with the setting change switch 84 turned on. Setting when the setting change mode is changed to the setting change mode with 25 turned on (see FIG. 6), and the setting when the setting change switch 84 and the start switch 25 are both turned on. The display contents of the values and the confirmed state thereof (see FIG. 7) have been described, but as an example of the case where these are combined and configured, No. 8 is shown in FIG. The configuration of 1 to 6 is shown. In addition, No. 2 shown in FIG. Needless to say, combinations other than the configurations of 1 to 6 are possible.

In this figure, No. In the configuration of 1, if the set value before turning off the power switch 81 in the setting change mode is n (n is an integer of 1 to 6), after turning off the power switch 81, the setting change switch When the power switch 81 is turned on with the 84 turned on to shift to the setting change mode, the setting value of n is displayed on the setting value display. Further, when the set value before turning off the power switch 81 in the setting change mode is n, after turning off the power switch 81, turn on the power switch 81 with the start lever 25 turned on. When the mode is changed to the setting change mode, the setting value displayed on the setting value display is not confirmed. Further, when the set value before turning off the power switch 81 in the setting change mode is n, after turning off the power switch 81, the power is supplied with the setting change switch 84 and the start lever 25 turned on. When the switch 81 is turned on to shift to the setting change mode, the setting value of n is displayed on the setting value display, but the setting value is not fixed.

No. In the configuration of 2, when the setting value before turning off the power switch 81 in the setting change mode is n, after turning off the power switch 81, the power switch is turned on with the setting change switch 84 turned on. When 81 is turned on and the mode is changed to the setting change mode, the setting value of n + 1 is displayed on the setting value display. Here, if the setting value before shifting to the setting change mode is 6, the setting value displayed on the setting value display when shifting to the setting change mode is 1. Further, when the set value before turning off the power switch 81 in the setting change mode is n, after turning off the power switch 81, turn on the power switch 81 with the start lever 25 turned on. When shifting to the setting change mode, the setting value displayed on the setting value display is not confirmed. Further, when the set value before turning off the power switch 81 in the setting change mode is n, after turning off the power switch 81, the power is supplied with the setting change switch 84 and the start lever 25 turned on. When the switch 81 is turned on to shift to the setting change mode, the setting value of n + 1 is displayed on the setting value display, but the setting value is not fixed.

No. In the configuration of 3, if the set value before turning off the power switch 81 in the setting change mode is n, after turning off the power switch 81, the power switch 81 is turned on with the setting change switch 84 turned on. When is turned on and the mode is changed to the setting change mode, the setting value of n + 1 is displayed on the setting value display. Further, when the set value before turning off the power switch 81 in the setting change mode is n, after turning off the power switch 81, turn on the power switch 81 with the start lever 25 turned on. When the mode is changed to the setting change mode, the setting value displayed on the setting value display is confirmed. Further, when the set value before turning off the power switch 81 in the setting change mode is n, after turning off the power switch 81, the power is supplied with the setting change switch 84 and the start lever 25 turned on. When the switch 81 is turned on to shift to the setting change mode, the setting value of n is displayed on the setting value display, and the setting value is fixed.

No. The configurations of 4 to 6 are the display contents of the setting value when the setting change mode is changed to the setting change mode with the setting change switch 84 turned on, and the setting when the setting change mode is changed to the setting change mode with the start switch 25 turned on. The fixed state of the value is No. The configuration is the same as that of No. 3, but the display contents of the set values and the confirmed state thereof when the setting change mode is entered with the setting change switch 84 and the start switch 25 both turned on are described in No. 3. It is different from the configuration of 3. Therefore, in the following, No. The display contents of the set values and the confirmed state thereof when the setting change mode is entered with the setting change switch 84 and the start switch 25 both turned on in the configurations 4 to 6 will be described.

No. In the configuration of 4, when the setting change mode is entered with the setting change switch 84 and the start lever 25 turned on, the setting value of n is displayed on the setting value display, but the setting value is fixed. do not have. In addition, No. In the configuration of 5, when the setting change mode is entered with the setting change switch 84 and the start lever 25 turned on, the setting value of n + 1 is displayed on the setting value display, and the setting value is fixed. .. Furthermore, No. In the configuration of 6, when the setting change mode is entered with the setting change switch 84 and the start lever 25 turned on, the setting value of n + 1 is displayed on the setting value display, but the setting value is not fixed. ..

In addition, No. in FIG. 1 to No. In any of the configurations of 6, if the operation of the setting change switch 84 is valid in the setting change mode, it is assumed that either the MAX-BET switch 23 or the stop switches 26a to 26c is in the ON state. However, the operation of the setting change switch 84 is accepted as valid. This also applies to the start lever 25. On the other hand, when the setting change mode ends and the game can be played, for example, after a specified number of game medals have been inserted, either the MAX-BET switch 23 or the stop switches 26a to 26c. If the start lever 25 is operated while the switch is in the ON state, the operation of the start lever 25 is invalidated and the reel does not rotate.

As described above, during the setting change mode, the operation of the start lever 25 is effective even if the MAX-BET switch 23 and the stop switches 26a to 26c are in the ON state. As a result, even if the MAX-BET switch 23 and the stop switches 26a to 26c are unintentionally turned on when the start lever 25 is operated without looking directly at the start lever 25 during the work of changing the set value. Since the changed setting value can be fixed, the setting value can be changed smoothly.

Further, No. in FIG. 1 to No. In any of the configurations of 6, as long as the above-mentioned end condition of the setting change mode is satisfied in the setting change mode, even if the start lever 25 is in the ON state, the setting key type switch By turning off 83, the setting change mode can be terminated.

The electric power from the power supply device 80 is supplied to the sub-main control board 70A via the main control board 60, and further to the sub-sub control board 70B via the sub-main control board 70A (power supply device 80). Power may be supplied directly to the sub-main control board 70A and the sub-sub control board 70B). A supply voltage monitoring circuit that monitors the voltage supply state on the circuit that supplies power from the power supply device 80 to the main control board 60 and on the circuit that supplies power to the sub-main control board 70A via the main control board 60. (Not shown) are provided respectively. Each supply voltage monitoring circuit determines that the power supply is cut off when the supply voltage drops to a predetermined voltage value, and outputs a power supply cutoff detection signal to the main CPU 61 and the sub-main CPU 71 described later. Further, in each supply voltage monitoring circuit, when the supply voltage returns to a predetermined voltage value (a value different from the voltage value for power failure determination (for example, a high value), but may be the same value). It is determined that the power is turned on, and the power on detection signal is output to the main CPU 61 and the sub main CPU 71. The voltage value at the time of detecting the power failure of the main control board 60 is set to a value higher than the voltage value at the time of detecting the power failure of the sub-main control board 70A, and precedes the sub-main control board 70A. The main control board 60 is configured to perform a process programmed to be executed when the power is turned off (power off process) (the same may be applied to the power on).

Further, the main CPU 61 includes a reel stop signal circuit 91, a start lever 25, input medal sensors 28a, 28b, 28c, and 1-BET switch 22 which are connected to the switch board 90 or mounted on the switch board 90. , Each signal from the MAX-BET switch 23 and the clearing switch 24 is input via the interface circuit 68.

Further, a blocker 48 is connected to the main CPU 61 via an interface circuit 68, and the blocker 48 is configured to be ON / OFF controlled. In the following description, the signal for controlling ON / OFF of the blocker 48 is also referred to as a “blocker signal”. Further, although not shown, the slot machine 1 is provided with a door sensor that detects the open / closed state of the front door 2, and a signal from this door sensor is input to the main CPU 61 via the interface circuit 68. It has become so. The main CPU 61 is adapted to determine whether the front door 2 is in a closed state (also referred to as a “door closed state”) or an open state (door open state) based on a signal from the door sensor.

Further, although not shown, the main CPU 61 is connected to a data counter, a hall computer, or the like via an external connection terminal board or the like when a predetermined gaming state (for example, an AT state or a bonus state) is reached. A predetermined signal (also referred to as an "outer end signal") is output, and the outer end signal is configured to be able to manage the number of times set in the predetermined gaming state and present it to the player.

On the other hand, on the sub-main control board 70A, a sub-main CPU 71 that mainly performs various arithmetic processes related to production management, a ROM 72 that is a read-only storage device that stores control programs and the like, and information can be written and read. A RAM 73, which is a storage device, is arranged, and each drive circuit or the like operates according to a control program stored in the ROM 72 to control the management of image effect and sound effect in the slot machine 1 and control of lamp effect. And so on. The ROM 72 and the RAM 73 are non-volatile storage devices, and are configured to hold the stored information even when power is not supplied. Further, a clock pulse generator and a frequency divider (not shown) are connected to the sub-main CPU 71, and a predetermined process is executed according to the clock signal generated by the clock pulse generator and the frequency divider. It has become.

The sub-main CPU 71 is configured to receive various signals from the main control board 60 via the interface circuit 74 and transmit the signals to the lamp control circuit 18. The lamp control circuit 18 is a circuit that controls the lighting of lamps such as the back lamps 38a to 38c.

Further, the sub-main CPU 71 is configured to transmit various signals to the sub-sub control board 70B via the interface circuit 74 and to receive various signals from the sub-sub control board 70B. Hereinafter, the signal (control signal) transmitted from the main control board 60 to the sub-main control board 70A is also referred to as a “control command”, and the signal (notification signal or effect signal) transmitted from the sub-main control board 70A to the sub-sub control board 70B is also referred to. ) Is also referred to as a "directing command". Further, the signal (state signal) transmitted from the sub-sub control board 70B to the sub-main control board 70A is also referred to as a "state command".

On the sub-sub control board 70B, a sub-sub CPU 75 that mainly performs various arithmetic processes related to control of image effect and sound effect, a ROM 76 that is a read-only storage device that stores a control program, and the like, and information can be written and read. A RAM 77, which is a storage device, is arranged, and by operating each drive circuit or the like according to a control program stored in the ROM 76, control related to image effect and sound effect is performed. The ROM 76 and the RAM 77 are non-volatile storage devices, and are configured to hold the stored information even when power is not supplied.

The sub-sub CPU 75 receives a notification signal or an effect signal from the sub-main control board 70A via the interface circuit 78, transmits a signal to the display device control circuit 16 and the speaker control circuit 17, and also transmits the signal to the sub-main control board 70A. It is configured to send a status signal to. The display device control circuit 16 is a circuit that controls the image display device 11 to display a predetermined effect image, and the speaker control circuit 17 determines the type and volume of sound or the like generated from speakers such as the upper speakers 15a and 15b. It is a circuit to control. The image display device 11 is configured to function as a push display (also referred to as a "sub-side push order display") that displays the operation order (push order) of the stop switches 26a to 26c.

≪Reel design arrangement≫
In the present embodiment, the symbols displayed by the reels 3a to 3c are arranged as shown in FIG. 9 (the "left reel", "middle reel", and "right reel" in FIG. 9 are the reels 3a, Represents 3b and 3c, respectively). That is, on each reel 3a to 3c, "red seven", "gold seven", "black bar", "blue bar", "blank A", "blank B", "bell A", "bell B", Ten types of symbols, "watermelon" and "replay", are arranged in predetermined numbers. Hereinafter, the reels 3a, 3b, and 3c are also referred to as a left reel (left reel), a middle reel (middle reel), and a right reel (right reel), respectively.

≪Types of game roles≫
In the present embodiment, the symbol combinations that are stopped and displayed on the reels 3a to 3c are set as shown in FIGS. 10 to 13, and these are the symbol combinations (corresponding symbols) that constitute the game combination. There is. As the game role in this embodiment, there are two special roles (BB role; BB is an abbreviation for big bonus. Also referred to as "type 1 BB" and "bonus role") and five re-game roles 1 to 5. A total of 51 pieces are set, including a replaying role and 44 winning roles (small roles) of small roles 1 to 44. The symbol combinations (corresponding symbols) for establishing each game combination, the number of game medals to be paid out when the game combination is established, and the like are as shown in FIGS. 10 to 13.

Even if the BB roles 1 and 2 are established, the game medal is not paid out, and the establishment of the BB combination 1 and 2 activates a predetermined bonus as a special character (also referred to as "BB" in this embodiment), and the normal game starts from the next game. It is shifted to a special game state (also referred to as "BB operating") which is advantageous for the player, which enables the start of a predetermined bonus game (also referred to as "BB game") executed under conditions different from the game of. It is a game role (bonus role) that indicates that. The corresponding symbol of the BB role 1 is a combination of "blue bar / blue bar / red seven", and the corresponding symbol of the BB role 2 is "black bar / black bar / red seven" (constituting the game role). The names of the symbols are described in the order of the reels 3a, 3b, 3c. The same shall apply hereinafter). The bonus game that can be started by the establishment of the BB combination 1 or the BB combination 2 ends when a predetermined number of game medals (for example, 70 in this embodiment, but the numerical value can be changed as appropriate) are acquired. (As a modification, the game may be terminated when a predetermined number (for example, 30 games) of games have been executed). The BB combinations 1 and 2 may be established in non-RT and RT1 (inside the BB), which will be described later, but are not established in RT2 (while the BB is operating) (FIGS. 10 to 13). The "-" in it indicates that it does not hold.)

In this embodiment, only the BB role is provided as a special role, but as another special role, the RB role (RB is an abbreviation for regular bonus) and the MB role (MB is an abbreviation for middle bonus. ) May be provided. Then, when the RB combination is established, the RB game as a bonus game may be set to start from the next game, and when the MB combination is established, the MB game as a bonus game may be started from the next game. In this case, the RB game is terminated when, for example, the small winning combination is established a predetermined number of times (for example, 8 times) or the game is completed a predetermined number of times (for example, 12 times), and the MB game is performed. For example, it may be terminated when a predetermined number (for example, more than 200) of game medals are paid out. Further, a plurality of special roles (for example, a plurality of types of BB roles may be provided, or both a BB role and an MB role may be provided).

If the re-games 1 to 5 are established, the game medals will not be paid out, but the next game will be played without reducing the number of game medals held by the player (without inserting new game medals). It is a game role (replay role) that is permitted. In addition, in the re-game combination 1, the corresponding symbol "Bell A / Replay / Blue bar / Black bar / Gold Seven / Red Seven" ("/" means "or") is stopped and displayed on the valid line 29. At this time, the symbol "replay" is configured to be lined up on a downward-sloping line connecting the upper left display area, the middle middle display area, and the lower right display area in the display window W. For this reason, the replaying combination 1 is also referred to as a "downward-sloping replay" (the replay is also referred to as "RP"). For the same reason, the replaying roles 2 to 4 are also referred to as a right-up RP, an upper RP, and a middle RP, respectively. In addition, when the corresponding symbol "Bell A / Blue bar / Black bar / Gold Seven / Red Seven Bell B" is stopped and displayed on the valid line 29, the re-game combination 5 is in the upper left row in the display window W. The design "watermelon" is configured to line up on the upper line connecting the display area, the middle upper display area, and the upper right display area. For this reason, the replaying combination 1 is also referred to as "upper watermelon RP".

As shown in FIG. 9 (reel symbol), the symbols "replay" on each reel of the left reel, the middle reel, and the right reel constituting the replay combination 4 are arranged every 5 symbols or less on each reel. There is. As a result, when the replay combination 4 is won, the corresponding symbol "replay / replay / replay" may be stopped and displayed on the effective line 29 regardless of the push order or push position (also referred to as "pull"). It is possible (see the description of reel rotation stop control by the reel control means 134 described later). Like this re-game combination 4, a role that can draw the corresponding symbol (one of them if there are a plurality of sets) onto the effective line 29 regardless of the operation timing of each stop switch is defined as "100". It is also called "a game role that can be pulled in". It should be noted that the re-gaming combinations 1 to 3 and 5 are also 100% retractable gaming combinations as in the re-gaming combination 4. Further, the replaying combinations 1 to 5 may be established in non-RT and RT1 described later, but are not established in RT2.

The small roles 1 to 44 are game roles (winning roles) configured so that a predetermined number of game medals are paid out at the time of establishment. Of the small winning combinations 1 to 44, the small winning combinations 1 to 36 are combinations that can be established by any of non-RT, RT1 and RT2, which will be described later, whereas the small winning combination 37 to 39 are RT2 (while the BB is operating). It is a role that can only be established. Further, the small winning combinations 1 to 23 and 40 to 43 are also referred to as "one-card winning combination" because the number of payouts at the time of establishment is set to one. Similarly, the small roles 24 to 37 are also referred to as "15-card combination", and the small roles 38 and 39 are also referred to as "3-card combination". The 15-card role is also referred to as a "bell small role".

When the corresponding symbol "Bell A / Watermelon / Blue bar / Black bar / Gold Seven / Red Seven" is stopped and displayed on the valid line 29, the small role 37 is displayed on the downward-sloping line in the display window W. It is configured so that the design "watermelon" is lined up. For this reason, the small role 37 is also referred to as a "watermelon small role". In addition, the small role 40 is a single role whose corresponding symbol is "Red Seven / Red Seven / Red Seven". For this reason, the small role 40 is also referred to as "one red 7-matched role". It should be noted that the small roles 1 to 7, 24 to 37 are game roles that can be pulled in 100% (there is no so-called "missing").

≪Winning item (condition device) in the role lottery≫
The combination determination process (role lottery) is performed once in one game, and one or more winning items are selected as the combination determination result (lottery result). Here, the combination determination result is referred to as a conditional device. The table of FIG. 14A shows the types of bonus condition devices selected by the winning combination lottery (internal lottery) and the winning combinations corresponding thereto, and each of FIGS. 14B and 15 to 19 In the table, the types of winning replay condition devices selected by the winning combination lottery, the corresponding winning combinations are shown, and the combinations and the like are described. Hereinafter, the contents of some condition devices will be specifically described.

The bonus condition device shown in FIG. 14A includes a type 1 BB-A condition device corresponding to the number 1 and a type 1 BB-B condition device corresponding to the number 2 (number 0 is any bonus condition). Indicates that the device has not been elected either). The type 1 BB-A condition device is a condition device in which the BB combination 1 is independently elected, and is selected during non-RT, which will be described later. Further, if the BB combination 1 is not established even after being elected, the election is carried over to RT1 described later. On the other hand, in RT2, it is neither elected nor carried over (the "-" in the figure indicates that it is neither elected nor carried over). The type 1 BB-B condition device is a condition device in which the BB combination 2 is independently elected, and is selected during non-RT. If the BB combination 2 is not established even if the selection is made, the selection is carried over to the RT1. It has become like. In addition, RT2 is neither elected nor carried over.

In the non-RT where the type 1 BB-A condition device is selected or in the RT1 where the selection of the type 1 BB-A condition device is carried over, the corresponding symbol "blue bar of the BB role 1" depends on the push position by the player. When "Blue Bar / Red Seven" can be pulled on the effective line 29, BB role 1 is established. Similarly, in the non-RT in which the type 1 BB-B condition device is selected or in the RT1 in which the selection of the type 1 BB-B condition device is carried over, the corresponding symbol of the BB combination 2 is determined by the push position by the player. When "black bar, black bar, red seven" can be pulled into the effective line 29, the BB role 2 is established.

The re-game-AL condition devices corresponding to the numbers 1 to 12 shown in FIG. 14 (B) are conditional devices in which the re-game combination is a winning combination. For example, the re-game-A condition device is a condition device in which the re-game combinations 1 to 4 are elected in duplicate, and may be selected in RT1 during non-RT, which will be described later, but may be selected in RT2. It is configured not to. In addition, when elected, the replay combination 4 (middle RP) is always established regardless of the push order or the push position, whether it is non-RT or RT1. The re-game-L condition device is a condition device in which the re-game combinations 2 to 5 are elected in duplicate, and when selected during non-RT, the re-game combination 5 (upper watermelon) is always selected regardless of the push order or push position. RP) is established, whereas when elected in RT1, the replay combination 4 (middle RP) is always established regardless of the pushing order or pushing position.

The number 0 shown in FIG. 14B indicates a loss in which none of the winning replay condition devices has been selected. In this embodiment, this loss is selected only during non-RT, but it may be selected during RT1 or RT2. In addition, when the loss is selected in RT1, when the loss is selected, the push order is the reverse push (the push order in which the stop switch 26c is first operated) or the like. Depending on the push position, even if the symbol combination of "Red Seven / Red Seven / Red Seven" (also referred to as "Red 7 aligned symbol") is displayed in the display window W (for example, on the effective line 29). good. This red 7-matched symbol is common to the corresponding symbol of the small winning combination 40 (red 7-matching small winning combination), but the small winning combination 2 is established only in RT2. The red 7-matched symbol that is stopped and displayed during RT1 is just a lost symbol.

The winning-A1 to A12 condition devices corresponding to the numbers 13 to 24 shown in FIGS. 14 (B), 15 and 16, respectively, are condition devices in which a small winning combination is a winning combination. Further, it is configured so that it may be selected in RT1 during non-RT, which will be described later, but not in RT2. Furthermore, if selected during non-RT, a predetermined single-card combination is always established regardless of the pushing order or pushing position, and if selected during RT1, the winning combination is different depending on the pushing order or pushing position. It has become like. For example, the winning-A11 condition device shown in FIG. 16 is a condition device in which small winning combinations 6, 10, 15, 16, 21, and 34 are elected in duplicate. Regardless of the above, the small winning combination 6 which is a single winning combination is always established.

On the other hand, when the winning-A11 condition device is selected in RT1, when the pushing order is "middle right left", the small winning combination 6 which is a 15-card combination is established with a probability of 1/1, and the pushing order is "middle right". In the case of "left", the small winning combination 34, which is a 15-card combination, is established with a probability of 1/1, and in other push orders ("left middle right", "left and right middle", "middle left and right", "middle right left"). Is one of the small winning combinations 10, 15 and 16, which is a single winning combination, with a probability of 1/8, respectively. Note that "left", "middle", and "right" mean the stop switches 26a, 26b, and 26c, and the order of these means the operation order. For example, "middle right left" represents a pressing order in which the stop switch is operated in the order of 26b → 26c → 26a. In FIGS. 15 to 18, each push order is shown in the order of the numbers “1”, “2”, and “3”. In the figure, "123", "132", "213", "231", "312", and "321" are "left middle right", "left and right middle", "middle left and right", and "middle right left", respectively. Corresponds to the pressing order of "middle right left" and "right middle left".

Since the selection of the bonus condition device is carried over during RT1, the BB combination 1 and the BB combination 2 may be established depending on the push order and the push position. For example, when the winning-A11 condition device is selected in RT1 where the selection of the type 1 BB-B condition device in which the BB combination 2 is independently won is carried over, when the push order is "middle right left" and "right middle". In the case of "left", the small winning combination 6 and the small winning combination 34 are always established, so that the BB winning combination 2 is never established. On the other hand, in the other push order ("left middle right", "left and right middle", "middle left and right", "middle right left"), one of the corresponding symbols of small winning combination 10, 15 and 16 is drawn depending on the pushing position. If it can be inserted, BB role 2 is not established, but if these corresponding symbols cannot be drawn in, and conversely, if the corresponding symbol "black bar / black bar / red seven" of BB role 2 can be drawn in, BB role 2 Is established.

Specifically, the case of pressing "left, middle, right" will be described as an example. First, a case where the push position on the first left reel is within the range in which the symbol "Red Seven" can be pulled in will be described. In this case, since the reel control for pulling in the symbol "Red Seven" is performed on the left reel, there is a possibility that either the small winning combination 16 or the small winning combination 21 is established at that stage. Subsequently, if the push position on the second middle reel is within the range in which the symbol "blue bar" can be pulled in, the reel control for pulling in the symbol "blue bar" is performed on the middle reel, so that the small winning combination 16 is performed at that stage. Is left, and if the push position on the third right reel is within the range where the symbol "blue bar" can be pulled in, reel control is performed to pull in the symbol "blue bar" on the right reel. Therefore, the small winning combination 16 (corresponding symbol "red seven, blue bar, blue bar") is finally established. On the other hand, if the push position on the second middle reel is within the range where the symbol "Red Seven" can be pulled in, the reel control for pulling in the symbol "Red Seven" is performed on the middle reel, so it is missed at that stage. (Neither combination holds) is confirmed (there is still the possibility that the symbol combination of "Red Seven / Red Seven / Red Seven" will be stopped and displayed), and finally the push position on the third right reel. If is within the range where the symbol "Red Seven" can be pulled in, the reel control for pulling in the symbol "Red Seven" is performed on the right reel, so the final combination of the symbols "Red Seven / Red Seven / Red Seven" is obtained. It will be displayed as stopped.

Next, a case where the push position on the first left reel is within the range in which the symbol “black bar” can be pulled in will be described. In this case, since the reel control for pulling in the symbol "black bar" is performed on the left reel, there is a possibility that either BB winning combination 2, small winning combination 10 or small winning combination 15 is established at that stage. Subsequently, if the push position on the second middle reel is within the range in which the symbol "black bar" can be pulled in, the reel control for pulling in the symbol "black bar" is performed on the middle reel, so that the BB role 2 is performed at that stage. Is left, and if the push position on the third right reel is within the range where the symbol "Red Seven" can be pulled in, reel control is performed to pull in the symbol "Red Seven" on the right reel. Therefore, the BB role 2 (corresponding symbol "black bar / black bar / red seven") is finally established. On the other hand, if the push position on the second middle reel is within the range where the symbol "Kin Seven" can be pulled in, the reel control for pulling in the symbol "Kin Seven" is performed on the middle reel, so it is small at that stage. If there is a possibility that the winning combination 10 will be established and the push position on the third right reel is within the range where the symbol "Kin Seven" can be pulled in, the reel control for pulling in the symbol "Kin Seven" on the right reel will be performed. Since it is performed, the small winning combination 10 (corresponding symbol "black bar, gold seven, gold seven") is finally established.

The winning-B1 to B12 conditional devices corresponding to the numbers 25 to 36 shown in FIGS. 16 to 18 are conditional devices in which a small winning combination is a winning combination, and may be selected during non-RT and RT1. , It is configured so that it will not be elected in RT2. Further, the winning combination is different depending on the push order and the push position regardless of whether the player is selected in the non-RT or in the RT1. For example, the winning-B7 condition device shown in FIG. 17 is a condition device in which small winning combinations 4, 5, 8, 13, 18, 23, and 30 are elected in duplicate, and when they are selected in non-RT, the push order is In the case of "middle first", the small winning combination 30 which is a 15-card combination is established with a probability of 1/1, and when the pushing order is "left first" or "right first", the small winning combination 5 is a 1-card combination. Is established with a probability of 1/1. In addition, "left first" is the pressing order in which the stop switch 26a is operated first, "middle first" is the pressing order in which the stop switch 26b is operated first, and "right first" is the pressing order in which the stop switch 26c is operated first. It shows the push order. In FIGS. 16 to 19, the pressing orders of "left first", "middle first", and "right first" are displayed as "1-2", "-2-3", respectively. ing.

On the other hand, when the winning-B7 condition device is selected in RT1, when the pushing order is "middle left and right", the small winning combination 4 or the small winning combination 5 which is a single combination is established with a probability of 1/1, and the pushing order is established. When is "right, left, middle", the small winning combination 30 which is a 15-card combination is established with a probability of 1/1, and the other push orders ("left middle right", "left and right middle", "middle right left", "right middle left" In the case of "), any one of the small winning combinations 8, 13, 18 and 23, which is a single winning combination, is established with a probability of 1/8, respectively. In addition, when the winning-B7 condition device is selected in RT1 where the selection of the type 1 BB-A condition device in which the BB combination 1 is independently won is carried over, when the push order is "middle left and right" and "right, left, middle". In the case of ", the small winning combination 4, 5 and the small winning combination 30 are always established, so that the BB winning combination 1 is never established. On the other hand, in the other push order ("left middle right", "left and right middle", "middle right left", "right middle left"), one of the small winning combinations 8, 13, 18 and 23 is supported depending on the pushing position. If the symbol can be pulled in, the BB winning combination 11 cannot be established, but if these corresponding symbols cannot be pulled in, and conversely, the corresponding symbol "blue bar / blue bar / red seven" of the BB winning combination 1 can be pulled in. BB role 1 is established.

The winning-C to E condition devices corresponding to the numbers 37 to 39 shown in FIG. 19 are condition devices in which a small winning combination is a winning combination, and may be selected during non-RT or RT1, but during RT2. Is configured so that it will not be elected. Further, regardless of whether the player is selected in the non-RT or in the RT1, the small winning combination 36, which is a 15-card combination, is always established regardless of the pushing order or the pushing position.

The winning-F to Q condition devices corresponding to the numbers 40 to 51 shown in FIG. 19 are condition devices in which a small winning combination is a winning combination, and are not selected during non-RT or RT1, but during RT2. Is configured to be elected. Of these, the winning-F, G, L, M condition device, when selected in RT2, is always a 15-card combination (small combination 24-37) regardless of the push order or push position. Is to be established. Winning-When the I, J, K, O, P, and Q condition devices are selected in RT2, one card combination (small combination 1 to 23, 40 to 44) is established depending on the push position. There is. When the winning-H condition device is selected in RT2, a three-card combination (small combination 38, 39) is established depending on the pushing position. When the winning-N condition device is selected in RT2, when the pushing order is "left first" or "middle first", one card combination is established depending on the pushing position, and the pushing order is "right first". In the case of "1", 7 sets of 1-card combination (small combination 40) are established depending on the pushing position.

≪Probability of winning combination and setting difference≫
In the combination determination process, the probability that each condition device is selected (combination determination probability) can be arbitrarily set. Further, the winning combination determination probability can be configured so as to be changed according to the above-mentioned set value set by the game clerk or the like. In the present embodiment, there is a set value configuration of 6 stages of settings 1 to 6, and the condition device in which the combination determination probability is changed according to the set value and the combination determination probability are unchanged even if the set value is changed. A condition device is provided. Hereinafter, setting so that the winning combination probability is changed according to the set value is referred to as "providing a setting difference". Whether or not a setting difference is provided for each condition device can be arbitrarily determined. As an example, there is no setting difference for the condition device that influences the payout rate (ratio of the number of payouts to the number of game medals used for the game) in the slot machine 1, and the lottery trigger is used. Conditional devices that must not be set may or may not have a setting difference.

FIG. 20 shows, as an example of the winning combination determination probability in the slot machine 1, the number of winning positions assigned to each condition device (total number of positions 65536). In this example, the number of winnings in each RT state of non-RT, RT1, and RT2 is shown for the case of three setting values of setting 1, setting 3, and setting 6. According to this example, the probability that the type 1 BB-A condition device and the type 1 BB-B condition device are selected during non-RT is set to be relatively high, about 7/100, respectively. Further, the probability that any of the winning-A1 to A12 condition devices will be selected during non-RT or RT1 is set to about 7/10, which is considerably high.

Next, the characteristic configuration of the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 21 to 39.
≪Functional block≫
As shown in FIG. 21, the slot machine according to the present embodiment mainly describes a betting operation for betting a game medal (for example, an operation of inserting a game medal into a medal insertion slot 21) from a functional point of view. , 1-BET switch 22 or MAX-BET switch 23 pressing operation), reel rotation start operation for rotating each stopped reel 3a to 3c (for example, tilting operation of start lever 25), multiple types of symbols Each reel rotation stop operation for stopping the rotation of the three reels 3a, 3b, 3c (for example, pressing operation of the stop switches 26a, 26b, 26c), bet or stored (credit) game medal. With the operation signal output means 95 that outputs a signal (also referred to as a "game operation signal") corresponding to each game operation performed by the player, such as a clearing operation for paying out (for example, a pressing operation of the clearing switch 24). , The main control means 100 (corresponding to the main control board 60) that performs the main control related to the progress of the game, and the sub control means 200 (corresponding to the sub control board 70) that performs predetermined effect control according to the situation of the game. ) And is configured.

<Functional block of main control means>
The main control means 100 is roughly classified into a game state management means 110 that mainly manages the game state, a game progress management means 130 that mainly manages the game progress, and a main communication control that controls communication in the main control means 100. It is configured to include means 150. Of these, the game state management means 110 includes set value control means 111, RT state control means 112, re-game operation control means 113, bonus operation control means 114, freeze control means 115, game mode control means 116, and random number generation. The taking-in means 117 is provided.

Further, the game progress management means 130 includes a reception medal management means 131, a combination determination means 132, an effect group number determination means 133, a reel control means 134, a stop display symbol determination means 135, a payout medal management means 136, and a blocker control means 137. The display lamp control means 138, the push order management means 139, and the condition device group number determination means 140 are provided, and the main communication control means 150 includes a control command transmission means 151 and an outer end signal transmission means 152. In addition, each of the above-mentioned means in the main control means 100 is a hardware such as a main CPU 61, a ROM 62, a RAM 63, an electronic circuit, etc. arranged on the main control board 60 shown in FIG. 2, and a control program and the like stored in the ROM 62 and the like. It is a functional representation of what is composed of software.

(Each means constituting the game state management means 110)
The set value control means 111 is configured to control a numerical value (also referred to as a "management set value") for internally managing a set value (six-step configuration of settings 1 to 6) of a combination determination probability. ing. In the present embodiment, consecutive integer values from 1 to 6 (the integer values of 1 to 6 correspond to the settings 1 to 6 respectively) are used as the management setting values. The data of the management setting value is stored in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 63, and is referred to when the setting value is confirmed in the combination determination process, and is set when the setting is confirmed or the setting is changed. It is referred to when displaying the set value on the value display (payout number display lamp 46j). Further, the management setting value is changed according to the setting change operation by the game clerk. Specifically, the setting key type switch 83 is operated in the ON state, and each time the setting change switch 84 is operated in that state, the setting key type switch 83 is updated one by one.

As shown in FIG. 22, the RT state control means 112 is configured to control the setting of three RT states, non-RT, RT1, and RT2. The non-RT is an RT state set when the RAM (RAM 63) is initialized. During this non-RT, the transition to RT1 is made when the condition P1 is satisfied. The condition P1 is that the type 1 BB-A condition device or the type 1 BB-B condition device is selected (also referred to as "BB winning").

RT1 is an RT state (also referred to as "inside BB") set when the selection of the type 1 BB-A condition device or the type 1 BB-B condition device (winning of the BB combination 1 or the BB combination 2) is carried over. ). During this RT1, the transition to RT2 is made when the condition P2 is satisfied. The condition P2 is that the BB combination 1 or the BB combination 2 is satisfied (also referred to as "BB establishment" or "BB operation").

RT2 is an RT state (also referred to as “BB operating”) set from the next game when the BB combination 1 or the BB combination 2 is established, and the bonus game can be executed during this RT2. In RT2, the replaying combination is not won, and one of the winning J to Q condition devices is set to be selected (no loss). During RT2, the transition to non-RT is made when the condition P3 is satisfied. The condition P3 is that a predetermined number (70 medals) of game medals are acquired during RT2 and the bonus game ends (also referred to as “BB operation end”).

Returning to FIG. 21, the re-game operation control means 113 is permitted to perform the next game without betting the game medal owned by the player, triggered by the establishment of the re-game combination (“re-game operation control means 113”). It is configured to be set to "game operating state"). When set to the re-game operation state, information indicating that the re-game operation state is set (also referred to as "re-game operation state flag") is set in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 63 (for example, the value "1" is stored). Will be done. The set re-game operation state flag is cleared (for example, the value "0" is stored) at a predetermined time until the re-game operation state is cleared.

The bonus operation control means 114 is BB from the time when the bonus combination (in the case of this embodiment, BB combination 1 or BB combination 2) is won (when the type 1 BB-A condition device or the type 1 BB-B condition device is selected). It is configured to execute a predetermined process in the period until the end of the bonus game executed when the combination 1 or the BB combination 2 is established. Specifically, when the BB combination 1 or the BB combination 2 is won, the information indicating that the BB combination 1 or the BB combination 2 is won in the predetermined storage area of the RAM 63 (also referred to as "type 1 BB winning flag") is provided. Set (for example, store the value "1"). Further, when the BB combination 1 or the BB combination 2 is established, information indicating that the BB operation state is set (also referred to as a "type 1 BB operation flag") is set in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 63 (for example, a value). Memorize "1").

The freeze control means 115 delays the execution of a control process related to the progress of the game (for example, a process of accepting a bet operation, a reel rotation start operation, a reel rotation stop operation, etc.) for a predetermined time when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Is configured to set. In this embodiment, four types of freezes are used: winning weight (freeze time 2 seconds), fake weight (freeze time 5 seconds), notification weight (freeze time 2 seconds), and end wait time (freeze time 5 seconds). It can be executed.

As shown in FIG. 23, the game mode control means 116 is configured to control the settings of eight game modes from the game mode 0 to the game mode 7. The game mode means a game state (also referred to as “main game state”) mainly related to the AT setting state, which is controlled by the main control means side separately from the RT state.

Game mode 0 is a normal (non-advantageous) gaming state. The game mode 0 is a mode for staying in a normal section different from the advantageous section described later, and is a mode in which a lottery or the like related to an AT game (assist game) is not performed. In the game mode 0, the mode is changed to the game mode 1 when the condition Q1 is satisfied, the game mode 2 is changed to the game mode 2 when the condition Q2 is satisfied, and the condition Q3 is satisfied. The mode is changed to the game mode 3, and when the condition Q4 is satisfied, the mode is changed to the game mode 6. The contents of each transition condition (conditions Q1 to Q15) are simplified and described in FIG. 23, but more detailed contents are described in the flowchart described later. The section type number is a number (taking a value of 0 or 1) that manages whether to stay in either a normal section or an advantageous section, which will be described later, and section type number = 0 is a normal section or section type number. = 1 indicates that each stays in an advantageous section (see also FIG. 24). When staying in the game mode 0, the section type number = 0. Further, the AT winning flag is a flag (taking a value of 0 or 1) that manages that the AT has been won, and the AT winning flag = 0 means that the AT has not been won, and the AT winning flag = 1 means that the AT has not been won. It shows that the AT has been won (see also FIG. 24).

The game mode 1 is mainly a section type number = 1, but is a game state also called a “chance” to stay when the AT is not won. In the game mode 1, the game mode 0 is shifted to the game mode 0 when the condition Q5 is satisfied, and the game mode 3 is switched to the game mode 3 when the condition Q8 is satisfied. The chance game number counter included in the condition Q5 is a number (taking a value of 0 to 30) for managing the number of games staying in the game mode 1, and is set to 30 when the game mode 1 is entered. After that, 1 is subtracted for each game (see also FIG. 24). Further, the type 1 BB winning flag included in the conditions Q6 to Q8 is a flag (taking a value of 0 or 1) for managing whether or not the BB is won in the winning combination lottery in the game, and the type 1 BB winning is applicable. Flag = 0 indicates that the BB has not been won in the game, and Class 1 BB has been won. The flag = 1 indicates that the BB has been won in the game (see also FIG. 24).

The game mode 2 is mainly a game state in which the section type number = 1 and the AT is won, but stays when the BB is not won, which is also called "AT winning 1". In the game mode 2, the mode is changed to the game mode 3 when the condition Q9 is satisfied.

The game mode 3 is mainly an AT game state in which the AT is won and the BB is won as a trigger. In this game mode 3, since the push navigation described later is executed, the game state is very advantageous for the player. In the game mode 3, the game mode 0 is shifted to the game mode 0 when the condition Q11 is satisfied, and the game mode 7 is switched to the game mode 7 when the condition Q11 is satisfied. The bell count counter included in the conditions Q11 and Q12 is a counter (taking a value of 0 to 134) that manages the number of times the push navigation (winning navigation) can be executed (also referred to as "bell count") during AT. Yes, the winning navigation can be executed when the value of the bell count counter is 1 or more (see also FIG. 24). Further, the seven number is a number for managing the type of AT (red seven or gold seven), where seven number = 1 indicates red seven and seven number = 2 indicates gold seven (see also FIG. 24). The seven counter is a counter that manages the number of stocks of red seven (takes a value of 0 to 26), and the cumulative counter is a counter that manages the number of game medals acquired (difference number) in one advantageous section (difference number). (Takes a value from 0 to 2412), and the arrival flag is a flag (takes a value of 0 or 1) for adjusting the upper limit of the number of game medals acquired (difference number) (see also FIG. 24). ..

The game mode 6 is mainly a game state in which the section type number = 1 and stays inside the BB in a state where the AT is not won, which is also called "inside at the time of chance". In the game mode 6, the mode is changed to the game mode 1 when the condition Q10 is satisfied.

The game mode 7 is mainly a game state also called "inside after AT" that stays when the arrival flag = 0 after the end of one AT. In the game mode 7, the mode is changed to the game mode 4 when the condition Q10 is satisfied.

The game mode 4 is mainly a game state also called "after AT" in which the player stays after the BB is established in the game mode 7. In the game mode 4, the mode is changed to the game mode 5 when the condition Q7 is satisfied, the game mode 3 is changed when the condition Q8 is satisfied, and the condition Q13 is satisfied. The game mode is changed to 0, and the game mode 7 is set when the condition Q14 is satisfied. The AT cycle counter included in the conditions Q13 and Q14 is a counter (taking a value of 0 to 3) that manages the stay cycle during AT.

The game mode 5 is mainly a game state also referred to as "after the AT is won 2" in which the player stays after the AT is won in the game mode 4. In the game mode 5, the mode is changed to the game mode 3 when the condition Q9 is satisfied.

While staying in any of the game modes 1 to 7, the game mode 0 is set when the condition Q15 is satisfied. The advantageous section clear counter included in the condition Q15 is a counter (taking a value of 0 to 1500) that manages the number of games continuously staying in the advantageous section, and is 1500 when shifting from the normal section to the advantageous section. Is set to, and 1 is subtracted each time the game is played in the advantageous section (see also FIG. 24). Further, the net increase counter is a counter (taking a value of 0 to 2412) that manages the number of acquisitions (difference number) in the advantageous section, is set to 0 when shifting from the normal section to the advantageous section, and thereafter acquired. It is updated according to the number (see also FIG. 24).

The above-mentioned eight game modes 0 to 7 are divided into a game mode belonging to a normal section (game mode 0) and a game mode belonging to an advantageous section (game mode 1 to 7). The normal section is a period during which push navigation (winning navigation, RP navigation, and push navigation) is not performed, and information that can determine the push order (information such as a condition device number and an instruction number) is transmitted from the main control means side to the sub control means. It is also a period when it is not sent to the side. Further, the normal section is also a period during which a lottery for determining whether or not to shift to the advantageous section (for example, a lottery for shifting to the advantageous section) can be performed.

The advantageous section is a period during which push navigation can be performed, and is also a period during which information capable of determining the push order may be transmitted from the main control means side to the sub control means side. Further, in the advantageous section, a lottery for changing the performance of the advantageous section (for example, AT mode lottery) and a process for adding the number of AT games in the advantageous section (for example, seven stock 1 lottery, seven stock 2 lottery) are performed. It is also a period that can be done. Further, in the advantageous section, a section indicator for notifying the player that the section is in the advantageous section (for example, among the payout number display lamps 46j, the DP segment lamps other than the 7-segment lamps (also referred to as “advantageous section lamps”). ) Is lit. During the stay in the advantageous section, the winning navigation may be performed at least once (in this case, if the winning navigation has not been performed even once, the transition to the normal section may be performed. You may not be able to do it).

In addition, there is an upper limit (1500 games) for the period during which a person can stay continuously in an advantageous section. Further, when the upper limit is reached and the advantageous section is terminated, all the information related to the advantageous section (for example, information such as the AT winning flag and the value of the seven stock number counter) is cleared. When the upper limit is reached and the advantageous section is ended, the winning navigation may not be performed even once during the stay in the advantageous section. In addition, when the lottery for deciding whether or not to shift to the advantageous section and the lottery for changing the performance of the advantageous section are performed based on the combination determination result (condition device), the combination determination result without setting difference is provided. In particular, the lottery for changing the performance of the advantageous section may be performed based on conditions other than the combination determination result. Then, in that case, it may be performed without referring to the set value.

In the present embodiment, an advantageous section clear counter is provided for grasping the number of games continuously staying in the advantageous section, and the value of this advantageous section clear counter is set to "1500" when shifting from the normal section to the advantageous section. set. Then, every time the game is exhausted in the advantageous section, the value of the advantageous section clear counter is subtracted by 1, and when the value of the counter becomes "0", the game is forcibly shifted to the normal section. If the value of the advantageous section clear counter shifts from the advantageous section to the normal section before the value of the advantageous section clear counter becomes "0", the value of the advantageous section clear counter is cleared (set to "0"), and the normal section is changed to the advantageous section again. When shifting to, the value of the advantageous section clear counter is reset to "1500".

It also has a net increase counter that counts the number of game medals won (differences) in the advantageous section. This net increase counter sets its counter value to "0" at the start of the advantageous section (may be set to "0" at the end of the advantageous section), and thereafter sets the counter value according to each game and the result of the game. Update. In the update, if the difference number is less than 0, the counter value is corrected to "0", and if the difference number is a positive value, it is accumulated and updated as it is (do not make such a correction). May be good). Then, when the accumulated difference number exceeds 2400, the advantageous section is terminated and the normal section is started. The cumulative counter is functionally a counter that performs the same counting as the net increase counter. When checking the number of game medals won (difference number) during the control process, the value of the cumulative counter may be referred to or the value of the net increase counter may be checked depending on the processing content.

Further, a correction counter is also provided as a counter for counting the number of game medals acquired (difference number) in the advantageous section. This correction counter can be acquired during one advantageous section, which is calculated by adding the value of the AT stock number such as Red Seven and Gold Seven and the value of the bell count counter to the value of the net increase counter (cumulative counter). It is a counter (takes a value of 0 to 2101) that counts the number of game medals expected to be acquired (also referred to as "expected number of acquisitions" or "expected number of acquisitions"). Then, when the value of the correction counter (expected acquisition number) exceeds the predetermined value (2100), the advantageous section may be terminated at a predetermined timing and the normal section may be shifted to.

With such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the end time of the advantageous section. For example, when the end time of the advantageous section is determined only by the value of the advantageous section clear counter or the value of the net increase counter, if those values are displayed to the player, the player confirms them to determine the advantageous section. It is possible to easily grasp the end time of. However, if the player easily knows that the end time of the advantageous section is approaching, the player's willingness to play may decrease.

In the present embodiment, since the above-mentioned correction counter is provided, the value of the correction counter reaches a predetermined value even though the value of the advantageous section clear counter and the net increase counter does not reach the upper limit value. , It happens that the advantageous section ends. Therefore, it becomes difficult to understand the end time of the advantageous section, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Further, by setting the predetermined value (2100) in the correction counter to a value smaller than the upper limit value (2400) in the net increase counter, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the advantageous section ends during AT. For example, if the value of the correction counter (expected acquisition number) exceeds the predetermined value (2100) during AT, and if the next AT can be executed after the end of that AT, the net increase counter will be the upper limit during the execution of the next AT. There is a high possibility that the advantageous section will end when the value (2400) is exceeded. If the advantageous section suddenly ends while staying in a gaming state that is advantageous to the player, such as during AT, the player may feel uncomfortable or discouraged, but the correction counter It is possible to avoid such a situation by ending the more advantageous section in which the value of (expected acquisition number) exceeds the predetermined value (2100).

In the game modes 0 to 7, various lottery is performed. Since the lottery is summarized in FIGS. 25 to 31, it will be briefly described here. The advantageous section transition lottery shown in FIG. 25 (A) is a lottery for determining whether or not to shift to the advantageous section, and is won (1) based on the conditional device group A number (the conditional device group number will be described later). Or select one of the losses (0). The number of winnings corresponding to each condition device group A number is as shown in the figure.

The chance mode 1 lottery shown in FIG. 25B is a lottery for determining a chance mode number (a number for managing the ease of winning in the lottery in the chance (game mode 1)), and is based on the conditional device group H number. Then, one of the chance mode numbers 0 to 4 is selected. The number of winnings corresponding to each condition device group H number is as shown in the figure.

The chance mode 2 lottery-1 shown in FIG. 25C is a lottery for determining the chance mode number during the BB operation in the chance (game mode 1), and the chance mode number is based on the condition device group D number. One of 0 to 4 (actually 0 or 4) is selected. The number of winnings corresponding to each condition device group D number is as shown in the figure.

The chance mode 2 lottery-2 shown in FIG. 25D is a lottery for determining the chance mode number while the BB is not operating in the chance (game mode 1), and the chance mode is based on the condition device group B number. One of the numbers 0 to 4 (actually 0 or 4) is selected. The number of winnings corresponding to each condition device group B number is as shown in the figure.

The chance mode 3 lottery shown in FIG. 25 (E) is a lottery in which a chance mode number is newly determined at the end of the stay cycle during the chance (game mode 1), and the current chance mode numbers 1 to 3 (in the case of 0). Is not drawn), and one of the new chance mode numbers 0 to 4 (actually 0 or 4) is selected. The number of winnings corresponding to each chance mode number is as shown in the figure. The chance mode number 4 indicates that the AT has been won. Each chance mode lottery in FIGS. 25 (B) to 25 (E) is collectively referred to as an AT lottery.

The chance game number lottery shown in FIG. 26 (A) is a chance (game mode 1) when any one of chance mode numbers 1 to 3 is selected in the chance mode 1 lottery (also referred to as “chance mode winning”). It is a lottery to determine the number of games to stay in, and one of 0, 10, 20, and 30 games is selected based on the selected chance mode numbers 1 to 3. The number of winnings corresponding to each chance mode number is as shown in the figure.

The chance cycle lottery shown in FIG. 26B is a lottery that determines the number of cycles when the chance mode is won, and is any of 0 to 4 cycles based on the chance mode numbers 1 to 3 selected in the chance mode 1 lottery. To be elected. The number of winnings corresponding to each chance mode number is as shown in the figure.

The EX1 mode lottery shown in FIG. 26C is a lottery for determining the addition mode number (the number for managing the stock addition state during AT) after the AT is won, and the addition mode number 0 is based on the condition device group F number. Select one of 2 (actually 1 or 2). The number of winnings corresponding to each condition device group F number is as shown in the figure.

The EX2 mode lottery shown in FIG. 26 (D) is a lottery performed while staying in the game mode 2 or 5 in order to determine the additional mode number after the AT is won, like the EX1 mode lottery, and is a conditional device group F number. Based on, any one of the addition mode numbers 0 to 2 (actually 0 or 2) is selected. The number of winnings corresponding to each condition device group F number is as shown in the figure.

The AT mode lottery-1 shown in FIG. 26 (E) determines the next AT mode number (a number that manages the ease of winning in the lottery during AT) at the time of winning the AT, and therefore stays in the game modes 0 and 2 in particular. It is a lottery performed during the process, and one of AT mode numbers 0 to 5 is selected based on the condition device group J number. The number of winnings corresponding to each condition device group J number is as shown in the figure.

The AT mode lottery-2 shown in FIG. 26F determines the next AT mode number (a number that manages the ease of winning in the lottery during AT) at the time of AT winning, as in the AT mode lottery-1. It is a lottery performed during the stay of the game modes 3 to 5, and any one of the AT mode numbers 0 to 5 is selected based on the condition device group J number. The number of winnings corresponding to each condition device group J number is as shown in the figure.

The AT mode lottery-3 shown in FIG. 26 (G) determines the next AT mode number (a number that manages the ease of winning in the lottery during AT) at the time of AT winning, as in the AT mode lottery-1 and 2. In particular, it is a lottery performed after all rounds have stopped (also referred to as "after all stops"), and any of AT mode numbers 0 to 5 is selected based on the condition device group J number. The number of winnings corresponding to each condition device group J number is as shown in the figure.

The Seven 1 lottery shown in FIG. 27 (A) is a lottery performed during the stay in game mode 1 or 4 and after all stops in order to determine the type of AT (red seven or gold seven), and is a condition device group F number. One of the seven numbers 0 to 2 is selected based on. The number of winnings corresponding to each condition device group F number is as shown in the figure.

Like the Seven 1 lottery, the Seven 2 lottery shown in FIG. 27 (B) is a lottery performed during the stay in the game mode 2 or 5 in order to determine the type of AT, and is based on the conditional device group F number. Select one of Seven Numbers 0-2. The number of winnings corresponding to each condition device group F number is as shown in the figure.

The AT mode rewriting lottery shown in FIG. 27 (C) is a lottery in which the AT mode number is rewritten after the end of AT, and the AT mode numbers 0 to 5 are based on the value of the advantageous section clear counter (less than 300 or 300 or more). Select one. The number of winnings corresponding to the value of each advantageous section clear counter is as shown in the figure.

The seven-loop lottery shown in FIG. 27 (D) is a lottery for deciding whether or not to continue Red Seven, and is won (1) or lost (1) based on the loop number (the number that manages the continuation rate of Red Seven). Select one of 0). The number of winnings corresponding to each loop number is as shown in the figure.

The gold seven loop lottery shown in FIG. 27 (E) is a lottery for determining whether or not to continue gold seven, and either winning (1) or losing (0) is selected. The number of winnings assigned to winning (1) and losing (0) is as shown in the figure.

The gold seven loop rewriting lottery shown in FIG. 27 (F) is a lottery for rewriting the continuation rate of gold seven, and either winning (1) or losing (0) is selected based on the condition device group E number. do. The number of winnings corresponding to each condition device group E number is as shown in the figure.

The additional mode lottery shown in FIG. 27 (G) is a lottery for determining the additional mode number during AT, and any one of the additional mode numbers 0 to 2 (actually 1 or 2) is selected. The number of winnings assigned to each additional mode number is as shown in the figure.

The bell number switching lottery shown in FIG. 28A is a lottery for rewriting the number of bells, and either winning (1) or losing (0) is selected based on the value of the bell number counter. The number of winnings corresponding to the value of each bell count counter is as shown in the figure.

The Seven Stock 1 lottery shown in FIG. 28 (B) is a lottery for determining whether or not to add the number of AT stocks, and either the winning (1) or the loss (0) is selected based on the condition device group C number. elect. The number of winnings corresponding to each condition device group C number is as shown in the figure.

Similar to the Seven Stock 1 lottery, the Seven Stock 2 lottery shown in FIG. 28 (C) is a lottery for deciding whether or not to add the number of AT stocks, and is won (1) or lost based on the conditional device group E number. Select one of (0). The number of winnings corresponding to each condition device group E number is as shown in the figure.

The effect lever weight lottery shown in FIG. 28 (D) is a lottery for determining whether or not to perform fake weight as a freeze, and is either winning (1) or losing (0) based on the condition device group J number. To be elected. The number of winnings corresponding to each condition device group J number is as shown in the figure.

The AT cycle lottery-1 shown in FIG. 29 (A) is the number of stay cycles during the AT (the BB operation required from the game mode 3 to the return to the game mode 3 via the game modes 7 and 4) at the end of the AT. The number of times) is determined by a lottery, especially when the AT mode number is 1 or 2, and the number of stay cycles is 0 to 3 (actually 1 to 3) based on the value of the bell count counter. To be elected. The number of winnings corresponding to the value of each bell count counter is as shown in the figure.

Like the AT cycle lottery-1, the AT cycle lottery-2 shown in FIG. 29B is performed at the end of the AT to determine the number of stay cycles during the AT, especially when the AT mode number is 3 or 4. It is a lottery, and one of 0 to 3 stay cycles (actually 1 to 3) is selected based on the value of the bell count counter. The number of winnings corresponding to the value of each bell count counter is as shown in the figure.

The pullback 1 lottery-1 shown in FIG. 29 (C) is a lottery performed when the AT mode number is 1 to 3 in order to determine whether or not to win the AT again after the end of the AT, and is a condition device group. Either winning (1) or losing (0) is selected based on the C number. The number of winnings corresponding to each condition device group C number is as shown in the figure.

Like the pullback 1 lottery-1, the pullback 1 lottery-2 shown in FIG. 29 (D) determines whether or not to win the AT again after the end of the AT. Therefore, the lottery performed especially when the AT mode number is 4. Therefore, either the winning (1) or the losing (0) is selected based on the conditional device group C number. The number of winnings corresponding to each condition device group C number is as shown in the figure.

The pullback 1 lottery-3 shown in FIG. 30 (A) is the same as the pullback 1 lottery-1 and 2, in order to determine whether or not to win the AT again after the end of the AT, especially when the AT mode number is 5. This is a lottery, and either the winner (1) or the loss (0) is selected based on the condition device group C number. The number of winnings corresponding to each condition device group C number is as shown in the figure.

The pullback 2 lottery shown in FIG. 30B is a lottery for deciding whether or not to win the AT again after the number of stay cycles during the AT becomes 0, and the winning (1) or the lottery is based on the AT mode number. Select one of the losses (0). The number of winnings corresponding to each AT mode number is as shown in the figure.

The AT cycle preferential game number lottery shown in FIG. 30C is a lottery for determining the number of games set in a predetermined preferential state (also referred to as “preferred state game number”) after the end of AT, and is based on the AT mode number. Then, one of 0, 10, 20, and 30 preferential games is selected. The number of winnings corresponding to each AT mode number is as shown in the figure.

The seven table 1 lottery shown in FIG. 31 (A) is a lottery for determining the seven table number (the number that manages the table that determines the continuation rate in red seven), and the seven table numbers 0 to 15 are based on the AT mode number. Select one of them. The number of winnings corresponding to each AT mode number is as shown in the figure.

The seven table 1 lottery shown in FIG. 31 (B) is a lottery for determining the seven table number, like the seven table 1 lottery, and one of the seven table numbers 0 to 15 is selected based on the condition device group G number. .. The number of winnings corresponding to each condition device group G number is as shown in the figure.

The number of bells 1 lottery-1 shown in FIG. 32 (A) is a lottery for the first time, which is performed especially when the game mode is 0 to 2, in order to determine the number of bells, and is a CU rank number (count up). Based on the number that manages the ease), one of the number of bells 0 to 4, 6, 10, 11, 20 is selected. The number of winnings corresponding to each CU rank number is as shown in the figure.

The number of bells 1 lottery-2 shown in FIG. 32 (B) is the same as the number of bells 1 lottery-1, and is a lottery for the first time, which is performed especially when the game mode is 4 or 5, in order to determine the number of bells. , One of the number of bells 0 to 4,6,10,11,20 is selected based on the CU rank number. The number of winnings corresponding to each CU rank number is as shown in the figure.

The number of bells 2 lottery shown in FIG. 32 (C) is a lottery for the second and subsequent times to determine the number of bells, and the number of bells is 0 to 4,6,10,11,20 based on the CU rank number. Select one of them. The number of winnings corresponding to each CU rank number is as shown in the figure.

The number of bells 3 lottery shown in FIG. 32 (D) is the same as the number of bells 2 lottery, and is a lottery for the second and subsequent times to determine the number of bells, and the number of bells is 0 to 4,6,10,11,20. Select one of them. The number of winnings assigned to each number of bells is as shown in the figure.

Returning to FIG. 21, the random number generation / acquisition means 117 includes the above-mentioned CPU 61, clock pulse generator 64, frequency divider 65, random number generator 66, and random number acquisition circuit 67, and random numbers used in various lottery are generated. Generate and capture. In this embodiment, four 16-bit random number means (4ch: ch is an abbreviation for "channel") capable of generating a random number sequence in a numerical range of "0 to 65535" at the maximum, and "0 to 255" at the maximum. It has four (4ch) 8-bit random number means capable of generating random numbers in the numerical range up to, and each of them can independently generate a random number sequence. The random numbers generated by these 16-bit random number means or 8-bit random number means are also referred to as hardware random numbers (hard random numbers) because they are updated based on the clock signal generated by the clock pulse generator 64. Although not shown, the present embodiment includes a random number generation means different from the random number generation / acquisition means 118. This random number generating means is composed of the above-mentioned CPU 61 and RAM 63, and has a random number means capable of generating a random number sequence in a predetermined numerical range as a random number used for determining a combination or the like. Since this random number is updated based on the program, it is also called a software random number (soft random number).

(Each means constituting the game progress management means 130)
The receiving medal management means 131 is detected by the inserted medal sensor 28b, which is guided to the receiving passage and is actually accepted among the game medals (also referred to as “inserted game medals”) inserted from the medal insertion slot 21. It is configured to control whether a game medal (also referred to as an "accepted game medal") is a game medal that is directly bet or a game medal that is credited. In the present embodiment, if the number of bets does not reach the maximum bet allowable number (the number of bets required to execute the game (specified number "3")), the accepted game medal is directly bet on the game medal. If the number of bets has reached the maximum number of bets and the number of credits has not reached the maximum number of credits (for example, "50"), the accepted game medal is configured to be a credited game medal. ing.

In addition, the receptive medal management means 131 automatically bets processing (without reducing the number of game medals held by the player, the same number of game medals as the number of bets in the previous game is generated in the game set to the re-game operation state. It is configured to perform the process of setting the bet state). Even in the re-game operation state, if the number of credits does not reach the maximum credit allowance, the inserted game medal is accepted as a credited game medal (may not be accepted). If the number of bets has reached the maximum number of bets and the number of credits has reached the maximum number of credits, the inserted game medals will not be accepted and will be returned.

The combination determining means 132 determines a plurality of combinations based on a preset combination determination probability (lottery number) triggered by the operation of the start lever 25 (the operation of the start lever 25 is effectively accepted). It is configured to perform a combination determination process (internal lottery) for selecting at least one combination determination result from the results (condition device). This combination determination process is performed using a random number generated by the 16-bit random number means described above. Specifically, when the start lever 25 is operated, the 16-bit random number means takes in the generated random numbers. Then, when performing the combination determination process, the captured random numbers are read out, a predetermined soft random number is added to the read random numbers, and the random number after the addition is used to select a conditional device. The condition device may be selected by using the read random number without adding the predetermined soft random number.

The combination determination process is performed with reference to a predetermined combination determination table (not shown) set in advance. The combination determination table has a configuration in which lottery number data corresponding to each condition device is stored in a predetermined storage area (plural addresses) in the ROM 62 for each set value. When one or more conditional devices are selected in the combination determination process, the game combination corresponding to the selected conditional device becomes the establishment allowable combination in the game. Information on the selected conditional device (winning combination) is stored in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 63, but when the information on the winning item stored in one game is information on winning a small combination or a re-game combination. Is cleared (reset to "0") after the end of the game, regardless of whether or not these small roles and re-game combinations are established. On the other hand, if the information regarding the winning of the BB combination is not established even if the BB combination is won, the information is stored without being cleared until the BB combination is established.

The effect group number determining means 133 is configured to perform a process of associating the effect group number with the condition device selected by the combination determination process. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 33, the effect group A group number (0 or 1) is associated with the bonus condition device, and the effect group B group number (0 to 1) is associated with the winning replay condition device. 29) is associated with it. For example, as shown in FIG. 33 (A), the effect group A group number 1 is commonly associated with the type 1 BB-A condition device and the type 1 BB-B condition device. Further, as shown in FIG. 33 (B), the difference in the pushing order causes advantages and disadvantages in the game (influence on the payout), and the number of payouts (number of acquired medals) of the game medals is different. The effect group B group number 13 is commonly associated with the winning-A1 to A12 condition devices, and the effect group B group number 14 is commonly associated with the winning-B1 to B12 condition devices.

On the other hand, the difference in the push order does not affect the advantages and disadvantages of the game (there is no effect on the payout). Winning re-game conditions corresponding to the winning of a small winning combination (winning combination) with no difference in the number of game medals paid out (number of acquisitions) or the number of game medals that can be acquired is small (for example, less than the specified number of bets) As for the devices, different effect group B numbers are associated with each condition device.

Returning to FIG. 21, the reel control means 134 confirms that the minimum game time has elapsed, triggered by the operation of the start lever 25 (the operation of the start lever 25 has been effectively accepted). , The reels 3a to 3c are started to rotate, and after all the reels that have started to rotate are in a constant speed rotation state, the stop switches 26a, 26b, and 26c are sequentially operated (each operation of the stop switches 26a to 26c is effective. It is configured to sequentially stop the rotation of each of the corresponding reels 3a to 3c.

The rotation stop control of each reel 3a to 3c is based on each stop table (not shown) set (set) according to the combination determination result selected by the combination determination process, and the operation mode (push) of the stop switches 26a to 26c is performed. It is done according to the order, operation timing, etc.). Each reel 3a to 3c is set so that each reel 3a to 3c is stopped within a predetermined stop allowable time (for example, 190 milliseconds) from the timing when the stop switches 26a, 26b, 26c are operated (in the present embodiment). It is performed (within the range of the maximum number of sliding frames of 5 frames).

That is, when a predetermined game combination is selected as a winning combination as a result of the combination determination process, the corresponding symbol of the selected gaming combination is stopped on the valid line 29 as much as possible within the range of the stop allowable time. As is displayed, in the case of a loss, the reels 3a to 3c are stopped and controlled so that the corresponding symbols of any of the game combinations are not stopped and displayed on the effective line 29. In addition, when the re-game role or the small role is won during the carry-over of the special role, or when the special role and the re-game role or the small role are elected in duplicate, the re-game role, the special role, and the small role are provided. The reel rotation stop control of the re-game combination priority (the priority of the small combination may be higher than that of the special combination) may be performed.

The stop display symbol determination means 135 determines which symbol is the symbol stopped and displayed by the reels 3a to 3c based on the timing when the stop switches 26a to 26c are operated, and is stopped and displayed on the effective line 29. It is configured to determine whether or not the game combination is established based on the combination of the symbols determined to be reeled. It should be noted that the determination of the symbol displayed as stopped does not necessarily have to be performed after all the reels have stopped. Based on the symbol located on the effective line 29 and the number of slip frames thereof, the symbol finally stopped and displayed on the effective line 29 is determined, and based on the determination result, before all reels stop. The combination of symbols stopped and displayed on the effective line 29 may be determined.

The payout medal management means 136 adds the number of game medals corresponding to the small winning combination established when the small winning combination is established to the number of credits when the number of credits does not reach the maximum credit allowance. Therefore, when the number of credits has reached the maximum allowable number of credits, the payment is made by the actual payout that drives the hopper 50 via the hopper drive circuit 52. Further, when the clearing operation (pressing operation of the clearing switch 24) is effectively accepted, the payout medal management means 136 transfers the bet number of game medals or the credited number of game medals to the hopper 50. It is designed to be driven and refunded.

The blocker control means 137 outputs a blocker signal for controlling the blocker 48 described above so as to switch the blocker 48 between an ON state (game medal acceptable state) and an OFF state (game medal unacceptable state). It is configured in. When the blocker 48 is turned off, the game medals inserted into the medal insertion slot 21 are guided to the return passage and returned. However, the insertion of the game medal is detected by the insertion medal sensor 28a.

The display lamp control means 138 includes the above-mentioned various display lamps (MAX-BET switch display lamp 46a, BET lamp 46b, insertable display lamp 46c, game start display lamp 46d, re-game display lamp 46e, status display lamp 46f, etc. It is configured to control the lighting and extinguishing of the number-of-times display lamp 46g, the CRE lamp 46h, and the payout number display lamp 46j) via the display lamp control circuit 47. When the payout number display lamp 46j functions as the main push order alarm, the payout number display lamp 46j is controlled by the push order management means 139.

The push order management means 139 selects an instruction number (any of 0 to 6) corresponding to the push order to be notified according to the combination determination result (condition device) selected by the combination determination process. The instruction number 0 is selected when the push order is not notified, and the instruction numbers 1 to 6 are selected when the push order is to be notified. In the present embodiment, the instruction number 1 is "left middle right", the instruction number 2 is "left and right middle", the instruction number 3 is "middle left and right", the instruction number 4 is "middle right left", and the instruction number 5 is "right left middle". , The instruction number 6 is associated with each pressing order of "right, middle, left".

Further, the push order management means 139 is also configured to make the payout number display lamp 46j function as a main side push order alarm and perform push navigation (main side push navigation) by notifying the selected instruction number. There is. This push navigation uses two 7-segment lamps (hereinafter, may be abbreviated as "7-segment") provided on the payout number display lamp 46j to notify the navigation number. For example, "=" is displayed on the left 7-segment display, and the numerical value of the instruction number (for example, "2" for the instruction number 2) is displayed on the right 7-segment display. The “=” displayed on the left 7-segment is for distinguishing from the case where the payout number is displayed on the payout number display lamp 46j. When the navigation number 0 is selected, the payout number display lamp 46j is not displayed, but as another aspect, "=" is displayed on the left 7-segment display and "0" is displayed on the right 7-segment display. It may be displayed, "0" may be displayed on both the left 7-segment and the right 7-segment, or "0" may be displayed on only one of the left and right 7-segments.

The condition device group number determining means 140 is used to select a winning value in various lottery according to the effect group A group number and the effect group B group number determined by the effect group number determination means 133. Is configured to determine. Specifically, the condition device group number is divided into 10 types from the condition device group A number to the condition device group J number, and each combination of the effect group A group number and the effect group B group number is conditional. Each number value from the device group A number to the condition device group J number is associated in advance. The specific correspondence is as shown in FIG. 34. For example, for the combination of the effect group A group number 1 and the effect group B group number 0, the condition device group A number 1, the condition device group B number 2, the condition device group C number 2, the condition device group D number 0, and the condition device Group E number 0, condition device group F number 1, condition device group G number 0, condition device group H number 1, condition device group I number 0, and condition device group J number 1 are associated with each other. In the remarks column in the table of FIG. 34, an abbreviation indicating the content of each combination of the effect group A group number and the effect group B group number is described.

(Each means constituting the main communication control means 150)
The control command transmitting means 151 is configured to transmit a control command including various information about the game at a predetermined timing. For example, as a control command to be transmitted before the start lever 25 is operated, a control command (also referred to as a "game mode command") including information indicating which game mode is set, and which RT state is set. There are control commands (also referred to as "RT commands") that include information indicating whether or not the game is being played, and control commands (also referred to as "operating state commands") that include information indicating the operating state of the replay. Further, as the control command to be transmitted when the start lever 25 is operated, for example, a control command including information on the instruction number (also referred to as “instruction number command”), an effect group number (effect group A number and effect). There is a control command (also referred to as "effect group number command") that includes information on the group B number). In addition to this, control commands including information on set values, control commands including information on the values of various counters such as bell count counters, control commands including information indicating the content of effects to be executed by the sub-control means, and bonus games described later. A control command or the like including the information to be transmitted in the above may be transmitted before the start lever 25 is operated, triggered by the operation of the start lever 25, or other triggers.

Further, the control command transmitting means 151 is triggered by the confirmation that the minimum game time has elapsed, and the control command ("" It is also called a "full rotation start command"). Further, when the first stop operation (operation of the stop switch for first stopping the reel) is accepted, a control command (“first stop acceptance command”) including information indicating that the first stop operation is accepted is received. A control command (also referred to as a "first stop command") that includes information on the first body stop, triggered by the first body stop (stopping the reel corresponding to the first stop operation). ) Is sent. Similarly, a control command (“second stop”) including information indicating that the second stop operation has been accepted, triggered by the acceptance of the second stop operation (operation of the stop switch for stopping the reel second). A control command (“second stop command”) that includes information on the second body stop, triggered by the second body stop (stopping the reel corresponding to the second stop operation), while sending a reception command). Also called). Similarly, when the third stop operation (operation of the stop switch for stopping the reel at the end) is accepted, a control command (“third stop acceptance command”) including information indicating that the third stop operation is accepted is received. A control command (also referred to as a "third stop command") containing information on the third cylinder stop, triggered by the third cylinder stop (stopping the reel corresponding to the third stop operation). ) Is sent. Further, a control command (also referred to as "all stop command") including information on all rounds stop before the stop symbol is determined, and a control command including information on the number of game medals to be paid out after the stop symbol is determined ("payout"). Also called "number command") is sent. In addition, a control command (also referred to as a "combination determination result command") including information on the combination determination result (bonus condition device and winning replay condition device) is transmitted at a predetermined timing after the whole rotation is stopped. Communication between the main control means 100 and the sub control means 200 (sub-main control means 200A) is possible only in one direction from the former to the latter.

The outer end signal transmitting means 152 is configured to transmit an outer end signal to an external device such as a data counter or a hall computer when a predetermined gaming state is reached. In the present embodiment, 15 game medals are paid out twice when the winning-A1 to A12 conditional device or the winning-B1 to B12 conditional device is selected while staying in the game mode 3 of the advantageous section. When a situation occurs (continuously), the outer end signal is output. Such a situation can occur both inside the BB and not inside the BB (not inside the BB). If the outer end signal is output only when such a situation occurs inside the BB, it can be determined that the outer end signal is output inside the BB. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the outer end signal is output when the above-mentioned situation occurs regardless of whether it is inside the BB or inside the BB. Therefore, even if the outer end signal is output, it is difficult to reliably determine whether or not the signal is inside the BB. However, the possibility that 15 game medals will be paid out inside the BB is considerably lower than that inside the BB. Therefore, when the outer end signal is output, it is highly possible that it is output inside the BB. Therefore, even if the player confirms the number of times the outer end signal is output by an external device or the like and determines that the number of times is the number of times the player has moved into the inside of the BB, the judgment greatly deviates from the actual situation. There is no (reliability can be ensured when the outer end signal is regarded as a signal indicating that the signal is inside the BB).

<Functional block of sub-control means>
The sub-control means 200 mainly controls the sub-main control means (also referred to as "first sub-control means") 200A that mainly manages (instructs) the lamp effect, the image effect, and the sound effect, and mainly controls the image effect and the sound effect. It is configured to include a sub-sub control means (also referred to as a "second sub-control means") 200B (executed).

The sub-main control means 200A is roughly divided into an effect management means 210 and a sub-main communication control means 230. The effect management means 210 includes a game effect management means 211, a notification effect management means 212, and a lamp effect control means 213, and the sub-main communication control means 230 includes a control command receiving unit 231, an effect command transmitting means 232, and a state command. The receiving means 233 is provided. The above-mentioned means in the sub-main control means 200A are hardware such as a sub-main CPU 71, ROM 72, RAM 73, and electronic circuits arranged on the sub-main control board 70A shown in FIG. 2, and a control program stored in the ROM 72. It is a functional representation of what is composed of software such as.

(Each means constituting the production management means 210)
The game production management means 211 mainly controls the execution time and the like of the image and sound production (also referred to as “game production”) executed by the sub-sub control means 200B for the purpose of improving the interest of the game and enhancing the playability. It is configured to manage based on the control command from the means 100. The game production includes, for example, continuous production, single-shot production, assist production, and the like.

The continuous effect is an effect that is continuous over a plurality of game periods, and mainly uses the image display device 11 to display an image that becomes a continuous story over a plurality of game periods. Examples include those that display an effect image or the like that symbolizes that the player is staying in a predetermined game mode (for example, game mode 5). In addition, when performing a continuous effect or a single-shot effect described below, the effect lamps 12, 13a, 13b, 14a, 14b and the decorative lamps 32a, 32b are used, or the speakers 15a, 15b, 44a, 44b are used. You may combine the effects that you had.

The single-shot effect is an effect that is executed in a single-shot manner when a specific situation occurs in the progress of the game. For example, there is an effect that the image display device 11 displays an image suggesting the winning expectation of the game combination when each reel is rotated. Further, when the number of AT games (number of bells) is added in the main control means 100, the value of the added number of AT games (for example, characters such as "+10") is displayed on the display screen 11a of the image display device 11. The effect displayed above is also an example of a one-shot effect.

The assist effect is an effect for supporting the player, and in the present embodiment, the push navigation effect is mainly performed according to the information of the navigation number transmitted by the navigation number command from the main control means 100. This push navigation effect (sub-side push navigation) uses the image display device 11 as a sub-side push order display to display the push order (correct answer push order) according to the navigation number to the player on the display screen 11a. It is a one-shot production to be displayed on. In this embodiment, the RP navigation effect corresponding to the above-mentioned RP navigation (sub-side RP navigation), the winning navigation effect corresponding to the winning navigation (sub-side winning navigation), and the eye-pushing navigation effect corresponding to the eye-pushing navigation (sub-side winning navigation). Sub-side push navigation) is to be executed.

As a specific mode of the push navigation effect (RP navigation effect, winning navigation effect) for notifying the push order, an example of displaying a number indicating the corresponding push order can be mentioned. For example, if the left reel is numbered "1", the middle reel is numbered "2", and the right reel is numbered "3" (these numbers are also called "reel numbers"), the push order is "left first". In that case, "1" is displayed at the lower left of the display screen 11a, and in the case of "middle left / right" pressing order, "2, 1, 3" is displayed at the lower part of the display screen 11a as a number indicating the pressing order. A mode of notifying side by side from the left side is conceivable. That is, when displaying from the reel that is the target of the first stop operation to the reel that is the target of the third stop operation, the first stop operation is performed when the player operates the first stop switch according to the displayed push order. The display of the reel number that is the target of the second stop operation is turned off, and when the player operates the next stop switch according to the displayed push order, the display of the reel number that is the target of the second stop operation is turned off, and the player is the last When the stop switch is operated, the display of the reel number that is the target of the third stop operation may be turned off.

Further, when the player operates the stop switch in an order different from the displayed push order, the push navigation effect may be terminated immediately. Further, when displaying the pressing order, the voice "Naka", the voice "Hidari", and the voice "Migi" are output from the speakers 15a, 15b, etc. in association with the operation to be performed next. You may. Further, the effect lamp 13a may be associated with "left", the effect lamp 12 may be associated with "middle", and the effect lamp 13b may be associated with "right" so as to emit light or blink in association with the operation to be performed next. In addition, a display for performing sub-side push navigation may be provided. For example, under the display window W, a display consisting of three 7-segment lamps arranged side by side is provided, and in the case of "right middle left" pressing order, "right middle left" 7-segment lamps are placed on each of the left, center, and right 7-segment lamps. It is possible to display the numbers of "3", "2", and "1" respectively.

The notification effect management means 212 mainly determines the execution time of the image or voice effect (hereinafter referred to as “notification effect”) executed by the sub-sub control means 200B for the purpose of notifying the player of information about the game. It is configured to be managed based on a control command from the control means 100. As the notification effect, for example, an error notification effect for notifying the occurrence of an error with text information such as "error occurrence", or "image preparation" for an image being prepared when the power is turned off and restored. Examples include the effect of notifying with text information. In addition, in order to prevent the player from being excessively absorbed in the game (immersion), an effect of displaying an image (also referred to as a "caution image") containing character information for calling the player's attention is also notified. It is given as an example of production.

The lamp effect control means 213 is configured to control various lighting effects using the effect lamps 12, 13a, 13b, 14a, 14b, the decorative lamps 32a, 32b, and the back lamps 38a to 38d. In addition, it is configured to perform the suggestion effect described later.

(Each means constituting the sub-main communication control means 230)
The control command receiving means 231 is configured to receive a control command from the main control means 100 and store it in a predetermined storage area such as a RAM 73 (for example, a command buffer for the received control command).

The effect command transmission means 232 is configured to transmit an effect command (for example, an effect command including image information) including various information related to the effect to the sub-sub control means 200B based on the control command from the main control means 100. ing.

The state command receiving means 233 receives a state command (for example, a state command including information that a reception error of an effect command has occurred) from the sub-sub control means 200B, and receives a predetermined storage area such as a RAM 73 (for example, received). It is configured to be stored in the command buffer for status commands).

The sub-sub control means 200B is roughly divided into the effect execution control means 250 and the sub-sub communication control means 270 with respect to the sub-main control means 200A configured as described above. The effect execution control means 250 includes a game effect execution control means 251 and a notification effect execution control means 252, and the sub-sub communication control means 270 includes an effect command receiving means 271 and a state command transmitting means 272. The above-mentioned means in the sub-sub control means 200B are hardware such as a sub-sub CPU 75, ROM 76, RAM 77, and electronic circuits arranged on the sub-sub control board 70B shown in FIG. 2, and software such as a control program stored in the ROM 76. It is a functional representation of what is composed of hardware.

(Each means constituting the effect execution control means 250)
The game effect execution control means 251 is configured to control the image display device 11, the speakers 15a, 15b, and the like based on the effect command from the sub-main control means 200A, and execute the above-mentioned game effect.

The notification effect execution control means 252 is configured to control the image display device 11, the speakers 15a, 15b, and the like based on the effect command from the sub-main control means 200A, and execute the above-mentioned notification effect.

(Each means constituting the sub-sub communication control means 270)
The effect command receiving means 271 is configured to receive an effect command from the sub-main control means 200A and store it in a predetermined storage area such as a RAM 77 (for example, a command buffer for the received effect command).

The state command transmitting means 272 is configured to transmit the above-mentioned state command to the sub-main control means 200A.

The transmission of the control command from the control command transmission means 151, the transmission of the effect command from the effect command transmission means 232, and the transmission of the state command from the state command transmission means 272 are all performed by the serial communication method (parallel). It may be done by the communication method). Further, each of the transmission means 151, 232, 272 has the same configuration, and is a command buffer (also referred to as “CB”) as a storage area for temporarily storing a command to be transmitted, and writing or reading a command to be transmitted. It is configured to include a command processing unit that performs processing such as, and a command transmission unit that transmits commands by serial communication.

The CB has a plurality of storage areas distinguished by each address, and is configured to store 1 byte of command data in each storage area. The command processing unit generates command data to be transmitted, writes it to the address area indicated by the CB write pointer, reads previously written command data from the address area indicated by the CB read pointer, and commands it. It is configured to write to the TDR (transmission data register) of the transmission unit. The command transmission unit is configured to transfer the command data written in the TDR to a TSR (transmission shift register), serially convert the command data there, and transmit the command data.

When using the parallel communication method, the previously written command data is read from the address area indicated by the CB read pointer, and the command data is sent to a predetermined output port (output port for transmitting to the sub-control means). It is configured to send by writing to. One command in this embodiment usually has a 2-byte configuration (the checksum has a 1-byte configuration). Further, the communication method is a pace synchronization type (asynchronous type), and has a 1-bit stop bit and a 1-bit parity bit (even parity) (the communication method and command configuration can be changed as appropriate).

<Design displayed in the design display area>
As shown in FIG. 35 (A), three display designs, a display design GK1, a display design GK2, and a display design GK3, are drawn in the design display area DA1 (see also FIG. 1) of the central panel. The display design GK1 is a design in which three designs of "blue bar", "blue bar", and "red seven" are arranged horizontally in this order from the left side on the background portion BK1 and is displayed. The design GK2 is a design in which three designs of "black bar", "black bar", and "red seven" are arranged side by side in this order from the left side on the background portion BK2. The display design GK3 is a design in which three symbols "・", "・", and "Red Seven" are arranged horizontally in this order from the left side on the background portion BK2.

The display design GK1 is a design that the player can understand that represents the corresponding design "blue bar / blue bar / red seven" of the BB role 1, and the display design GK2 is the corresponding design "black" of the BB role 2. It is a design that the player can understand that it represents "bar, black bar, red seven". On the other hand, the display design GK3 is a design that reminds the player of a design combination in which "Red Seven" is located on the right side, for example, a design combination of "Red Seven / Red Seven / Red Seven". The background portion BK3 of the display design GK3 is colored in the same color as or similar to the color (red) of the design "Red Seven". Further, the background portion BK1 of the display design GK1 may be colored in the same color as or similar to the color (blue) of the design "blue bar", and the background portion BK2 of the display design GK2 may be colored with the design "black bar". It may be colored in the same color as or similar to the color (black). Display design Instead of the design "Red Seven" in GK3, a design not provided on the reel, for example, a design such as "☆" may be displayed.

As shown in FIG. 35 (B), three "Red Seven" symbols are drawn side by side in the symbol display area DA2 (see also FIG. 1) of the center panel, whereby " The player is made aware of the combination of "Red Seven, Red Seven, Red Seven". In addition, the symbol combination of "Red Seven / Red Seven / Red Seven" is a corresponding symbol of the small winning combination 40 that is established only in RT2 (while the BB is operating), and in RT1 (inside the BB), it is predetermined. When the combination determination result (for example, winning-A1 to A12 conditional device or winning-B1 to B12 conditional device) is selected, if the symbol "Red Seven" is pulled in depending on the pushing order and pushing position, it is displayed as a lost symbol. It is a combination of symbols that may be used.

<Suggestion production>
On the back side of the design display area DA1 shown in FIG. 35 (A), a plurality of lighting lamps (also referred to as “design lighting lamps”) (also referred to as “design lighting lamps”), which are not shown, are arranged at predetermined positions, and the design lighting lamps are turned on or turned on. By blinking, the display designs GK1 to GK3 drawn on the central panel can be illuminated and conspicuous from the back side of the central panel. The lighting and extinguishing of the design lighting lamp is controlled by the sub-control means side.

In this embodiment, a suggestion effect (suggestion notification) is performed using a design lighting lamp. The suggestion effect is an effect that suggests a combination of symbols to be aimed at by the player, and as shown in FIG. 36, four types of suggestion effects 1 to 4 are performed. The suggestion pattern 1 is a suggestion effect in which two of the three display designs GK1 to GK3 are illuminated from the back side by a design lighting lamp to make them stand out. The suggestion pattern 2 is a suggestion effect in which only the display design GK3 out of the three display designs GK1 to GK3 is illuminated from the back side by the design lighting lamp to make it stand out. The suggestion pattern 3 is a suggestion effect in which only the display design GK1 out of the three display designs GK1 to GK3 is illuminated from the back side by the design lighting lamp to make it stand out. The suggestion pattern 4 is a suggestion effect in which only the display design GK2 out of the three display designs GK1 to GK3 is illuminated from the back side by the design lighting lamp to make it stand out. In addition, in FIG. 36, the symbol whose frame line is displayed by the alternate long and short dash line indicates that it is illuminated from the back side.

The suggestion effect of the suggestion pattern 2 is basically performed when the BB is won while the AT is won. Specifically, when the start lever is operated, the sub-control means mainly controls the information (command) of the AT winning flag = 1 and the effect group A number 1 (indicating that the BB winning combination 1 or the BB winning combination 2 has been won). The suggestion effect of the suggestion pattern 2 is performed on the occasion of receiving from the means. By performing the suggestion effect of the suggestion pattern 2, the symbol combination "Red Seven / Red Seven / Red Seven" is placed in the order of pressing "Right First" (in the display design GK3, the symbol "Red Seven" is arranged on the right side. Because it is), it is possible to encourage the player to aim. By this suggestion effect, the player aims at the symbol combination "Red Seven / Red Seven / Red Seven", and the corresponding symbol "blue bar / blue bar / red seven" of BB role 1 and the corresponding symbol "black bar" of BB role 2・ Black Bar / Red Seven ”are no longer available, which allows you to shift to AT (Game Mode 3) while inside the BB.

In this way, when a special role is selected in which the corresponding symbols cannot be aligned on the effective line unless the corresponding symbols are pressed, and the player cannot align the corresponding symbols, the player shifts to an advantageous gaming state. This is also done, for example, in the slot machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-126497. However, in the conventional case, when a special role is selected, a notification is given to suggest that, so that it is easy for the player to understand that the special role has been selected, and the player can relatively easily perform the special role. Corresponding symbols can be aligned. Therefore, it may not be possible to shift to an advantageous gaming state or it may be delayed. Since the AT inside the BB is in a very advantageous gaming state for the player, the suggestion effect of the suggestion pattern 2 is also an effect that leads the player to an advantageous gaming state. It should be noted that when the suggestion effect of the suggestion pattern 2 is performed, a voice such as "Aim for Red Seven" may be output.

The suggestion effect of the suggestion pattern 1 is basically performed when the BB is won in the state where the AT is not won. Specifically, when the start lever is operated, the sub-control means mainly controls the information (command) of the AT winning flag = 0 and the effect group A number 1 (indicating that the BB winning combination 1 or the BB winning combination 2 has been won). The suggestion effect of the suggestion pattern 1 is performed on the occasion of receiving from the means. The suggestion effect of the suggestion pattern 1 is the BB role 1 with the symbol combination "blue bar / blue bar / red seven" as the corresponding symbol and the BB role 2 with the symbol combination "black bar / black bar / red seven" as the corresponding symbol. It is clear that one of them has won, but it is not clear which one has won. Therefore, by performing the suggestion effect of the suggestion pattern 1, the player is made to think about which of the BB role 1 and the BB role 2 is won, and the corresponding pattern of the person who thinks this is aimed at by pushing. Since it is possible to have a game property, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Further, when the suggestion effect of the suggestion pattern 1 is performed, even a player who is good at pushing the eyes is stochastically unable to establish the BB role, and is transferred to the inside of the BB. Will be. Therefore, the suggestion effect of the suggestion pattern 1 also has a function for adjusting the ball ejection rate when the ball ejection rate differs between the inside of the BB and the operation of the BB.

The suggestion effect of the suggestion pattern 3 and the suggestion effect of the suggestion pattern 4 are basically a predetermined timing after the full rotation stop in the game in which the suggestion effect of the suggestion pattern 1 is performed (for example, the rotation start of the rotation of the next game). Hour). Specifically, after the whole rotation is stopped, the suggestion effect of the suggestion pattern 3 is performed when the sub-control means receives the information of the bonus condition device number 1 (BB combination 1 win) from the main control means, and the bonus is given. The suggestion effect of the suggestion pattern 4 is performed when the sub-control means receives the information of the condition device number 2 (BB combination 2 winning) from the main control means. The suggestion effect of the suggestion patterns 3 and 4 is an effect that shows which of the BB combination 1 and the BB combination 2 is won. Therefore, by performing the suggestion effect of the suggestion patterns 3 and 4, the player can aim at the corresponding symbol of the winning BB role by pushing. The image display device 11 may be used to display the suggestion effect and the design (design combination) as described above.

Further, conventionally, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-135540, some symbol combinations are simplified and described together with the dividend on the panel member provided on the front door of the slot machine. At the same time, on the image display screen, all the symbol combinations for which the payout can be obtained are displayed together with the payout, and the payout (number of game value granted, etc.) when the predetermined symbol combination is stopped and displayed is displayed. Is also commonly done. However, the symbol combination displayed on the panel member of the front door or the image display screen in this way has one type of privilege given to the player when the symbol combination is stopped and displayed on the effective line. Since it is limited to (for example, adding game value), it has been of little interest to players. On the other hand, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the symbol combination drawn on the central panel is used to suggest a symbol combination that the player can aim at by pushing the eyes, so that the symbol displayed at a predetermined position of the gaming machine is displayed. It is possible to raise the player's interest in the combination.

<Rotating body production>
In the present embodiment, the red seven reel effect is performed as the rotating body effect performed during the freeze. The red seven reel production is a rotating cylinder production in which three symbols "red seven" are aligned with the display window W and stopped and displayed. Mainly when the AT enters, specifically, the BB in the state where the AT is won. At the time of winning, the suggestion effect of suggestion pattern 2 was performed, but at the timing of the player's push, the symbol combination of "Red Seven / Red Seven / Red Seven" can be stopped and displayed in the display window W. It is done when it cannot be done. Even when the AT is entered, if the corresponding symbol "blue bar / blue bar / red seven" for BB role 1 and the corresponding symbol "black bar / black bar / red seven" for BB role 2 are stopped and displayed. , Red Seven Reel production is not performed. By performing such a red seven reel effect, even if the symbol "red seven" cannot be aligned by pressing, the symbol "red seven" can be aligned and displayed. Therefore, it is possible to impress the player with the symbol combination of "Red Seven / Red Seven / Red Seven" as a symbol combination that triggers the shift to the game mode 3 and the start of the AT game while the inside of the BB is inside. can. It should be noted that the red seven reel effect is also executed when the next AT is continuously performed after the end of one AT due to the presence of the AT stock.

In addition to the red seven reel production, the gold seven reel production and the gold seven promotion reel production will also be performed. The gold seven reel production is a rotating cylinder effect in which three symbols "gold seven" are aligned in the display window W and stopped and displayed, and the gold seven promotion reel production is a display window W in which three symbols "red seven" are displayed. After aligning the inside and displaying the stop, the reel is rotated again to align the three symbols "Kin Seven" in the display window W and display the stop.

<Display ratio of red sevens>
In the present embodiment, as an opportunity for the symbol combination of "Red Seven / Red Seven / Red Seven" to be stopped and displayed in the display window W, during BB non-operation (during non-RT or RT1), BB combination 1 or BB There are times when the winning combination 2 is won and times when the spinning body effect is performed, and there are times when the small winning combination 40 is won while the BB is in operation. Comparing the BB operation and the BB non-operation, the ratio of displaying the symbol combination of "Red Seven / Red Seven / Red Seven" is higher in the BB non-operation than in the BB operation. In addition, comparing the time when the BB role 1 or BB role 2 is won and the time when the rotating body effect is performed, the symbol combination of "Red Seven / Red Seven / Red Seven" is performed when the rotating body effect is performed. The percentage displayed is high.

The symbol combination of "Red Seven / Red Seven / Red Seven" displayed in the symbol display area DA2 (also referred to as "Red Seven Alignment") is displayed in the display window W while the BB is not operating, and the BB. When it is displayed in the display window W during operation, its function is different. That is, the red seven alignment displayed while the BB is not operating has a function of notifying the start of the AT game, and the red seven alignment displayed while the BB is operating has a small winning combination 40 (one-card combination). It has a function to notify. In the present embodiment, the rate at which the red seven alignment is displayed is higher when the BB is not operating than when the BB is operating, so that the red seven alignment is used as an opportunity to start the AT game (shift to an advantageous state). It is possible to make a strong impression on the player as a combination of symbols. Also, when the player wins the BB role 1 or the BB role 2, the red seven alignment is displayed due to the rotation effect because the player failed to press the red seven alignment. Since the percentage of cases where the game is played is higher, even a player who is not good at pushing the ball can accurately grasp that the AT game is started (current game state), so that the game can be played. Can proceed smoothly.

<Ending production>
In the present embodiment, when the number of staying games in the advantageous section exceeds 1500 or the values of the net increase counter and the correction counter exceed the respective upper limit values, the advantageous section ends. If the advantageous section ends without any warning, the player may be discouraged and the motivation to play may decrease. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the image display device 11 is used to perform an effect (also referred to as an "ending effect") for suggesting the end time of the advantageous section to the player. Such an ending effect is also performed in a conventional gaming machine. For example, in the slot machine described in JP-A-2018-796, predetermined conditions (also referred to as "ending conditions") are set during the advantageous section. When it is established, the ending effect for notifying the end of the advantageous section is executed, and the AT is not extended (added). On the other hand, in the slot machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-126213, when the ending condition is satisfied, the slot machine is added by referring to the dedicated addition table.

The conventional gaming machine is intended to notify the player that the end of the advantageous section is approaching, and has poor playability. Therefore, in the ending effect of the present embodiment, the effect content is configured to change in a plurality of ways according to the progress of the game in the advantageous section, and the player is given a privilege depending on the change method. .. Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested in how the ending effect changes, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Hereinafter, specific examples of the ending effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 37 and 38.

The ending effect 1 shown in FIG. 37 (A) is such that the effect content changes according to the number of advantageous section games (the number of digested games after shifting to the advantageous section), and the privilege is that of the slot machine 1. It is a suggestion of the set value. In the ending effect 1, the image GZ1 is displayed on the image display screen 11a during the period when the number of advantageous section games is 0 to 250. The image GZ1 may be a still image or a moving image (the same applies to the other images GZ2 to GZ10). The display content is not particularly limited, but may be, for example, suggesting that an advantageous section has started or displaying the expected value of the number of game medals won. Next, in the period when the number of advantageous section games is 251 to 500, the image GZ1 is switched to the image GZ2 or the image GZ5 at a predetermined timing (for example, triggered by the winning of a predetermined game combination). The display contents of the image GZ2 and the image GZ5 are different from each other.

Further, in the period when the number of advantageous section games is 251 to 500, the image is switched at a predetermined timing. In this example, when the image GZ2 is displayed, the image GZ2 is switched to the image GZ3 or the image GZ6, and when the image GZ5 is displayed, the image GZ5 is switched to the image GZ6 or the image GZ8. The images GZ3, GZ6, and GZ8 have different display contents. Further, in the period when the number of advantageous section games is 1001 to 1500, the image is switched at a predetermined timing. In this example, when the image GZ3 is displayed, the image GZ3 is switched to the image GZ4 or the image GZ7, and when the image GZ6 is displayed, the image GZ6 is switched to the image GZ7 or the image GZ9. When the image GZ8 is displayed, the image GZ8 is switched to the image GZ9 or the image GZ10.

The content suggested to the player differs depending on whether any of the images GZ4, GZ7, GZ9, and GZ10 is displayed. That is, the image GZ4 indicates that the setting value of the slot machine 1 may be the setting 6 (suggestion of the setting 6), and the image GZ7 may be the setting 3 or the setting 6. (Suggestions of settings 3 and 6) are shown. On the other hand, GZ9 and GZ10 do not suggest set values. How the images are switched is determined at a predetermined timing (for example, at the time of transition to an advantageous section) by the lottery for ending effect 1 shown in FIG. 39 (A). In this lottery, one of the eight image switching flows (also referred to as "image transition") is selected, and the selection probability depends on the setting value of the slot machine 1. It is set to change. For example, the probability that the image transition of GZ1 → GZ2 → GZ3 → GZ4 is selected is 0 in the case of setting 1, 10/256 in the case of setting 3, 32/256 in the case of setting 6, and so on.

The ending effect 2 shown in FIG. 37 (B) is such that the effect content changes according to the value of the correction counter, and the flow and benefits of image switching are as shown in the figure. Further, the image transition in the ending effect 2 is determined by the lottery for the ending effect 2 shown in FIG. 39 (B). The image GZ4 in the ending effect 2 shows that the setting 6 is certain (setting 6 is confirmed), and is more for the player than the image GZ4 (suggested by the setting 6) in the ending effects 1 and 3. It is highly reliable.

The ending effect 3 shown in FIG. 38 (A) is such that the effect content changes according to the number of acquisitions (difference number) in the advantageous section, and the flow and benefits of image switching are as shown in the figure. .. Further, the image transition in the ending effect 2 is determined by the lottery for the ending effect 3 shown in FIG. 39 (C).

The ending effect 4 shown in FIG. 38 (B) is such that the effect content changes according to the given point value in the advantageous section, and the flow and benefits of image switching are as shown in the figure. Further, the image transition in the ending effect 2 is determined by the lottery for the ending effect 4 shown in FIG. 39 (D). The image GZ4 in the ending effect 4 has a content indicating that the setting 6 is certain (setting 6 is confirmed), and is more reliable for the player than the image GZ4 in the ending effects 1 and 3. It has become. In addition, the given point value is some kind of prize different from the game medal, which is given to the player according to the result of the role lottery during the game (may be limited to the bonus game or the AT game). It means the number of benefits (for example, wallpaper data, etc.) granted. Further, the advantageous section may be terminated when the given point value exceeds the upper limit value (for example, 10000).

In the ending effects 1 to 4, the image is switched based on a certain variable (number of advantageous section games and correction counter value) that changes in the advantageous section, but a plurality of variables (for example, the number of advantageous section games). And the correction counter value, the correction counter value and the given point value), the image may be switched. When switching images based on multiple variables, image switching may be performed based on the variable that first reaches the image switching timing, or image switching may be performed with priority given to either variable. You may. For example, when switching images based on two variables, the number of acquisitions and the value of points awarded, the image may be switched with priority given to the number of acquisitions that are more relevant to the payout. Further, the content of the privilege given to the player according to the result of the ending effect is not limited to the setting value suggestion, and can be changed as appropriate.

≪Main control processing≫
Hereinafter, among the control processes performed by the main control means 100 of the slot machine 1, the setting change process, the game progress control process, and the timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIGS. 40 to 68. The variables such as counters and flags used in the following description are briefly described in the variable list of FIG. 24.

<Setting change processing>
First, the basic flow of the setting change device processing will be described with reference to FIG. 40 (A). The setting change device process is executed when the setting is changed, and "0" is saved in all RWMs (addresses that store information about advantageous sections in the RAM 63) that affect the performance related to the instruction function. (Step K1).

<Game progress control processing>
Next, the basic flow of the game progress control process will be described with reference to FIGS. 40 (B) to 67. The game progress control process is a process that is repeatedly executed during the game, and as shown in FIG. 40 (B), first, the game start standby process is performed (step S1). In this game start standby process, as shown in FIG. 40 (C), it is determined whether or not the wait number at all stops is 0 (step S11). Here, if the wait number at all stops is not 0, the wait time corresponding to the wait number at all stops is waited (step S12), the process proceeds to step S13, and if the wait number at all stops is 0, Proceed to step S13 as it is. Then, in step S13, 0 is saved in the wait number at the time of all stops, the waiting process at the start of the game is completed, and the game returns.

After the end of the waiting process at the start of the game, the process proceeds to step S2 in FIG. 40 (B). Here, the operation of the start lever 25 is waited in that state until the operation is accepted, and when the operation is accepted, the internal lottery start process is performed (step S3). In this internal lottery start process, as shown in FIG. 41 (A), an internal lottery is performed (step S21). In this internal lottery, the bonus condition device number and the winning re-game condition device number are determined. After executing the internal lottery, proceed to the group number set process.

In the group number set processing, as shown in FIG. 41 (B), a value corresponding to the bonus condition device number (see FIG. 33 (A)) is saved in the effect group A number (step S31), and the effect group B number is saved. The value corresponding to the winning re-game condition device number (see FIG. 33 (B)) is saved in (step S32). Next, the values corresponding to the effect group A number and the effect group B number (see FIG. 34, the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the condition device group A number (step S33), and the effect group A number and the effect are stored in the condition device group D number. The value corresponding to the group B number is saved (step S34), and the value corresponding to the effect group A number and the effect group B number is stored in the condition device group G number (step S35).

Similarly, the values corresponding to the effect group A number and the effect group B number are stored in the condition device group B number (step S36), and the values corresponding to the effect group A number and the effect group B number are stored in the condition device group C number. Save (step S37), and save the values corresponding to the effect group A number and the effect group B number in the condition device group E number (step S38). Further, the values corresponding to the effect group A number and the effect group B number are stored in the condition device group I number (step S39), and the values corresponding to the effect group A number and the effect group B number are stored in the condition device group F number. (Step S40), the values corresponding to the effect group A number and the effect group B number are stored in the condition device group H number (step S41). Then, the values corresponding to the effect group A number and the effect group B number are stored in the condition device group J number (step S42), and the process proceeds to the section type number management lever process.

In the section type number management lever processing, as shown in FIG. 42, first, it is determined whether or not the section type number is 0 (normal section) (step S51). Here, if the section type number is 0, the process proceeds to step S52, and it is determined whether or not the BB is not operating. Here, if the BB is not operating, it is determined whether or not it is inside the BB (step S53), if it is not inside the BB, the process proceeds to step S55 as it is, and if it is inside the BB, the condition device group. It is determined whether or not the A number is 1, and if the condition device group A number is 1, the process proceeds to step S51. On the other hand, if the BB is operating in the determination of step S52 and if the condition device group A number is not 1 in the determination of step S54, the process does not proceed to step S51 and proceeds to the standby effect processing described later.

In step S51, the advantageous section transition process is performed. In this advantageous section transition process, as shown in FIG. 44 (A), it is determined whether or not the condition device group A number is 0 (step S71), and if it is 0, the advantageous section transition process is terminated as it is. And return. On the other hand, if the condition device group A number is not 0, an advantageous section lottery is performed (step S72), and the lottery result is saved in the section type number (step S73). Next, it is determined whether or not the section type number is 0 (step S74), and if it is 0, the advantageous section transition process is terminated and returned. On the other hand, if the section type number is not 0, the chance mode 1 lottery is performed (step S75), and the lottery result is saved in the chance mode number (step S76). Further, the seven table 1 lottery is performed (step S77), and the lottery result is saved in the seven table number (step S78).

Next, it is determined whether or not the chance mode number is 4 (step S79). Here, if the chance mode number is not 4, the process proceeds to step S83, and the chance game number lottery process is performed. In this chance game number lottery process, as shown in FIG. 44 (B), the chance game number lottery is performed (step S91), the lottery result is stored in the chance game number counter (step S92), and the game is returned. With the return from the chance game number lottery process, the process proceeds to step S84 of FIG. 44 (A), and the chance cycle lottery is performed. Then, the lottery result is saved in the chance cycle counter, the advantageous section transition process is completed, and the process returns.

On the other hand, if the chance mode number is 4 in the determination of step S79, the process proceeds to step S80 and the AT winning process is performed. In this AT winning process, as shown in FIG. 45, 1 is first stored in the AT winning flag (step S101). Next, the AT mode lottery is performed and the lottery result is saved in the AT mode number (step S102), and further, the Seven 1 lottery is performed and the lottery result is saved in the seven number (step S103). Next, a seven number correction process is performed (step S104).

In this seven number correction process, as shown in FIG. 46 (A), first, a correction counter process is performed (step S121). In this correction counter processing, as shown in FIG. 46 (B), 0 is set in the correction counter data (counter that sums the value of the gold seven counter and the value of the seven counter) (step S131), and the seven number is 2. It is determined whether or not there is (step S132). Here, when the seven number is 2, the value of the gold seven counter is set in the correction counter data (step S133), 1 is further added to the correction counter data (step S134), and the process proceeds to step S135. On the other hand, if the seven number is not 2 in the determination of step S132, the process directly proceeds to step S135. In this step S135, the value of the seven counter is added to the correction counter data, and the process proceeds to step S136. In step S136, a value calculated based on each value of the cumulative counter, the correction counter data, and the bell count counter is stored in the correction counter data, and the value is returned from the correction counter processing.

With the return from the correction counter processing, the process proceeds to step S122 of FIG. 46 (A), and it is determined whether or not the value of the correction counter is 1901 or more. Here, if the value of the correction counter is 1901 or more, 1 is saved in the seven number (step S123), and then the seven number correction process is completed and returned. If the value of the correction counter is not 1901 or more, Return as it is. In the arrival flag processing described later, the processing procedure is branched depending on whether or not the value of the correction counter is 2101 or more. On the other hand, in this process, it is determined whether to save 1 in the seven number depending on whether the value of the correction counter is 1901 or more, and the value of the correction counter used for the branch determination (also referred to as "discrimination value"). ) Is different. This is because by storing 1 in the 7 number, it is possible to play AT games at least once next time, so considering that the number of game medals that can be acquired in the future will increase accordingly, the discrimination value is set in the arrival flag processing. It is set less than 2101. In this way, by changing the discrimination value according to the situation, the number of game medals that can be acquired in the future can be managed without being excessively counted.

With the return from the seven number correction process, the process proceeds to step S105 in FIG. 45, and it is determined whether or not the seven number is 1. Here, if the seven number is not 1, the gold seven counter stores 3 (step S106), and then the process proceeds to step S107. If the seven number is 1, the process directly proceeds to step S107. In this step S107, the arrival flag processing is performed.

In this arrival flag processing, as shown in FIG. 46C, first, the correction counter processing is performed (step S141). After the correction counter processing is completed, it is determined whether or not the correction counter is 2101 or more (step S142), and if it is 2101 or more, 1 is saved in the arrival flag (step S143), and the arrival flag processing is terminated. And return. On the other hand, if the correction counter is not 2101 or more, it is determined whether or not the main game state number is 3 (step S144). If it is 3, it returns as it is, and if it is not 3, 0 is saved in the arrival flag. From (step S145), return.

With the return from the arrival flag processing, the process proceeds to step S108 of FIG. 45A, and it is determined whether or not the condition device group A number is 1. Here, when the condition device group A number is 1, the AT winning processing process is terminated and returned as it is. On the other hand, if the condition device group A number is not 1, EX mode 1 lottery is performed (step S109), the lottery result is saved in the EX mode number (step S110), and then the AT winning processing process is terminated. Return.

With the return from the AT winning processing process, the process proceeds to step S81 in FIG. 44 (A), and it is determined whether or not the condition device group A number is 1. Here, if the condition device group A number is not 1, the advantageous section transition is terminated and returned as it is, and if the condition device group A number is 1, AT entry lever processing is performed (step S82).

In this AT rush lever process, as shown in FIG. 47, first, the loop CU rank set process is performed (step S151). In the loop CU rank set processing, as shown in FIG. 48 (A), the seven set counter is added by 1 (step S171), and the value corresponding to the seven table number and the seven set counter is stored in the loop number (step S172). , The CU rank number stores the values corresponding to the seven table number and the seven set counter (step S173), and returns.

With the return from the loop CU rank set processing, the process proceeds to step S152 in FIG. 47, and it is determined whether or not the seven number is 1. Here, if the seven number is 1, the process proceeds to step S154, and the seven loop lottery process is performed. In the seven-loop lottery process, as shown in FIG. 48 (B), a seven-loop lottery is performed (step S181), the lottery result is stored in the seven counter (step S182), and the result is returned. The return from the seven-loop lottery process proceeds to step S155 in FIG. 47, where the arrival flag process is executed and the process proceeds to step S156. On the other hand, if the value of the seven counter is not 0 in the determination of step S153, the process directly proceeds to step S156. If the seven number is not 1 in the determination in step S152, the value of the gold seven counter is subtracted by 1 (step S158), and the gold seven loop lottery correction process is performed (step S159).

In this gold seven loop lottery correction process, as shown in FIG. 48 (C), it is determined whether or not the arrival flag is 0, and if it is not 0, the gold seven loop lottery correction process is terminated and returned. .. On the other hand, when the arrival flag is 0, the correction counter processing is performed (step S192), and after the completion of the correction counter processing, it is determined whether or not the value of the correction counter is smaller than 1900 (step S193). Here, when the value of the correction counter is 1900 or more, the gold seven loop lottery correction process is terminated and returned as it is. On the other hand, when the value of the correction counter is smaller than 1900, a gold seven-loop lottery is performed (step S194), and it is determined whether or not the result is 0 (step S195). Here, if the result of the gold seven-loop lottery is 0, the gold seven-loop lottery correction process is terminated and returned as it is. On the other hand, if the result of the gold seven loop lottery is not 0, 3 is stored in the gold seven counter (step S196), the arrival flag processing is executed (step S197), and then the game returns.

With the return from the gold seven loop lottery correction process, the process proceeds to step S156 of FIG. 47, the additional mode lottery is performed, and the result is saved in the additional mode number (step S157). Next, a correction counter process is performed (step S160), and after the completion of the process, a bell count 1 lottery is performed (step S161), and the result is stored in the bell count counter (step S162). Next, the bell count counter correction process is performed (step S163).

In this bell count counter correction process, as shown in FIG. 49, first, the value of the allowable number of bells calculated based on the difference between the upper limit value (2100) of the correction counter and the current value (the correction counter is the upper limit) is applied to the correction counter. The value of the number of bells allowed before reaching the value) is saved (step S201). Next, it is determined whether or not the arrival flag is 0 (step S202), if it is not 0, the process proceeds to step S203 as it is, and if it is 0, the value of the correction counter is smaller than the value of the bell count counter. Whether or not it is determined (step S206), and if it is small, the process proceeds to step S203. In step S203, 7 is stored in the bell count counter, and after saving, the bell count counter correction process is terminated and the process returns. With the return from the bell count counter correction process, the process proceeds to step S164 of FIG. 47, the arrival flag process is executed there, the lever process at the time of AT entry is completed, and the process returns. With the return from the lever processing at the time of AT entry, the advantageous section transition processing of FIG. 44 is also completed and returned, and the process proceeds to step S56 of FIG. 42, where the lever processing is executed.

In this lever time wait process, as shown in FIG. 50, first, it is determined whether or not the condition device group A number is 1. (Step S211). Here, if the condition device group A number is 1, it is determined whether or not the AT winning flag is 0 (step S212), and if the AT winning flag is 0, 2 is stored in the lever wait number. If it is not 0, 1 is saved in the lever weight number (step S214). Then, after saving, the lever time wait processing is completed and the device returns. On the other hand, if the condition device group A number is not 1 in the determination in step S211 above, the process proceeds to step S215 to determine whether or not the main game state number is smaller than 2. Here, if the main game state number is smaller than 2, the process proceeds to step S217 as it is, and if the main game state number is 2 or more, it is determined whether or not the main game state number is 4 (step S230). If it is 4, the process proceeds to step S217. On the other hand, if the main game state number is not 4, the lever time wait process is terminated and the device returns.

In step S217, it is determined whether or not the AT winning flag is 0, and if it is 0, the lever time wait processing is terminated and returned. On the other hand, if the AT winning flag is not 0, the effect lever weight lottery is performed (step S2189). Then, it is determined whether or not the result is 0 (step S219), and if it is 0, the lever time wait processing is terminated and returned. On the other hand, if the result of the effect lever weight lottery is not 0, the process proceeds to step S213 to store 2 in the lever weight number, and after saving, the lever time wait process is completed and the process returns. The return from the lever time wait processing returns to the section type number management lever processing of FIG. 42, and proceeds to the standby effect processing described later.

On the other hand, if the section type number is not 0 in the determination in step S51 of FIG. 42, 0 is stored in the lever all stop flag (step S57), and it is determined whether or not the condition device group A number is 1. Step S58). Here, if the condition device group A number is 1, 1 is stored in the 1st class BB winning flag (step S59), and if it is not 1, 0 is saved in the 1st class BB winning flag (step S60). ). Then, after saving, it is determined whether or not the winning re-game condition device number is any of 13 to 36 (step S61). Here, if the winning replay condition device number is any one of 13 to 36, the value corresponding to the winning replay condition device number is stored in the instruction number (step S62), and then in step S63 of FIG. 43. If the winning re-game condition device number is not any of 13 to 36, the process directly proceeds to step S63.

In step S63, the main game state number is determined, and if the main game state number is 1, the main game state number 1 lever process is performed according to the main game state number (step S64), and the main game state number is 2. In that case, the main game state number 2 and 5 lever processing is performed (step S65). Further, when the main game state number is 3, the main game state number 3 lever process is performed (step S66), and when the main game state number is 4, the main game state number 4 lever process is performed (step S67), and the main game is performed. When the state number is 5, the main game state number 2 and 5 lever processing is performed (step S68). Then, after executing each lever processing, the process proceeds to step S56 of FIG. 42. On the other hand, when the main game state number is another number, no particular processing is performed and the process proceeds to step S56 as it is.

In the main game state number 1 lever process, as shown in FIG. 51 (A), the chance mode 2 lottery is performed (step S241), and then the chance mode number determination process is performed (step S2421). In this chance mode number determination process, as shown in FIG. 51 (B), it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the chance mode 2 lottery or the chance mode 3 lottery is 0 (step S251). Here, if the lottery result is 0, the chance mode number determination process is terminated and returned as it is, and if the lottery result is not 0, the lottery result is saved in the chance mode number (step S252) and then returned. do.

With the return from the chance mode number determination process, the process proceeds to step S243 of FIG. 51 (A), and it is determined whether or not the chance mode number is 4. Here, if the chance mode number is not 4, the process proceeds to step S247, it is determined whether or not the type 1 BB winning flag is 0, and if it is 0, the main game state number 1 lever processing is terminated as it is. If it is not 0, the chance game number lottery process is performed, and after that, the main game status number 1 lever process is completed and the game returns. On the other hand, if the chance mode number is 4 in the determination of step S242, the process proceeds to step S244 and the AT winning process is performed. After that, it is determined whether or not the 1st class BB winning flag is 0 (step S245), and if it is 0, the main game state number 1 lever processing is terminated and returned, and if it is not 0, it is returned. Lever processing is performed when the AT enters, and then the lever is returned.

In the main game state number 2 and 5 lever processing, as shown in FIG. 51 (C), first, the lever processing is performed after the AT is won (step S261). In this AT winning lever processing, as shown in FIG. 52, first, it is determined whether or not the arrival flag is 0 (step S271). Here, if the arrival flag is not 0, the lever processing is terminated and returned as it is after the AT is won, and if the arrival flag is 0, the process proceeds to step S272, and it is determined whether or not the EX mode number is 1. do. Here, when the EX mode number is 1, the EX mode 2 lottery is performed (step S273), and it is determined whether or not the lottery result is 2 (step S274). Here, if the lottery result is 2, the process proceeds to step S276 after saving 2 in the EX mode number (step S275). On the other hand, if the EX mode number is not 1 in the determination of step S272, the process proceeds directly to step S276, and if the result of the EX mode 2 lottery is not 2 in the determination of step S274, the step S276 is directly from there. Proceed to.

In step S276, it is determined whether or not the seven table number is smaller than 13. Here, if the seven table number is smaller than 13, it is determined whether or not the lottered flag is 0 (step S277), and if it is 0, whether or not the condition device group G number is further 0. (Step S278), and if the condition device group G number is not 0, the process proceeds to step S279. In step S279, the seven table 2 lottery is performed, and it is determined whether or not the lottery result is 0 (step S280). Here, if the result of the Seven Table 2 lottery is 0, the process proceeds to step S282 as it is, and if the result of the Seven Table 2 lottery is not 0, the lottery result is saved in the Seven Table number (step S281). The process proceeds to step S282. In step S282, 1 is saved in the lottery completed flag, and the process proceeds to step S283. On the other hand, if the seven table number is 13 or more in the determination of step S276, the lottery flag is not 0 in the determination of step S277, or the condition device group G number is 0 in the determination of step S278. From there, the process proceeds to step S283.

In step S283, it is determined whether or not the seven number is 1. Here, if the seven number is 1, a seven 2 lottery is performed (step S284), and it is determined whether or not the lottery result is 2 (step S285). Here, if the result of the Seven 2 lottery is 2, the lottery result is saved in the Seven number (step S286), and the Seven number correction process is performed (Step S287). After executing the seven number correction process, it is determined whether or not the seven number is 2 (step S288), and if it is 2, 3 is stored in the gold seven counter (step S289), and the process proceeds to step S290. On the other hand, if the seven number is not 1 in the determination of step S283, the result of the seven 2 lottery is not 2 in the determination of step S285, or the seven number is not 2 in the determination of step S289, respectively, from there. The process proceeds to step S291. In step S291, a seven stock 1 lottery is performed, the lottery result is added to the seven counter, and then the process proceeds to step S290. In this step S290, the arrival flag processing is performed, and then the lever processing is completed after the AT is won and the product returns.

After winning the AT, the return from the lever processing proceeds to step S262 in FIG. 51 (C), and it is determined whether or not the type 1 BB winning flag is 0. Here, if the flag of the first type BB hit is 0, the main game state number 2 and 5 lever processing is terminated and returned, and if it is not 0, the lever processing at the time of AT entry is performed, and then the game state number. The 2nd and 5th lever processing is completed and the product returns.

In the main game state number 3 lever processing, as shown in FIG. 53 (A), first, it is determined whether or not the instruction number is 0 (step S301). Here, if the instruction number is not 0, the value of the bell count counter is subtracted by 1 (step S302), and then the process proceeds to step S303. If the instruction number is 0, the process directly proceeds to step S303. In step S303, it is determined whether or not the arrival flag is 0. Here, if the arrival flag is not 0, the main game state number 3 lever processing is terminated and returned as it is, and if the arrival flag is 0, the Seven Stock 2 lottery is performed (step S304), and the lottery result is obtained. Add to the seven counter (step S306). Next, the arrival flag processing is performed (step S306), and it is determined whether or not the arrival flag is 0 (step S307). Here, if the arrival flag is not 0, the main game state number 3 lever processing is terminated and returned, and if the arrival flag is 0, whether or not the value of the gold seven counter is 1 or 2 is determined. Determination (step S308). Here, if the value of the gold seven counter is not 1 or 2, the main game state number 3 lever processing is terminated and returned, and if the value of the gold seven counter is 1 or 2, the gold seven loop rewriting lottery is performed. Proceed to correction processing.

In the gold seven loop rewriting lottery correction process, as shown in FIG. 53 (B), the correction counter process is first performed (step S311), and then it is determined whether or not the value of the correction counter is smaller than 1900 (step S312). ). Here, if the value of the correction counter is 1900 or more, the gold seven loop rewriting lottery correction process is terminated and returned as it is, and if the value of the correction counter is smaller than 1900, the gold seven loop rewriting lottery is performed (step S313). ), It is determined whether or not the lottery result is 0 (step S314). Here, if the result of the gold seven loop rewriting lottery is 0, the gold seven loop rewriting lottery correction process is terminated and returned as it is, and if it is not 0, 3 is stored in the gold seven counter (step S316). Then, the arrival flag processing is performed (step S316), and then the gold seven loop rewriting lottery correction processing is completed and the product returns. With the return from the gold seven loop rewriting lottery correction process, the main game state number 3 lever process of FIG. 53 (A) is also completed and returns.

In the main game state number 4 lever processing, as shown in FIG. 54 (A), pullback 1 lottery is performed, and it is determined whether or not the lottery result is 0 (step S321). Here, if the result of the pullback 1 lottery is not 0, the AT winning process is performed (step S323), and then it is determined whether or not the type 1 BB winning flag is 0 (step S324). Here, if the type 1 BB winning flag is 0, the main game state number 4 lever processing is terminated and returned, and if the type 1 BB winning flag is not 0, the lever processing at the time of AT entry is performed. After that (step S325), the main game state number 4 lever processing is ended and the player returns. On the other hand, if the result of the pullback 1 lottery is 0 in the determination of step S322, the process proceeds to step S326 to determine whether or not the type 1 BB winning flag is 0. Here, if the 1st class BB winning flag is 0, the main game status number 4 lever processing is terminated and returned, and if the 1st class BB winning flag is not 0, the AT cycle preferential game number lottery process is performed. Proceed to. In this AT cycle preferential game number lottery process, as shown in FIG. 54 (B), the AT cycle preferential game number lottery is performed (step S331), and the lottery result is saved in the AT cycle preferential game number counter (step S332). , AT cycle preferential game number The lottery process is completed and the game returns. With the return from the AT cycle preferential game number lottery process, the main game state number 4 lever process of FIG. 54 (A) is also completed and returns.

Next, the standby effect processing performed after the section type number management lever processing of FIG. 55 will be described. In this standby effect processing, as shown in FIG. 55, first, it is determined whether or not the section type number is 0 (step S341). Here, if the section type number is not 0, it is determined whether or not the main game state number is 3 (step S342), and if the main game state number is 3, the value of the seven set counter is further 1. (Step S344). Here, if the value of the seven set counter is 1, it is determined whether or not the seven table number is smaller than 15 (step S344), if it is smaller than 15, the process proceeds to step S345, and if it is 15 or more, step S347 is performed. Proceed to. In step S347, it is determined whether or not the winning re-game condition device number is either 1 to 12 or 37 to 39, and if it is determined that the device number is not one of them, the process proceeds to step S345, which is one of them. If it is determined, the standby effect processing is terminated and a return is made. On the other hand, if the section type number is 0 in the determination of step S341 and the main game state number is not 3 in the determination of step S342, the process directly proceeds to step S345.

In step S345, it is determined whether or not the lever weight number is 0. Here, if the lever wait number is 0, the process proceeds to step S345, and if the lever wait number is not 0, the process waits for a time corresponding to the lever wait number, and then saves 0 in the lever wait number (). Step S349) and step S346. In step S346, it is determined whether or not the standby effect number is 0. Here, if the standby effect number is 0, the standby effect process ends and returns. On the other hand, if the standby effect number is not 0, the standby effect is executed (step S349), and then the standby effect process ends and returns.

With the return from the end of the standby effect processing, the section type number management lever processing of FIG. 42 is also completed, whereby the internal lottery start processing of FIG. 41 (A) is also completed, and the process proceeds to step S4 of FIG. 41 (B). In this step S4, it is continuously determined whether or not the all-round body has stopped, and if the all-round body has stopped, the game medal is paid out (only when the winning combination is established) (step S5). Further, according to the number of game medals paid out, count management is performed such as updating the display number on the display (not shown) that displays the number of game medals acquired during AT (step S6). After that, the section type number management game end process is performed (step S8).

In this section type number management game end process, as shown in FIG. 56, first, it is determined whether or not the section type number is 0 (step S361). Here, if the section type number is 0, the section type number management game end process is terminated and returned as it is. On the other hand, if the section type number is not 0, 1 is saved in the lever all stop flag (step S362), and cumulative counter processing is performed (step S363). In the cumulative counter processing, as shown in FIG. 57, it is determined whether or not the re-game operation symbol (corresponding symbol of the re-game combination) is displayed (step S381), and if it is displayed, the cumulative counter processing is performed as it is. Finish and return. On the other hand, if the re-game operation symbol is not displayed, the number of game medals paid out (including the case of 0) is added to the cumulative counter value (step S382), and the cumulative canter value is further subtracted by 3. (Step S383), the cumulative counter processing is terminated and the process returns.

With the return from the cumulative counter processing, the process proceeds to step S364 of FIG. 56, and the main game state number is determined. Then, according to the main game state number, if the main game state number is 0, the main game state number 0 is completely stopped (step S365), and if the main game state number is 1, the main game state number 1 is completely stopped. The process is performed (step S366), and if the main game state number is 2, the main game state numbers 2 and 5 are all stopped (step S367). Further, when the main game state number is 3, the main game state number 3 is completely stopped (step S368), and when the main game state number is 4, the main game state number 4 is completely stopped (step S369). When the main game state number is 5, the main game state numbers 2 and 5 are all stopped (step S370). Further, when the main game state number is 6, the main game state number 6 is completely stopped (step S371), and when the main game state number is 7, the main game state number 7 is completely stopped (step S372).

In the main game state number 0 total stop processing, as shown in FIG. 58, first, it is determined whether or not the AT winning flag is 0 (step S391). Here, when the AT winning flag is 0, it is determined whether or not the condition device group A number is 1 (step S392), and when the condition device group A number is 1, BB is not established. Whether or not it is determined (step S392). If the BB is not established, 6 is saved in the main game state number (step S394), the main game state number 0 all stop processing is completed, and the game returns. On the other hand, when the condition device group A number is not 1 in the determination of step S392 and when BB is established in the determination of step S393, 0 is saved in the main game state number (step S396) and the main game state number 0. Finish all stop processing and return. If the AT winning flag is not 0 in the determination in step S391, the process proceeds to step S396, where it is determined whether or not the condition device group A number is 1. Here, if the condition device group A number is not 1, 2 is saved in the main game state number (step S398), and the main game state number 0 all stop processing is completed and returned. On the other hand, when the condition device group A number is 1, the process proceeds to step S397, and the game end process at the time of AT entry is performed.

In this AT entry game end process, as shown in FIG. 59, 0 is saved in the chance mode number (step S401), 0 is saved in the chance game number counter (step S402), and 0 is saved in the chance cycle counter. (Step S403). After that, 0 is saved in the EX mode number (step S404), 0 is saved in the AT cycle counter (step S405), and 0 is saved in the lottery completed flag (step S406). Further, 3 is stored in the main game state number (step S407), and the advantageous section lamp is turned on (step S408).

Next, as shown in FIG. 60, it is determined whether or not three symbols "Red Seven" are stopped and displayed side by side on the upper line in the display window W (step S409), and if the stop is displayed, the step is taken. The process proceeds to S410, and if the stop display is not displayed, the process proceeds to step S412. In step S412, it is determined whether or not three symbols "Red Seven" are lined up and stopped and displayed on the effective line 29 in the display window W. If the stop is displayed, the process proceeds to step S410 and the stop is not displayed. In the case, the process proceeds to step S413. In step S413, it is determined whether or not three symbols "Red Seven" are lined up and stopped and displayed on the lower line in the display window W. If the stop is displayed, the process proceeds to step S410, and if the stop is not displayed, the process proceeds to step S410. Goes to step S414. In step S414, it is determined whether or not three symbols "Red Seven" are lined up and stopped and displayed on the downward-sloping line in the display window W. If the stop is displayed, the process proceeds to step S410 and the stop is not displayed. If so, the process proceeds to step S415. In step S415, it is determined whether or not three symbols "Red Seven" are lined up and stopped and displayed on the upward-sloping line in the display window W. If the stop is displayed, the process proceeds to step S410 and the stop is not displayed. If so, the process proceeds to step S416.

When the process proceeds to step S410 (when three symbols "Red Seven" are stopped and displayed side by side in the display window W), 1 is saved in the wait number at all stops, and 0 is saved in the standby effect number. (Step S411), and the process proceeds to step S418 in FIG. 59. On the other hand, when the process proceeds to step S416 above (when three symbols "Red Seven" are not stopped and displayed side by side in the display window W), 0 is saved in the wait number at all stops, and the standby effect number is further increased. 1 is stored in (step S417), and the process proceeds to step S418 in FIG. 59. In this step S418, it is determined whether or not the seven number is 2. Here, if the seven number is not 2, the game end process at the time of entering AT is terminated and returned, and if the seven number is 2, 2 is added to the standby effect number (step S419), and then AT. At the time of rush, the game end process is completed and the game returns. With the return from the game end processing at the time of AT entry, the main game state number 0 all stop processing in FIG. 58 is also completed and returned.

In the main game state number 1 total stop process, as shown in FIG. 61 (A), the chance game number counter is decremented by 1 (step S431), and the game is a BB operation end game (a game in which the operation of the BB game ends). (Step S432). Here, if it is not a BB operation end game, the game directly proceeds to step S435, and if it is a BB operation end game, 0 is stored in the chance game number counter (step S433), and the chance cycle counter is decremented by 1 (step). S434), the process proceeds to step S435. In step S435, it is determined whether or not the AT winning flag is 0. Here, when the AT winning flag is 0, it is determined whether or not the value of the chance game number counter is 0 (step S436), and when the value of the chance game number counter is 0, the chance cycle is further increased. It is determined whether or not the value of the counter is 0 (step S437). Here, when the value of the chance cycle counter is 0, the chance mode 3 lottery is performed (step S438), and the chance mode number determination process is further performed (step S439).

Next, it is determined whether or not the chance mode number is 4 (step S441). Here, if the chance mode number is not 4, 1 is saved in the advantageous section canter (step S441), the main game state number 1 all stop processing is completed, and the process returns. On the other hand, when the chance mode number is 4, the AT winning process is performed (step S445), then 2 is saved in the main game state number (step S448), and the main game state number 1 total stop process is performed. Finish and return. On the other hand, if the value of the chance game number counter is not 0 in the determination of step S436 and the value of the chance cycle counter is not 0 in the determination of step S437, the process proceeds to step S442 and the flag of the first class BB hit is 0. It is determined whether or not it is. Here, if the type 1 BB winning flag is 0, the main game state number 1 all stop processing is terminated and the game returns. On the other hand, if the type 1 BB winning flag is not 0, it is determined whether or not the type 1 BB operating symbol is hidden (step S443), and if the type 1 BB operating symbol is hidden, the main After saving 6 in the game status number (step S444), if the type 1 BB operation symbol is not hidden, the main game status number 1 all stop processing is completed and the game returns.

If the AT winning flag is not 0 in the determination in step S435, the process proceeds to step S446 to determine whether or not the type 1 BB winning flag is 0. Here, if the 1st class BB winning flag is 0, 2 is saved in the main game state number (step S448), and the main game state number 1 all stop processing is completed and the game returns. On the other hand, if the 1st class BB winning flag is not 0, the game end process at the time of AT entry is performed (step S447), and then the main game state number 1 all stop process is completed and the game returns.

In the main game state numbers 2 and 5 all stop processing, as shown in FIG. 61 (B), it is determined whether or not the 1st class BB winning flag is 0 (step S421), and the 1st class BB winning flag is If it is 0, it is a type 1 BB hit. If the flag is not 0, the game end processing at the time of AT entry is performed (step S422), and then the main game status numbers 2 and 5 all stop processing is completed and the game returns. ..

In the main game state number 3 total stop process, as shown in FIG. 62, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the bell count counter is 0 (step S451). Here, if the value of the bell count counter is not 0, the main game state number 3 all stop processing is terminated and returned, and if the value of the bell count counter is 0, the process proceeds to step S452 and the seven number is changed. It is determined whether or not it is 1. Here, if the seven number is 1, the process proceeds to step S452 to determine whether or not the value of the seven counter is 0, and if the value of the seven counter is 0, the process proceeds to step S454 and the cumulative counter. It is determined whether or not the value of is smaller than 2001. Here, if the value of the cumulative counter is smaller than 2001, it is determined whether or not the value of the arrival flag is 0 (step S455), and if the value of the arrival flag is 0, the AT mode rewriting lottery is performed (step). S456). Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result is 0 (step S457), if the lottery result is 0, the process directly proceeds to step S459, and if the lottery result is not 0, the lottery result is saved in the AT mode number. From (step S458), the process proceeds to step S459.

In step S459, an AT cycle lottery is performed, and the lottery result is stored in the AT cycle counter (step S460). Further, the seven table 1 lottery is performed (step S462), and the lottery result is stored in the seven table number (step S463). Next, the AT cycle preferential game number lottery process is performed (step S464), then 0 is saved in the AT winning flag (step S465), 0 is saved in the seven number (step S466), and 0 is saved in the seven counter. (Step S467). Next, 0 is stored in the gold seven counter (step S468), 0 is stored in the seven set counter (step S469), and 0 is stored in the loop number (step S470). Subsequently, 0 is saved in the CU rank number (step S471), 0 is saved in the arrival flag (step S472), and 0 is saved in the addition mode number (step S473). Further, 0 is stored in the bell count counter (step S474), and 0 is stored in the total acquisition counter (step S475). Then, 7 is saved in the main game state number (step S476), 2 is saved in the wait number at the time of all stops (step S477), and the main game state number 3 all stop process is completed and returned.

On the other hand, if the seven number is not 1 in the determination of step S452 and the seven counter is not 0 in the determination of step S453, the process proceeds to step S481 of FIG. 63, and whether or not the value of the seven set counter is 7. To judge. Here, if the value of the seven set counter is not 7, the process proceeds to step S484 as it is, and if the value of the seven set counter is 7, 15 is saved in the seven table number (step S482), and further 0 is stored in the seven set counter. After saving (step S483), the process proceeds to step S484. In step S484, loop CU rank set processing is performed, and then it is determined whether or not the seven number is 1. (Step S485). Here, if the seven number is not 1, it is determined whether or not the value of the gold seven counter is 0 (step S487), 1 is stored in the seven number (step S488), and then the process proceeds to step S489. On the other hand, when the seven number is 1, the value of the seven counter is subtracted by 1 (step S488), and the process proceeds to step S489.

In step S489, it is determined whether or not the value of the seven counter is 0, and when the value of the seven counter is 0, it is determined whether or not the arrival flag is 0 (step S490). Here, if the arrival flag is 0, the seven-loop lottery process (step S491) and the arrival flag process (step S492) are performed, and then the process proceeds to step S493. On the other hand, if the value of the seven counter is not 0 in the determination of step S489 and the arrival flag is not 0 in the determination of step S490, the process proceeds to step S493 as it is. If the value of the gold seven counter is not 0 in the determination of step S487, the process proceeds to step S495 to determine whether or not the value of the gold seven counter is 3. Here, if the value of the gold seven counter is not 3, the process proceeds to step S497 as it is, and if the value of the gold seven counter is 3, 3 is stored in the standby effect number (step S496), and then the process proceeds to step S497. In step S497, the value of the gold seven counter is subtracted by 1, further the gold seven loop lottery process is executed (step S498), and then the process proceeds to step S493.

In step S493, an additional mode lottery is performed, and the lottery result is saved in the additional mode number (step S494). After that, the process proceeds to step S501 in FIG. 64 to perform correction counter processing. Next, a lottery for switching the number of bells is performed (step S502), and it is determined whether or not the lottery result is 0 (step S503). Here, if the result of the bell number switching lottery is 0, the bell number 2 lottery is performed (step S504), the lottery result is saved in the bell number counter (step S505), and then the process proceeds to step S508 to proceed to the bell number of times. If the result of the switching lottery is not 0, the number of bells is 3 lottery (step S506), the lottery result is saved in the bell number counter (step S507), and then the process proceeds to step S508.

In step S508, the bell count counter correction process is performed, and then the arrival flag process is performed (step S509). Next, 3 is stored in the lever wait number (step S510), and it is determined whether or not the standby effect number is 0 (step S511). Here, when the standby effect number is 0, 1 is saved in the standby effect number (step S512), and the process proceeds to step S477 in FIG. 62. On the other hand, if the standby effect number is not 0, the process proceeds to step S477 as it is. Then, 2 is saved in the wait number at the time of all stops, and the main game state number 3 all stops processing is completed and returned.

In the main game state number 4 total stop process, as shown in FIG. 65, the value of the AT cycle preferential game number canter is subtracted by 1 (step S521), and it is determined whether or not the game is a BB operation end game (step S521). Step S522). Here, if the game is not a BB operation end game, the process proceeds to step S525 as it is, and if the game is a BB operation end game, 0 is stored in the AT cycle preferential game number counter (step S523), and the AT cycle is further reached. After subtracting 1 from the counter value (step S524), the process proceeds to step S525. In step S525, it is determined whether or not the AT winning flag is 0. Here, when the AT winning flag is 0, it is determined whether or not the value of the AT cycle counter is 0 (step S526), and when the value of the AT cycle counter is also 0, pullback 2 lottery is performed (step S526). Step S527). Then, it is determined whether or not the lottery result is 0 (step S528), and when the lottery result is 0, 1 is saved in the advantageous section clear counter (step S529), and the main game state number 4 all stop processing is performed. Finish and return.

On the other hand, if the value of the AT cycle counter is not 0 in the determination of step S526, the process proceeds to step S534 to determine whether or not the type 1 BB winning flag is 0. Here, when the 1st class BB winning flag is 0, the main game state number 4 all stop processing is terminated and the game returns. On the other hand, if the type 1 BB winning flag is not 0, the process proceeds to step S535, and it is determined whether or not the BB is not established. Then, when the BB is not established, the main game status number 4 complete stop processing is terminated and returned, and when the BB is established, 7 is saved in the main game status number (step S536), and then the main game status number is reached. 4 Finish all stop processing and return.

If the AT winning flag is not 0 in the determination of step S525, the process proceeds to step S531 to determine whether or not the type 1 BB winning flag is 0. Here, if the type 1 BB winning flag is not 0, the process proceeds to step S532, the game end process at the time of AT entry is performed, the main game state number 4 all stop process is completed, and the game returns. On the other hand, when the 1st class BB winning flag is 0, the process proceeds to step S533, 5 is stored in the main game status number, and then the main game status number 4 all stop processing is completed and the game returns. Further, if the result of the pullback 2 lottery is not 0 in the determination of step S528, the process proceeds to step S530 to perform the AT winning process, and then 5 is saved in the main game status number (step S533), and then the main. Game status number 4 Finishes all stop processing and returns.

In the main game state number 6 total stop process, as shown in FIG. 66 (A), it is determined whether or not BB is established (step S541). If the BB is not established, the main game status number 6 is completely stopped and returned. If the BB is established, 1 is saved in the main game status number (step S542), and then the main game status number is displayed. 6 Finish all stop processing and return.

In the main game state number 7 total stop process, as shown in FIG. 66 (B), it is determined whether or not BB is established (step S551). If the BB is not established, the main game status number 7 is completely stopped and returned. If the BB is established, 4 is saved in the main game status number (step S552), and then the main game status number is displayed. 6 Finish all stop processing and return.

After the execution of each stop processing of the main game state numbers 0 to 7, the process proceeds to step S373 of FIG. Here, 0 is saved in the instruction number, the section type number management game end process is completed, and the game returns. With the return from the section type number management game end process, the process proceeds to step S8 in FIG. 40 (B), and the advantageous section clear counter management process is performed.

In the advantageous section clear counter management process, as shown in FIG. 67, the value of the advantageous section clear counter is subtracted by 1 (step S561), and it is determined whether or not the value of the advantageous section clear counter is 0 from before this subtraction. (Step S562). Here, if the value of the advantageous section clear counter is not 0 before this subtraction, the process proceeds to step S565, and it is determined whether or not the value of the advantageous section clear counter is 0 as a result of this subtraction. Here, if the value of the advantageous section clear counter becomes 0 as a result of this subtraction, the process proceeds to step S566 as it is. On the other hand, if the value of the advantageous section clear counter is not 0 even after this subtraction, the process proceeds to step S567, and it is determined whether or not the re-game operation symbol is displayed in the game. Then, if the re-game operation symbol is displayed in the game, the process proceeds to step S569 as it is, and if it is not displayed, the value obtained by subtracting the bet number from the payout number of the game medals in the game is added to the net increase counter. From (step S568), the process proceeds to step S569.

In step S569, it is determined whether or not the value of the net increase counter is 2401 or more, and if the value of the net increase counter is less than 2401, the process proceeds to step S566, and if it is 2401 or more, the advantageous section clear counter management process is terminated as it is. And return. In step S566, 0 is stored in all the storage areas for storing the data values affecting the performance related to the instruction function, and the process proceeds to step S563. On the other hand, if the value of the advantageous section clear counter is 0 from before the subtraction in the determination of step S562, the process proceeds to step S563 as it is. In step S563, it is determined whether or not the section type number is 0, and when the section type number is 0, the advantageous section clear counter management process is terminated and returned. On the other hand, when the section type number is not 0, 1500 is stored in the advantageous section clear counter (step S564), and then the advantageous section clear counter management process is terminated and returned.

<Timer interrupt processing>
Next, the timer interrupt process will be described. In the present embodiment, processing such as reading of each game operation signal output in response to a game operation such as a bet operation performed by the player, detection (confirmation) of the signal level, transmission of each control command, reel drive control, and the like. Is performed by a timer interrupt process that is executed every predetermined fixed time (for example, 2.235 milliseconds). In this timer interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 68, first, interrupt initial processing (register save, interrupt prohibition, etc.) is performed (step MT11), and then it is determined whether or not a power failure is detected. (Step MT12). Here, if the power cutoff is detected, the power cutoff process is performed (step MT25). In the power cutoff process, registers are saved, stack pointers are saved, interrupt states are saved, and the like. In addition, information on the combination determination result and information on the game state (including information on the AT) stored in the predetermined storage area are retained, and processing such as checksum calculation and storage is also performed.

On the other hand, if the power failure is not detected, the interrupt counter value is updated (subtracted by "1") (step MT13), and the timer is further measured (step MT14). This timer measurement performs subtraction, addition processing, and the like of the timer value of any timer set in the above-mentioned game progress control processing. Next, the input port is read (step MT15). In reading the input port, the signal level of each game operation signal input to the input port is read and stored, and the signal level is determined.

Next, a reel drive control process for controlling the drive of the reels 3a to 3c (acceleration of rotation, deceleration, maintenance of constant speed, maintenance of stop, etc.) is performed (step MT16). In this reel drive control process, a reel drive pulse output indicating the timing of switching the output phase (excitation phase) of the stepping motor according to the reel drive state (stop, reel rotation standby, acceleration, constant speed, deceleration, etc.) Processing such as updating the counter value and acquiring, updating, and outputting the reel drive pulse data for driving the stepping motor is performed. In the next step MT17, it is determined whether or not the reel drive control process has been executed for all reels, and if not, the process returns to step MT16 and the reel drive control process is performed again. On the other hand, when executed on all reels, a port output process for exciting output of the reel, hopper, blocker, etc. is performed (step MT18), and a control command stored in the control command buffer (CB) is transmitted. Command transmission processing is performed (step MT19).

Next, the process proceeds to step MT20, the outer end signal (external signal) data stored in the predetermined storage area is read out, and the outer end signal is output. Next, an LED display is performed so that the above-mentioned display lamp executes a predetermined display (step MT21). In this LED display, for example, the payout number display lamp 46j executes the following display. That is, if no error (excluding E-type error) has occurred, the number of payouts "0 to 9" is displayed based on the number of game medals paid out, or the numerical value "1 to 6" is displayed based on the set value. Display it. Further, when the push order is notified, the display mode "= 1" to "= 6" of the instruction number is displayed. If an error (excluding an E-type error) has occurred, an error display is executed based on the value of the error number.

Next, the process proceeds to step MT22 to perform error management. In this error management, first, an error check is performed. In this error check, it is determined whether or not an H0 error has occurred, whether or not a CE error has occurred, whether or not a CP error has occurred, whether or not a CH error has occurred, and C0. Judgment of whether or not an error has occurred, judgment of whether or not a C1 error has occurred, judgment of whether or not an E6 error has occurred, judgment of whether or not an E7 error has occurred, and further, E6 error or When an E7 error occurs, an error is displayed on the payout number display lamp 46j, and processing such as stopping the execution of the game is performed. If an E-type error occurs, the error can be recovered if the above-mentioned setting change processing is executed. After this error check, if an error occurs, the output request set at the time of error detection for transmitting the error information to the sub-control means 200 is processed. After executing this error management process, a process of updating a random number used for winning combination determination (step MT23) is performed, an interrupt return process (register return, interrupt permission, etc.) is performed (step MT24), and an interrupt return is performed. do.

Although the first embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment and can be appropriately modified. For example, in the correction counter of the first embodiment, the first threshold value and the second threshold value (first threshold value <second threshold value) are set, and the correction counter value exceeds the first threshold value, but the second threshold value is exceeded. The next AT is started when one AT ends when the correction counter value exceeds the second threshold value, rather than when one AT ends when the threshold value of is not exceeded. It may be set so that the probability that the number of games to be digested will increase by the time it is reached increases. As a result, it is possible to create a wave of changes in the number of balls (the number of game medals acquired) within the range of 2400, which is the upper limit of the end of one advantageous section, and suppress the excessive acquisition of game medals. It becomes possible.

In the first embodiment described above, the image transition (switching) in the ending effect follows a flow (branch) of a specific image transition pattern corresponding to a change in a predetermined variable (for example, the number of game medals acquired). It is supposed to be done. On the other hand, there are a plurality of image transition patterns corresponding to changes in one variable (for example, the number of advantageous section games) and image transition patterns corresponding to changes in another variable (for example, the number of game medals won). A plurality of image transition patterns corresponding to changes in each of the variables may be prepared, and the branching mode of the image transition pattern to be executed may be significantly changed according to the changes in each variable. This makes it possible to diversify the image transition pattern in the ending effect.

In the above-mentioned first embodiment, by performing the suggestion effect using the design lighting lamp controlled by the sub-control means side in the symbol display area DA1, a predetermined symbol combination (“Red Seven, Red Seven,” is performed in the advantageous section. "Red Seven" etc.) is informed to the players to align. On the other hand, for example, a predetermined display is performed on a display controlled by the main control means such as a main side push order display (payout number display lamp 46j) so that the player can align the predetermined symbol combination. It may be notified. As a result, even if the sub-control means side cannot perform the suggestion effect due to the occurrence of a malfunction such as a failure, it is possible to secure an opportunity for the player to arrange a predetermined combination of symbols, so that the player can play with peace of mind. Can be done.

[Second Embodiment]
Hereinafter, the slot machine according to the second embodiment (hereinafter, also referred to as “the slot machine of the second embodiment”) will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 to 73. Hereinafter, the characteristic portions of the slot machine of the second form will be mainly described. The feature portion described below is not limited to the slot machine of the second embodiment, and can be similarly applied to other embodiments. The slot machine of the second embodiment has the same or similar basic configuration as the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment described above, and the description thereof will be omitted. Further, each control process such as the combination determination process and the reel control process described in the slot machine 1 can be similarly applied to the slot machine of the second form or by partially changing the process contents.

≪Stop switch unit≫
As shown in FIG. 69, the slot machine of the second form includes a stop switch unit 500. The stop switch unit 500 includes three stop switches 510, 520, 530 and a stop switch panel 540. The stop switch 510 includes a front view circular stop switch cover 512 and a stop switch lamp 514 (not shown) including an LED or the like built in the stop switch 510. The stop switch lamp 514 is configured to be capable of lighting by changing the lighting mode or the lighting color (the color visually recognized through the stop switch cover 512) according to the game state, the progress of the game, and the like. The stop switch cover 512 is configured to be press-operable by the player. Further, the stop switch cover 512 is made of a translucent material, and is configured so that the lighting mode and lighting color of the stop switch lamp 514 can be visually recognized by a player, a game clerk, or the like.

The stop switches 520 and 530 are configured in the same manner as the stop switches 510. That is, the stop switch 520 is configured to have a stop switch cover 522 and a stop switch lamp 524, and the stop switch 530 is configured to have a stop switch cover 532 and a stop switch lamp 534. The stop switches 510, 520, and 530 have the same functions as the stop switches 26a, 26b, and 26c in the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment. That is, the stop switch 510 is operated when the left reel is stopped, the stop switch 520 is operated when the middle reel is stopped, and the stop switch 530 is operated when the right reel is stopped. The lighting of the stop switch lamps 514, 524, 534 is controlled by the sub control means (sub control board), but may be controlled by the main control means (main control board).

The stop switch panel 540 is composed of a plate-shaped member having a circular opening in a portion corresponding to the stop switches 510, 520, 530, and is a front portion of the stop switch unit 500 (a region around each stop switch 510, 520, 530). ) Is placed so as to cover it. The stop switch panel 540 is made of, for example, a non-translucent or less translucent material and is given a predetermined color (eg, purple but may be another color). The stop switch panel 540 may be made of a translucent material, and a lamp (also referred to as a “panel lamp”) that lights up visibly through the stop switch panel 540 may be arranged on the back side thereof.

As described above, the stop switch lamps 514, 524, 534 can be turned on by changing the lighting mode or the lighting color according to the game state, the progress of the game, and the like. Conventionally, when a game is played in an abnormal state different from the usual one, for example, as in the slot machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-8873, a specific display (for example, a bet button lamp) is changed from the normal one. There was one that lights up with different lighting colors to notify that it is in an abnormal state, but in this embodiment, the stop switch is used when the slot machine of the second mode is in the normal state and when it is in the abnormal state. The lamps 514, 524, 534 are configured to have different lighting modes and lighting colors.

It should be noted that the abnormal state indicated by the stop switch lamps 514, 524, 534 is not an error state in which the game cannot proceed normally, but rather a predetermined state (for example, a game) in which the game can be played. It refers to the state that is not set to the state of the optimum or most advantageous set value in performing the above, the state in which the probability of giving the game value is the highest in the design, etc.). On the other hand, the normal state refers to a state in which the game is set to a predetermined state and the game can proceed as usual.

For example, in a game store, a set value or a game state may be set to be a predetermined state, but it may not be set to a predetermined state due to forgetting to set or the like. Therefore, it is preferable to be able to notify the game clerk whether or not the state is abnormal, such as not being set to a predetermined state, but in the case of the slot machine described in the above-mentioned Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-8783, the abnormality is found. It is difficult to understand that the lighting is for notifying that the state is in the state, and there is a possibility that reliable notification cannot be performed. On the other hand, since the game can be normally performed even in such an abnormal state, there is little need to notify the player that the abnormal state is present.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the lighting mode of the stop switch lamps 514, 524, 534 is changed depending on whether the state is normal or abnormal, and the game clerk determines whether or not the stop switch lamp is abnormal. It is easy to understand and is not noticed by the player (does not feel uncomfortable).

≪Lighting mode and lighting color of stop switch lamp≫
70 to 73 show examples of changes in each lighting pattern (lighting mode and lighting color) of the stop switch lamps 514, 524, 534, and these will be described in order below. In FIGS. 70 to 73, the left stop switch, the middle stop switch, and the right stop switch refer to the stop switches 510, 520, and 530, respectively. Further, in FIGS. 70 to 73, the left stop switch lamp, the middle stop switch lamp, and the right stop switch lamp refer to the stop switch lamps 514, 524, 534, respectively.

FIG. 70 shows an example of the transition of the lighting pattern in the normal state 1. The normal state 1 is a gaming state inside and during non-AT, and refers to a state when the push order combination is won. The internal gaming state refers to a gaming state in which the winning of a special role is carried over as in the gaming state inside the BB described in the first embodiment, for example, the gaming mode 7 in the first embodiment corresponds to this. do. Since the normal state 1 is in non-AT, the push order notification (push navigation) is not performed even if the push order combination is won. Here, it is assumed that each stop switch is operated in the order of the left stop switch, the middle stop switch, and the right stop switch.

In the transition example of the lighting pattern in the normal state 1 of FIG. 70, the left stop switch lamp is in the middle until the start lever is operated and all the reels rotate at a constant speed (the time when the operation of each stop switch becomes acceptable). Both the stop switch lamp and the right stop switch lamp light up in red. Then, when all the reels rotate at a constant speed, the left stop switch lamp, the middle stop switch lamp, and the right stop switch lamp all switch from red lighting to blue lighting from that point. After that, when the operation of the left stop switch is accepted, the left stop switch lamp switches from blue lighting to red lighting from that point (when the left stop switch is switched from OFF to ON).

Next, when the operation of the middle stop switch is accepted, the middle stop switch lamp switches from blue lighting to red lighting from that time (when the middle stop switch is switched from OFF to ON). Finally, when the operation of the right stop switch is accepted, the right stop switch lamp switches from blue lighting to red lighting from that point (when the right stop switch is switched from OFF to ON). Here, the case where the left stop switch, the middle stop switch, and the right stop switch are operated in this order is taken as an example, but the method of switching the lighting pattern when operated in another operation order is also based on this example. Become.

FIG. 71 shows an example of the transition of the lighting pattern in the normal state 2. The normal state 2 is a game state inside and during AT, and refers to a state when the push order combination is won. Since the normal state 1 is in AT, when the push order combination is won, the push order notification (push navigation) is performed. Here, it is assumed that the pressing order of "left, middle, right" is notified, and each stop switch is operated according to the notified pressing order.

In the transition example of the lighting pattern in the normal state 2 of FIG. 71, the left stop switch lamp, the middle stop switch lamp, and the right are the same as in the normal state 1 until the start lever is operated and all the reels rotate at a constant speed. All stop switch lamps light up in red. Then, when all the reels rotate at a constant speed, the left stop switch lamp switches from red lighting to white blinking, and the middle stop switch lamp and the right stop switch lamp both switch from red lighting to white lighting. By blinking the left stop switch lamp in white, the player can be prompted to operate the left stop switch. After that, when the operation of the left stop switch is accepted, the left stop switch lamp switches from blinking white to extinguishing, and the middle stop switch lamp switches from lighting red to blinking white. By blinking the middle stop switch lamp in white, the player can be urged to operate the middle stop switch.

Then, when the operation of the middle stop switch is accepted, the middle stop switch lamp is switched from blinking white to off, and the right stop switch lamp is switched from lighting white to blinking white. By blinking the right stop switch lamp in white, the player can be prompted to operate the right stop switch. Finally, when the operation of the right stop switch is accepted, the right stop switch lamp switches from blinking white to lit red, and the left stop switch lamp and the middle stop switch lamp both switch from extinguished to lit red. Here, the push order of "left, middle, right" is notified, and the case where each stop switch is operated according to the notified push order is taken as an example, but other push orders are notified and notified. Therefore, the method of switching the lighting pattern when each stop switch is operated is also in accordance with this example.

FIG. 72 shows an example of the transition of the lighting pattern in the abnormal state 1. The abnormal state 1 is a gaming state in the non-internal and non-AT state, and refers to a state when the push order combination is won. The non-internal gaming state refers to a gaming state in which the winning of a special role has not been carried over, a gaming state in which a special role has not been won, or a gaming state in which a bonus game is performed due to the establishment of a special role. For example, the gaming mode in the first embodiment. 4 corresponds to this. The reason why the abnormal state 1 is set to the abnormal state is, for example, that the game state that should have been set to the internal gaming state is set to the non-internal gaming state. Since the abnormal state 1 is in non-AT, the push order notification (push navigation) is not performed even if the push order combination is won. Here, it is assumed that each stop switch is operated in the order of the left stop switch lamp, the middle stop switch lamp, and the right stop switch lamp.

In the transition example of the lighting pattern in the abnormal state 1 of FIG. 72, the left stop switch lamp, the middle stop switch lamp, and the right stop switch lamp are lit in red until the start lever is operated and all the reels rotate at a constant speed. All are turned off. Then, when all the reels rotate at a constant speed, the left stop switch lamp, the middle stop switch lamp, and the right stop switch lamp all switch from off to blue on from that point. After that, when the operation of the left stop switch is accepted, the left stop switch lamp switches from turning blue to turning off instead of turning red.

Then, when the operation of the middle stop switch is accepted, the middle stop switch lamp is switched from lighting in blue to turning off from that point. Finally, when the operation of the right stop switch is accepted, the right stop switch lamp switches from turning blue to turning off from that point. Here, the case where the left stop switch, the middle stop switch, and the right stop switch are operated in this order is taken as an example, but the method of switching the lighting pattern when operated in another operation order is also based on this example. Become.

In the abnormal state 1, the lighting pattern is switched in this way. The switching method of the lighting pattern is different from the switching method of the lighting pattern in the normal state 1 and the normal state 2. However, a game clerk who is familiar with how to switch the lighting pattern in the abnormal state 1 can easily recognize (identify) such a switching, but a player who is not familiar with it can easily recognize (identify) the switching. Difficult to recognize. In addition, it is unlikely that a sense of incongruity will occur even when looking at how the lighting pattern is switched in the abnormal state 1. This is because, for example, the lighting pattern (lighting color) of the stop switch when the operation can be accepted is common between the normal state 1 and the abnormal state 1 (both are lit in blue). Is a factor. By setting the switching method of the lighting pattern in the abnormal state 1 as described above, it is possible to notify the game store clerk of the abnormal state 1 so as to be easy to understand and difficult for the player to notice.

FIG. 73 shows an example of the transition of the lighting pattern in the abnormal state 2. The abnormal state 2 is a gaming state during non-AT, and refers to a state when the push order combination is won and the setting needs to be changed. It does not matter whether it is inside or outside. The reason why the abnormal state 2 is regarded as an abnormal state is that, for example, a setting value that should have been set to a predetermined setting value is set to another setting value. Since the abnormal state 2 is in non-AT, the push order notification (push navigation) is not performed even if the push order combination is won. Here, it is assumed that each stop switch is operated in the order of the left stop switch lamp, the middle stop switch lamp, and the right stop switch lamp.

In the transition example of the lighting pattern in the abnormal state 2 of FIG. 73, the left stop switch lamp, the middle stop switch lamp, and the right stop switch lamp are all light blue until the start lever is operated and all the reels rotate at a constant speed. Light. Then, when all the reels rotate at a constant speed, the left stop switch lamp, the middle stop switch lamp, and the right stop switch lamp all switch from light blue lighting to blue lighting from that point. After that, when the operation of the left stop switch is accepted, the left stop switch lamp switches from blue lighting to light blue lighting from that point.

Then, when the operation of the middle stop switch is accepted, the middle stop switch lamp switches from blue lighting to light blue lighting from that point. Finally, when the operation of the right stop switch is accepted, the right stop switch lamp switches from blue lighting to light blue lighting from that point. Here, the case where the left stop switch, the middle stop switch, and the right stop switch are operated in this order is taken as an example, but the method of switching the lighting pattern when operated in another operation order is also based on this example. Become.

In the abnormal state 2, the lighting pattern is switched in this way. The method of switching the lighting pattern is different from the method of switching the lighting pattern in the normal state 1 and the abnormal state 1. However, a game clerk who is familiar with how to switch the lighting pattern in the abnormal state 2 can easily recognize (identify) such a switching, but a player who is not familiar with it can easily recognize (identify) the switching. Difficult to recognize. In addition, it is unlikely that a sense of incongruity will occur even when looking at how the lighting pattern is switched in the abnormal state 2. This means that, for example, the lighting pattern (lighting color) of the stop switch when the operation can be accepted is common to the normal state 1, the abnormal state 1, and the abnormal state 2. (Both are lit in blue) is a factor. By setting the switching method of the lighting pattern in the abnormal state 2 as described above, it is possible to notify the game store clerk of the abnormal state 2 so as to be easy to understand and difficult for the player to notice.

As described above, the stop switch panel 540 is given a predetermined color. In the present embodiment, the color applied to the stop switch panel 540 includes a lighting color used in the stop switch lamp (a color visually recognized through the stop switch cover 512 and a color when the stop switch lamp is directly visually recognized). In the above example, the color is different from the same or similar color (for example, black) as red, blue, white, and light blue. This prevents the color of the stop switch panel 540 from obstructing the visibility of the lighting color of the stop switch lamp, and makes it possible to visually recognize the lighting color of the stop switch lamp satisfactorily. Further, when the stop switch panel 540 is made of a translucent material and the panel lamp is arranged on the back side thereof, the lighting color of the panel lamp (the color visually recognized through the stop switch panel 540) is each stop. It is preferable to use a color different from the same or similar lighting color used in the switch lamp. This prevents the lighting color of the panel lamp from obstructing the visibility of the lighting color of the stop switch lamp, and makes it possible to visually recognize the lighting color of the stop switch lamp satisfactorily.

In the present embodiment, the stop switch lamp is used to notify whether the state is normal or abnormal, but another lighting device may be used to notify. For example, a decorative lighting device arranged in the frame or panel of the front door may be used as a lighting device for abnormal status notification, or a dedicated lighting device for abnormal status notification may be separately provided. You may.

[Third Embodiment]
Hereinafter, the slot machine according to the third embodiment (hereinafter, also referred to as “slot machine of the third embodiment”) will be described with reference to FIGS. 74 to 77. Hereinafter, the characteristic portions of the slot machine of the third form will be mainly described. The feature portion described below is not limited to the slot machine of the third embodiment, and can be similarly applied to other embodiments. The slot machine of the third embodiment has the same or similar basic configuration as the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment described above, and the description thereof will be omitted. Further, each control process such as the combination determination process and the reel control process described in the slot machine 1 can be similarly applied to the slot machine of the third form or by partially changing the process contents. The feature configuration in the slot machine of the second form described above can also be applied to the slot machine of the third form in the same manner or with some changes in the contents.

≪AT notification display≫
As shown in FIG. 74, the slot machine of the third form includes an AT notification display 600. The AT notification display 600 includes three 7-segment displays 611, 612, 613 capable of displaying single-digit numbers, alphabetic characters, and the like. As shown in FIG. 74 (B), the 7-segment display 611, 612, 613 has seven segment LEDs (referred to as A segment LED to G segment LED) and one dot (decimal point) capable of displaying. It is configured to have a segment LED (here, it is referred to as an H segment LED, but may also be referred to as a DP segment LED) (a 7-segment display having such a configuration is also referred to as an 8-segment display). .. As shown in FIG. 74 (C), the A-segment LED to the H-segment LED are in a lit state (indicated by black in the figure), a blinking state (indicated by diagonal lines in the figure), and an extinguished state (indicated by white in the figure). It is configured to be able to switch between.

The AT notification display 600 is arranged in a predetermined area on the front surface of the slot machine of the third embodiment (for example, an area corresponding to the symbol display area DA1 and the symbol display area DA2 in the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment) (for example, the area corresponding to the symbol display area DA1 and the symbol display area DA2). The placement location may be changed as appropriate). The AT notification display 600 displays the push navigation (push order) and the number of remaining AT payouts in the game state during AT (for example, the game mode 3 described in the first embodiment corresponds to). It is configured so that it can be performed while switching according to the progress of. The number of AT remaining payouts refers to the number of game values (game medals) that can be granted during the remaining AT period (from the current time during AT until the end of one or a series of ATs). The 600 is controlled by the sub control means (sub control board), but may be controlled by the main control means (main control board).

The push navigation notification by the AT notification display 600 is displayed on the 7-segment display 611, 612, 613, respectively, in the push order numerical value corresponding to the left reel, the middle reel, and the right reel (any numerical value of 1 to 3). Is done by displaying. For example, when notifying the pressing order of "middle right left", "2" is displayed on the 7-segment display 611, "1" is displayed on the 7-segment display, and "3" is displayed on the 7-segment display 613, and "middle right" is displayed. When notifying the pressing order of "left", "3" is displayed on the 7-segment display 611, "2" is displayed on the 7-segment display 612, and "1" is displayed on the 7-segment display 613.

On the other hand, the notification of the number of remaining AT payouts by the AT notification display 600 displays the hundreds digit on the left 7-segment display 611 and the tens digit on the central 7-segment display 612. This is done by displaying the ones digit on the 7-segment display 613 on the right side. For example, when notifying "258" as the number of remaining AT payouts, "2" is displayed on the 7-segment display 611, "5" is displayed on the 7-segment display, and "8" is displayed on the 7-segment display 613, and "37" is displayed. When the 7-segment display 611 is turned off and nothing is displayed, "3" is displayed on the 7-segment display 612 and "7" is displayed on the 7-segment display 613.

<< Example of information display switching in AT notification display >>
With reference to FIGS. 75 and 76, how the display of the push order and the display of the number of remaining AT payouts on the AT notification display 600 are switched according to the progress of the game during the AT game state is performed. explain. FIG. 75 shows an example of the flow of the progress of one game in the AT game state and the operation content of the AT notification display 600 according to the progress status, and FIG. 76 shows the AT notification according to the progress status of the game. An example of the display content of the display 600 is shown. The "lever", "first stop", "second stop", "third stop" and "payout" shown on the left side of these figures indicate each time point of progress in one game. There is. The "lever" is the timing when the operation of the start lever is accepted, and the "first stop" is the timing when the stop operation (first stop operation) for any one of the three rotating reels is accepted. Shows. Similarly, the "second stop" indicates the timing at which the stop operation (second stop operation) for any one of the remaining two reels during rotation is accepted, and the "third stop" is rotating. Indicates the timing at which the stop operation (third stop operation) for the remaining one reel of is accepted. Further, the “payout” indicates the timing at which the granting of the game value (game medal) is started. Hereinafter, the 7-segment display 611, 612, 613 will also be referred to as a left 7-segment display, a middle 7-segment display, and a right 7-segment display, respectively.

As shown in step SL1 of FIG. 75, when the operation of the start lever is accepted, the value of the remaining AT payout number (here, 400 sheets) is displayed on the AT notification display. Here, since the number of remaining AT payouts is 400, as shown in (A1) of FIG. 76, the AT notification display is "400" (the left 7-segment display is "4", and the middle 7-segment display is "0". , "0") is lit up on the right 7-segment display. Next, in step SL2 of FIG. 75, the push order navigation is generated by winning the push order combination. As a result, in step SL3, the display on the AT notification display is switched from the AT remaining payout number "400" to the lever-triggered push navigation (push navigation from the first stop operation to the third stop operation) and displayed. .. Here, the push navigation of the lever trigger is set to "left middle right". Since the push navigation is "left middle right", as shown in (A2) of FIG. 76, "123" for the AT notification display ("1" for the left 7-segment display, "2" for the middle 7-segment display, " "3" is displayed on the right 7-segment display. However, the numerical value corresponding to the reel to be stopped first (here, "1" displayed on the left 7-segment display) should be blinked and stopped second. The numerical value corresponding to the reel (here, "2" displayed on the middle 7-segment display) and the numerical value corresponding to the reel to be stopped third (here, "3" displayed on the right 7-segment display) are turned on. By blinking the numerical value corresponding to the reel to be stopped first, the displayed numerical value is not the AT remaining payout number "123" but the pressing order of "left middle right", and the first stop operation. It is possible to make the player easily recognize that the reel to be to be is the left reel corresponding to the left 7-segment display displaying "1" in a blinking manner.

Next, when the first stop operation is accepted, it is determined in step SL4 of FIG. 75 whether or not the first stop operation is performed according to the push navigation. Here, when the first stop operation is performed according to the push navigation, in step SL5, the display on the AT notification display is changed from the lever-triggered push navigation to the first stop-triggered push navigation (from the second stop operation to the third stop). Switch to the display (press navigation until operation) and display. That is, as shown in (A3) of FIG. 76, the left 7-segment display of the AT notification display is turned off, and "2" is displayed on the middle 7-segment display and "3" is displayed on the right 7-segment display. However, the numerical value corresponding to the reel to be stopped second (here, "2" displayed on the middle 7-segment display) is blinked, and the numerical value corresponding to the reel to be stopped third (here, the right 7-segment display). The "3") displayed in is turned on. By blinking the numerical value corresponding to the reel to be stopped second, the displayed numerical value is not the AT remaining payout number "23" but the pressing order of "middle right", and the second stop operation should be performed. It is possible to make the player easily recognize that the reel is the middle reel corresponding to the middle 7-segment display in which "2" is blinking.

Next, when the second stop operation is accepted, it is determined in step SL6 of FIG. 75 whether or not the second stop operation is performed according to the push navigation. Here, when the second stop operation is performed according to the push navigation, in step SL7, the display on the AT notification display is changed from the push navigation of the first stop trigger to the push navigation of the second stop trigger (push of the third stop operation). Switch to the navigation) display and display. That is, as shown in (A4) of FIG. 76, the 7-segment display in the AT notification display is turned off (the left segment display is left off), and "3" is displayed on the right 7-segment display. However, the numerical value corresponding to the reel to be stopped third (here, "3" displayed on the right 7-segment display) is blinked. By blinking the numerical value corresponding to the reel to be stopped at the third stop, the displayed numerical value is in the push order of "right" instead of "3" of the AT remaining payout number, and the reel to be stopped at the third stop. However, it is possible to make the player easily recognize that the right reel corresponds to the right 7-segment display in which "3" is blinking.

Next, when the third stop operation is accepted, in step SL8 of FIG. 75, the display on the AT notification display is subtracted from the push navigation of the third stop trigger (before the payout is performed), and the remaining AT is paid out. Switch to the number display and display. That is, as shown in (A5) of FIG. 76, the AT notification display is "400" (the left 7-segment display is "4", the middle 7-segment display is "0", and the right 7-segment display is "0". ) Is lit up. Then, when the game medal is paid out, in step SL9 of FIG. 75, the value after subtraction (after the end of payout) from the value before subtraction of the remaining AT payout number is displayed on the AT notification display as a decrement. That is, as shown in (A6) and (A7) of FIG. 76, "400" before subtraction displayed on the AT notification display is "399", "398", "397", ..., "391", "389" after subtraction ("3" on the left 7-segment display, "8" on the middle 7-segment display, and "9" on the right 7-segment display while updating the display to decrease by 1 to "390" ") Is displayed. However, in this example, the number of payouts is set to "11". By displaying such a decrement, it is possible to give the player the feeling that the game medals are paid out one by one and the number of remaining AT payouts is reduced by one with the payout.

On the other hand, in step SL4 of FIG. 75, when it is determined that the first stop operation has not been performed according to the push navigation, the display on the AT notification display is switched from the lever-triggered push navigation to the display of the number of remaining AT payouts after subtraction. Immediate display (display immediately without decrement display). That is, as shown in (A8) of FIG. 76, immediately after the first stop is performed, the AT notification display is "389" (the left 7-segment display is "3", and the middle 7-segment display is "8". , "9") is displayed on the right 7-segment display. Similarly, in step SL6 of FIG. 75, when it is determined that the second stop operation has not been performed according to the push navigation, the display on the AT notification display is the number of remaining AT payouts after subtracting the display on the first stop trigger from the push navigation. Switch to display and display immediately. That is, as shown in (A9) of FIG. 76, "389" is displayed on the AT notification display immediately after the first stop is performed. In this way, when the stop operation is performed without following the push navigation, the display of the push navigation is stopped and the AT remaining payout number is displayed, and the AT remaining payout number after subtraction is immediately displayed. It is possible to make the player aware that the stop operation was performed without following the navigation system and that the number of remaining AT payouts was reduced. In addition, since the number of AT remaining payouts after subtraction is displayed before all reels stop (before the stop symbol is confirmed), the payout is performed when the stop symbol is confirmed, and the AT remaining payout number is subtracted accordingly. It is also possible to prevent the player from misidentifying the display as if it was displayed.

As a specific example, the control content of the display on the AT notification display when the winning combination lottery result corresponding to the winning-A1 condition device (see FIG. 14) in the first embodiment is obtained will be described. In the winning-A1 condition device, if the push order is correct, a bell small winning combination is established and a predetermined number of game medals (15 in the first embodiment, but 11 in this embodiment) are paid out. On the other hand, even if the answer is incorrect, it corresponds to a push order combination in which one card combination may be established and one game medal may be paid out. When such a push order combination is won, as described above, when the push order incorrect answer is confirmed, the display on the AT notification display is switched from the push navigation to the display of the remaining AT payout number after subtraction immediately. Display ("400"-> "389"). After that, even if one card combination is established and only one game medal is paid out, the display content of the remaining AT payout number is not updated. That is, the value "399" (= 400-1) obtained by subtracting the number of AT remaining payouts "1" actually paid out from the AT remaining payout number "400" before subtraction from the display "389" of the AT remaining payout number after subtraction. Will not be updated to. On the other hand, if the display of the number of remaining AT payouts after subtraction is updated to "399" when a single card combination is established due to an incorrect push order answer, the player dares to establish a single card combination as an incorrect push order answer. As a result, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the number of remaining AT payouts so that the AT gaming state continues for a long time. Therefore, even if the push navigation is performed, if the push order is incorrect, the number of remaining AT payouts is uniformly subtracted by "11" regardless of whether or not the single combination is established, and the player intends to do so. It is possible to prevent the period of the AT gaming state from being extended.

<< Display of information on the AT notification display when the power is turned off and restored >>
The information displayed on the AT notification display 600 and its display mode in the progress of the game are managed by the sub-control means. When the power is cut off during the progress of the game, the sub-control means stores the information that was displayed or was to be displayed on the AT notification display 600 at that time, and redisplays the information when the power is turned off and restored. Hereinafter, how the push order display and the AT remaining payout number display are performed on the AT notification display 600 when the power is turned off and restored will be described with reference to FIG. 77. FIG. 77 shows an example of the display contents of the AT notification display 600 according to the timing of turning off the power and returning from turning off the power. The content displayed on the AT notification display 600 according to the progress of the game when the power is not cut off is the same as the content shown in FIG. 76.

If the power is cut off and the power is restored after the start lever operation is accepted and before the first stop operation is accepted, AT notification is given as shown in FIG. 77 (A). The above-mentioned push navigation of the lever trigger is displayed on the display. If the power is cut off after the first stop operation is accepted and before the second stop operation is accepted and the power is turned off and restored, whether the first stop operation matches the push navigation. The displayed content differs depending on the type. That is, when the first stop operation matches the push navigation, as shown in (B1) of FIG. 77, the above-mentioned push navigation of the first stop trigger is displayed on the AT notification display. On the other hand, when the first stop operation does not match the push navigation, as shown in (B2) of FIG. 77, the AT notification display displays the number of remaining AT payouts after the above subtraction.

If the power is cut off after the second stop operation is accepted and before the third stop operation is accepted and the power is turned off and restored, the order of the stop operations up to that point (first stop operation and The displayed content differs depending on whether or not the second stop operation) matches the push navigation. That is, when the order of the stop operations up to that point matches the push navigation, the AT notification display displays the push navigation of the second stop trigger as shown in FIG. 77 (C1). On the other hand, if the order of the stop operations up to that point does not match the push navigation, the AT notification display displays the number of remaining AT payouts after the above subtraction, as shown in FIG. 77 (C2).

If the power is cut off after the third stop operation is accepted and before the game medal is paid out, and the power is turned off and restored, the order of the stop operations up to that point (from the first stop operation). The displayed content differs depending on whether or not the third stop operation) matches the push navigation. That is, when the order of the stop operations up to that point matches the push navigation, the AT notification display displays the number of remaining AT payouts before subtraction, as shown in (D1) of FIG. 77. Then, the above-mentioned decrement display is performed according to the subsequent payout of the game medal. On the other hand, if the order of the stop operations up to that point does not match the push navigation, the AT notification display displays the number of remaining AT payouts after the above subtraction, as shown in FIG. 77 (C2).

If the power is cut off and the power is restored while the game medals are being paid out, the number of remaining ATs to be paid out after subtraction from the AT notification display as shown in FIG. 77 (E). Is displayed immediately. When the power is turned off and restored, the restoration time on the main control means side and the restoration time on the sub control means side may differ. Therefore, if the power is cut off while the game medals are being paid out, the main control means side will return first in a situation where the return of the sub control means side is not ready, and the payout will be restarted and ended. Sometimes. In this case, if the above-mentioned decrement display is performed after the return of the sub-control means side is completed, the player who sees the decrement display may misunderstand that the payout is continuing at that time. Therefore, by displaying the decrement immediately instead of displaying it, such misidentification of the player is prevented from occurring.

Further, in recent game machines, since it is necessary to notify the player of a large amount of information according to the progress of the game, there is also a game machine equipped with a plurality of dedicated notification devices. On the other hand, in a gaming machine equipped with a large decorative member or a movable accessory, the space is limited because such a member occupies a large amount of space, and it is possible to secure a space for arranging the notification device. There is also the issue of difficulty.

On the other hand, in the AT notification display 600 described above, it is possible to switch and display and display a plurality of different information such as information on the push order and information on the number of remaining AT payouts. Therefore, as compared with the case where each information is displayed by a separate display, the space for arranging the display can be reduced, and the space can be saved. Further, by also using the display, it is possible to reduce the manufacturing cost. Further, in the AT notification display 600, the display mode of the information is changed depending on whether the push order is notified or the number of remaining AT payouts is notified. Therefore, it becomes clear to the player which information is displayed, and it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding the displayed information and causing an obstacle to the game. For example, even if a numerical value used in the display of the push navigation such as "321", "213", or "123" is displayed as the number of AT remaining payouts before or after the subtraction, the blinking display is performed during the push navigation. By not having it, it is possible to prevent the player from misidentifying it as a push navigation.

The AT notification display 600 can display two types of information having different contents even if they have similar numerical information, but may be configured to display three or more types of information. .. Even in that case, when a plurality of information that is easily confused is included in the displayed information, it is preferable to change the display mode of the information. Specifically, in addition to the above-mentioned push navigation and the number of remaining AT payouts, it can be mentioned as information for displaying the number of AT additions. Push navigation was blinking some information, but when notifying the number of AT additions, changing the color and brightness to be notified, changing the lighting mode of the segment lamp different from the corresponding segment, voice The mode of notification may be changed. This makes it possible for the player to specifically (clearly) specify the current notification content. Further, in the present embodiment, information is notified by the AT notification display 600 using the 7-segment display, but a plurality of different information can be transmitted by using another type of display such as a dot matrix LED. It may be configured to be displayed. Further, a plurality of different information may be displayed in the same display area in the display screen of the liquid crystal display device. Even in these cases, when a plurality of information that is easily confused is included in the displayed information, it is preferable to change the display mode of the information. In addition, misidentification of information may be prevented by changing the lighting color, the form of characters to be displayed, and the like in a plurality of information that are easily confused.

[Fourth Embodiment]
Hereinafter, the slot machine according to the fourth embodiment (hereinafter, also referred to as “slot machine of the fourth embodiment”) will be described with reference to FIGS. 78 to 81. Hereinafter, the characteristic portions of the slot machine of the fourth form will be mainly described. The feature portion described below is not limited to the slot machine of the fourth embodiment, and can be similarly applied to other embodiments. The slot machine of the fourth embodiment has the same or similar basic configuration as the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment described above, and the description thereof will be omitted. Further, each control process such as the combination determination process and the reel control process described in the slot machine 1 can be similarly applied to the slot machine of the fourth form or by partially changing the process contents. The feature configurations of the slot machines of the second form and the third form described above can also be applied in the same manner or with some changes in the contents of the slot machines of the fourth form.

≪Transition of game state≫
In the slot machine of the fourth form, as shown in FIG. 78 in a simplified manner, as a game state (main game state) mainly related to the AT setting state controlled by the main control means side, the normal within the advantageous section is normal. It has four gaming states: a gaming state, an AT gaming state, and a pull-back gaming state. The non-advantageous section gaming state is a gaming state belonging to the non-advantageous section (corresponding to the normal section described in the first embodiment), and corresponds to the game mode 0 described in the first embodiment. The normal gaming state, the AT gaming state, and the pull-back gaming state within the advantageous section are gaming states that belong to the advantageous section (similar to the advantageous section described in the first embodiment). The normal game state in the advantageous section corresponds to, for example, the game modes 1, 2, and 6 described in the first embodiment, the AT game state corresponds to, for example, the same game mode 3, and the pullback game state corresponds to, for example, the same game modes 4, 5. , 7 is equivalent.

If a predetermined transition condition is satisfied while staying in the non-advantageous section gaming state, the transition to the advantageous section (basically, the normal gaming state within the advantageous section) is performed. In the normal game state within the advantageous section, an AT lottery (details will be described later) and a charge lottery are performed on the main control means side based on the combination determination result and the like. If you win the AT lottery (AT win), you will be transferred to the AT game state. If you win the charge lottery, the number of charges (also referred to as "the number of AT stocks") will be added. The number of charges is related to the number of games set in the AT game state, and the larger the number of charges, the higher the possibility that the number of resets of the AT game state increases, which is advantageous for the player. In the AT game state, a predetermined number of games (for example, 20 games) is set as one set, and the push navigation is executed when the push order combination is won. Further, in the AT game state, a charge release lottery is performed on the main control means side based on the combination determination result and the like. If the charge release lottery is won, the AT game state of a predetermined number of games is reset after the remaining number of games in the AT game state currently set is exhausted (the charge number is deducted by 1 at the time of reset). .. As another aspect, when the charge release lottery is won in the AT game state, the AT game state of a predetermined number of games is reset from the next game regardless of the number of remaining games in the AT game state currently set. Alternatively, a predetermined number of games may be added (added) to the number of remaining games in the AT game state currently set so that the AT game state can be continued. If the set number of games is exhausted in the AT game state and the AT game state is not reset, the game shifts to the pull-back game state. In the pull-back game state, a pull-back lottery is performed, and if the pull-back lottery is won, the game shifts to the AT game state. Further, when the number of charges is 1 or more, if the predetermined number of games (for example, 40 games) is exhausted in the pullback gaming state without winning the pullback lottery, the game may be shifted to the AT gaming state. In that case, the number of charges is decremented by 1 when shifting to the AT gaming state.

In the present embodiment, as in the first embodiment, an advantageous section clear counter is provided for grasping the number of games continuously staying in the advantageous section, and when the normal section shifts to the advantageous section, the advantageous section is cleared. Set the value of the counter to "1500". Then, every time the game is exhausted in the advantageous section, the value of the advantageous section clear counter is subtracted by 1, and when the value of the counter becomes "0", the game is forcibly shifted to the normal section. If the value of the advantageous section clear counter shifts from the advantageous section to the normal section before the value of the advantageous section clear counter becomes "0", the value of the advantageous section clear counter is cleared (set to "0"), and the normal section is changed to the advantageous section again. When shifting to, the value of the advantageous section clear counter is reset to "1500".

It also has a MY counter that counts the number of game medals won (differences) in the advantageous section. This MY counter sets its counter value to "0" at the start of the advantageous section (may be set to "0" at the end of the advantageous section), and thereafter sets the counter value according to each game and the result of the game. Update. In the update, if the difference number is less than 0, the counter value is corrected to "0", and if the difference number is a positive value, it is accumulated and updated as it is (do not make such a correction). May be good). Then, when the accumulated difference number exceeds 2400, the advantageous section is terminated and the non-advantageous section (non-advantageous section gaming state) is entered. The MY counter is functionally the same as the net increase counter of the first embodiment.

Further, an AT number counter is also provided as a counter for counting the number of game medals acquired (difference number) in the advantageous section. This AT number counter is calculated by adding the value of the AT stock number (charge number) to the value of the MY counter, and is expected to be able to be acquired during one advantageous section. It is a counter that counts the number (expected number of acquisitions, expected number of acquisitions). Then, when the value (expected acquisition number) of the AT number counter exceeds the predetermined value (2100), the advantageous section is terminated at a predetermined timing (for example, the end timing of the ending game state described later), and the non-advantageous section is terminated. It is possible to shift to an advantageous section. The AT number counter is functionally the same as the correction counter of the first embodiment. These advantageous section clear counters, MY counters, and AT number counters are controlled and managed by the main control means.

When the charge lottery is won and the charge number is updated during the normal game state in the advantageous section, the effect suggesting that the charge number is updated (added) (also referred to as "charge suggestion effect") is sub-controlled. May be carried out by means. Whether or not to execute the charge suggestion effect is determined by the charge suggestion generation lottery. This charge suggestion generation lottery is performed by the sub-control means based on the combination determination result in the game in which the charge number is updated, the updated charge number, and the charge suggestion mode (details will be described later). The charge suggestion mode is a mode related to the degree of expectation (probability) at which the charge suggestion effect is performed, and is set to either charge suggestion mode = 1, 2, or 3 (the larger the mode number, the higher the expectation). Which charge suggestion mode is set is determined by the charge suggestion mode lottery. In this charge suggestion mode lottery, for example, a predetermined timing (for example, a time when the third stop operation is accepted or an advantageous section flag) in a game in which the advantageous section (referred to as the Xth advantageous section) has transitioned to the non-advantageous section gaming state is performed. It is performed by the sub-control means, triggered by any timing from the management total stop processing to the advantageous section clear counter processing). Then, the charge suggestion mode selected by the charge suggestion mode lottery shifts through this non-advantageous section gaming state in the advantageous section ((X + 1) th advantageous section) in the advantageous section normal gaming state ((X + 1) th advantage). It affects the probability that the charge suggestion effect will occur in the normal game state in the section (details will be described later). The charge suggestion mode set at the end of the Xth advantageous section is held in the (X + 1) th advantageous section. Then, at the end of the (X + 1) th advantageous section, a new charge suggestion mode is set by the charge suggestion mode lottery.

As an effect similar to the charge suggestion effect, an effect suggesting the current set value of the gaming machine (also referred to as “set value suggestion effect”) may be performed. When performing such a set value suggestion effect, the probability that the set value suggestion effect is performed and the accuracy of the suggested content are set to change according to the charge suggestion mode (another suggestion mode may be set). May be. For example, the larger the number of the charge suggestion mode, the higher the accuracy of the suggestion content. The probability that the suggestion effect is performed is set higher. Conversely, the smaller the number of the charge suggestion mode, the higher the accuracy of the suggestion content. The probability that the production will be performed may be set high. In addition, the higher the number of the charge suggestion mode, the higher the probability that the set value suggestion effect will be performed, including the ones with lower accuracy of the suggestion content and the higher one, but it is limited to the set value suggestion effect with high accuracy of the suggestion content. The probability that the setting value suggestion effect is performed is set higher as the number of the charge suggestion mode is smaller, and conversely, the probability that the set value suggestion effect is performed including the one with the lower accuracy of the suggestion content as the number of the charge suggestion mode is smaller. Although it is set high, the probability that it will be performed may be set higher as the number of the charge suggestion mode is larger, as long as it is limited to the setting value suggestion effect in which the accuracy of the suggestion content is high.

Hereinafter, the AT lottery performed by the main control means, the charge suggestion mode lottery performed by the sub control means, and the charge suggestion generation lottery will be described with reference to specific examples. In the charge suggestion mode lottery shown in FIG. 79 (A), the winning probability differs depending on whether the target difference number is more than or equal to a predetermined number (“1000” in this example, but can be changed as appropriate) and less than a predetermined number. It is set. The target difference number refers to the difference number obtained at a predetermined time point acquired in the advantageous section when one advantageous section ends. The predetermined time point is, for example, the time when the advantageous section ends, the time when the AT game state is set only once in the advantageous section, the time when the AT game state ends, and the AT game state multiple times in the advantageous section. When is set, it can be appropriately set such as when the last AT game state ends, when the difference number in the advantageous section becomes maximum, and the like.

In the charge suggestion mode lottery, one of the selection number 1 (charge suggestion mode = 1 is set), the selection number 2 (charge suggestion mode = 2 is set), and the selection number 3 (charge suggestion mode = 3 is set) is selected. To. The number assigned to each selection number is as shown in FIG. 79 (A). In the charge suggestion mode lottery, the total value of the number of places is set to "16384". In this way, in the charge suggestion mode lottery, when the target difference number in this advantageous section is 1000 or more, the probability of being set to charge suggestion mode = 1 is low, and the probability of being set to charge suggestion mode = 3 is low. It is set to be high. Charge suggestion mode The charge suggestion mode (election number) set by the result of the lottery is configured to be stored in the sub-control means without being cleared even after the end of the advantageous section and to be retained in the next advantageous section. It should be noted that the target difference number is cleared at the end of the advantageous section in the main control means, but is not cleared by the sub control means and is stored even after the end of the advantageous section and is retained in the next advantageous section. You may.

In the AT lottery shown in FIG. 79 (B), the winning probability is set to be different depending on the trigger combination selected based on the combination determination result and the number of charges. The trigger 1 and the trigger 2 in the figure correspond to, for example, a so-called rare role (watermelon small role in the first embodiment), and can be arbitrarily set. Further, although the number of charges = 1 to 4 is described in the figure, it may be set when the number of charges = 5 or more. In the AT lottery, either the selection number 0 (AT non-winning) or the selection number 1 (AT winning) is selected. The number assigned to each selection number is as shown in FIG. 79 (B). In the AT lottery, the total value of the number of places is set to "65536". In this way, in the AT lottery, basically, the probability of winning the AT increases as the number of charges increases, but when the number of charges = 0, the probability of winning the AT is set higher than when the number of charges = 1 or 2. ing. Further, when the number of charges is specific (the number of charges = 3 in the figure), the probability of winning the AT is set to be considerably high.

In the charge suggestion generation lottery shown in FIG. 80, the winning probability is set to be different according to the value of the charge suggestion mode after the update, the winning combination selected according to the winning combination determination result, and the number of charges. In this example, the trigger role 1 and other roles are divided, but more trigger roles may be set. Further, the winning probability may be changed between the trigger 1 and the other roles. Further, although the number of charges = 1 to 4 is described in the figure, it may be set when the number of charges = 5 or more. In the charge suggestion generation lottery, either the selection number 0 (no suggestion) or the selection number 1 (with suggestion) is selected. The number assigned to each selection number is as shown in FIGS. 80 (A) to 80 (C). In the charge suggestion generation lottery, the total value of the number of places is set to "16384". As described above, in the charge suggestion generation lottery, basically, the value of the charge suggestion mode becomes large, and when the number of charges becomes large, the probability that the charge suggestion effect is performed increases. In particular, when the number of charges is specific (in this example, the number of charges = 3), the probability that the charge suggestion effect is performed is set to be considerably high.

By setting the lottery probability of each lottery as described above, the following effects can be obtained. First, in the charge suggestion mode lottery, the probability that the charge suggestion mode = 3 is set is high when the target difference number is 1000 or more. When the charge suggestion mode = 3 is set, the winning probability in the charge suggestion generation lottery becomes high, so that the possibility that the charge suggestion effect is performed when the number of charges is updated is also high. A player having a target difference of 1000 or more, that is, a player to which a large amount of game value is given, is generally highly motivated to continue the game. Therefore, when the charge suggestion effect is performed, it can be seen that the number of charges is 1 or more, which can be expected to further increase the motivation to continue the game.

Further, in the conventional gaming machine, since the production performed after the end of the advantageous section is uniform, it is difficult for the player to have a sense of expectation for shifting to the advantageous section again. Therefore, for example, when a target difference number of 1000 or more is acquired in an advantageous section, some players are satisfied with the difference and try to stop the game after the end of the advantageous section. Even such a player can be expected to be more motivated to continue the game by performing the charge suggestion effect. On the other hand, if the charge suggestion effect is not performed even if the game is continued for a while after the end of the advantageous section, it is highly possible that the number of charges is 0. However, when the number of charges = 0, the probability of winning the AT is high, so it can be expected that the motivation to continue the game is increased in the expectation of winning the AT. When the number of charges is updated to 3 which makes the probability of winning the AT very high, the probability that the charge suggestion effect is performed also becomes high. Therefore, the effect mode of the charge suggestion effect performed when the charge number is updated to 3 may be set to the effect mode peculiar to the charge number = 3. By doing so, it is expected that the player who sees the charge suggestion effect of the peculiar effect mode will be more motivated to continue the game in consideration of the fact that there are multiple charges and it is easy to win the AT. can.

In each of the above lottery, the winning probability may be set in consideration of other conditions. For example, the lottery probability of the AT lottery performed by the main control means or the charge suggestion generation lottery performed by the sub control means may be set according to the effect group number or the condition device group number managed by the main control means side. Further, a flag for managing the ease of winning in the charge lottery (also referred to as a "charge winning probability flag") is set in the main control means, and the state of the charge winning probability flag (for example, flag = 0:). Depending on the low probability state (1: high probability state), the lottery probability of the AT lottery performed by the main control means or the charge suggestion generation lottery performed by the sub control means may be set.

≪Ending game state≫
In the slot machine of the fourth form, when a predetermined condition (also referred to as "ending condition") is satisfied in the AT gaming state, the slot machine is shifted to a special gaming state (also referred to as "ending gaming state"). FIG. 81 shows an example of the transition from the AT gaming state to the ending gaming state. In FIG. 81, the ending condition is satisfied when the AT game state set at 20G (“G” means a game) has 12G remaining (when 8G is digested after setting), and the ending is started from the next game. An example of being set to the gaming state is shown. The ending condition is, for example, that the above-mentioned AT number counter exceeds a predetermined value (for example, "2100"), or that the number of digested games after shifting to the advantageous section exceeds a specific value (for example, 1300). can do.

On the other hand, the sub-control means executes an effect corresponding to the AT game state (also referred to as “AT suggestion effect”) during the AT game state. The state in which this AT suggestion effect is executed is hereinafter referred to as "AT suggestion effect state". When the AT gaming state in the main control means is completely consumed for the set number of games (20G), the period of the AT suggestion effect state in the sub control means coincides with the period of the AT gaming state. However, if the AT game state is changed to the ending game state before all the set games in the AT game state are exhausted, the AT suggestion effect state is maintained and the AT suggestion effect is performed even during the ending game state (Fig.). 81). Then, when a predetermined condition (also referred to as "AT suggestion effect end condition") is satisfied, an effect corresponding to the ending game state (also referred to as "ending suggestion effect") is performed. The state in which this ending suggestion effect is executed is hereinafter referred to as "ending suggestion effect state". The AT suggestion effect end condition may be, for example, that the number of games initially set as the number of games set in the AT game state is consumed.

Further, a predetermined timing of the game in which one (one set) AT game state in the main control means and the AT suggestion effect state in the sub control means end (for example, a predetermined timing after the reception of the third stop operation, for example, a winning determination). After (after the stop symbol determination), at the time of accepting the third stop operation, etc.), a freeze (also referred to as "AT end suggestion freeze") for suggesting that the AT game state is terminated is set by the main control means. On the other hand, when the main control means is shifted to the ending game state but the sub control means is in the AT suggestion effect state, the AT suggestion effect state in the sub control means ends at a predetermined timing (for example, the third stop) of the game. Even at the time of receiving the operation), the AT end suggestion freeze is set by the main control means. Therefore, depending on whether or not the AT end suggestion freeze is executed, whether the AT game state in the main control means and the AT suggestion effect state in the sub control means have ended at the same time, the main control means has already been shifted to the ending game state. It is not possible to determine whether only the AT suggestion effect state in the sub-control means has ended. When the AT end suggestion freeze is performed by the main control means, the sub control means may also perform an effect suggesting that the AT gaming state is terminated (also referred to as “AT end suggestion effect”). Further, in the present embodiment, the AT suggestion effect, the AT end suggestion effect, the ending suggestion effect, and the ending transition suggestion effect are performed by using the image display device (corresponding to the image display device 11 described in the first embodiment). These effects may be performed using a display device different from the image display device.

In this way, even if the main control means shifts to the ending game state in the middle of the AT game state, the sub control means maintains the AT suggestion effect state and performs the AT suggestion effect, so that the player can see the AT game state. You can give the impression that it is being continued. Therefore, even if the player shifts to the ending game state in the middle of the AT game state, the player does not know that, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling like a loss. Further, when the continuous effect is performed by the sub control means as the AT suggestion effect, the main control means may shift from the AT game state to the ending game state. In such a case, if the sub-control means cancels the continuous effect and executes the ending effect, the player may not be able to see the result of the continuous effect and may feel as if he / she has lost. By continuing the continuous production, it is possible to prevent such a situation from occurring.

In the AT game state, the main control means may perform a lottery for determining whether or not to add the number of AT games (also referred to as "additional lottery during AT") when a rare role is won or the like. Further, when the additional lottery during AT is won, the sub-control means performs a lottery for determining whether or not to notify the fact (also referred to as "additional notification lottery during AT"), and when the winning is won, the additional notification effect is executed. You may do so. On the other hand, even in the ending game state, the main control means may perform a lottery (also referred to as "additional lottery in the limit") for determining whether or not to add the number of AT games, triggered by winning a rare role or the like. In addition, when the extra lottery during the limit is won, the sub-control means performs a lottery to decide whether or not to notify the fact (also referred to as "the extra notice lottery during the limit"), and when the winner is won, the additional notification effect is executed. You may do so. By making it possible to add AT even in the ending game state, it is possible to enhance the game playability during the ending game state. On the other hand, in the ending game state, if the rare role is not added even if it is won, the player feels that it is a loss (the winning of the rare role is useless), which leads to a decrease in the motivation to play. There is a risk. In addition, as a privilege other than adding the number of AT games, when a rare role is won in the ending game state, a specific character can be made to appear on the image display screen or a specific effect can be performed. You may set up a privilege to become like this. Alternatively, when the rare role is won in the ending game state, the charge suggestion mode = 3 may be easily set.

It should be noted that the probability that the additional notification effect is executed in the state where the main control means is in the ending game state but the sub control means is in the AT suggestion effect state (also referred to as "AT game state 1") (= in the limit lottery). Winning probability x limit additional notification winning probability in the lottery) is the additional notification effect in the state where the main control means is in the AT gaming state and the sub control means is in the AT suggestion effect state (also referred to as "AT game state 2"). It is preferable to set the probability to be executed (= the probability of winning in the additional lottery during AT × the probability of winning in the additional notification lottery during AT). By doing so, there is no difference in the frequency of occurrence of the additional notification effect between the AT game state 1 and the AT game state 2, so that it cannot be determined that the AT game state 1 is based on the frequency of occurrence of the additional notification effect. Can be done.

Further, in both the AT game state 1 and the AT game state 2, the effect suggesting that the number of AT games may be added (also referred to as "addition suggestion effect") is subordinated by the winning of the rare role. It may be executed by a control means. In that case, it is preferable to set the frequency at which the additional suggestion effect occurs in the AT game state 1 to be the same as the frequency at which the additional suggestion effect occurs in the AT game state 2. Further, when a plurality of types of additional suggestion effects having different production modes (effect contents) are to be generated in the AT game state 2, all types of additional suggestion effects are to be generated in the AT game state 1 as well. It is preferable that the frequency of occurrence of the additional suggestion effect for each type is set to be the same in the AT game state 1 and the AT game state 2. By doing so, there is no difference in the frequency of occurrence of the additional suggestion effect between the AT game state 1 and the AT game state 2, so that it cannot be determined that the AT game state 1 is based on the frequency of occurrence of the additional suggestion effect. Can be done.

In the state where the main control means is in the ending game state and the sub control means is in the ending suggestion effect state (also referred to as "AT game state 3"), a dedicated addition that is not performed in the AT game state 1 or the AT game state 2 is added. The notification effect and the additional suggestion effect may be performed on the sub-control means side. By doing so, when the main control means is in the ending game state, the mode of the additional notification effect and the additional suggestion effect can be changed according to the state of the sub control means. Further, it is possible to prevent the player's motivation from being lowered in the AT game state 3 by having the additional notification effect and the additional suggestion effect dedicated to the AT game state 3. In the present embodiment, the state that the main control means is in the AT gaming state and the sub control means is in the ending suggestion effect state does not occur. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that the player has entered the ending game state even though he / she is actually in the AT game state.

≪Game progress control processing≫
Hereinafter, among the control processes performed in the main control means of the slot machine of the fourth embodiment, the game progress control process will be described with reference to FIGS. 82 to 88. In the following description, the main gaming state 0 corresponds to the above-mentioned non-advantageous section gaming state, the main gaming state 1 and the main gaming state 2 correspond to the above-mentioned normal gaming state in the advantageous section, and the main gaming state 3, The main game state 4 and the main game state 5 correspond to the above-mentioned AT game state, and the main game state 6 and the main game state 7 correspond to the above-mentioned pull-back game state. Further, the state in which the limit arrival number is set to 2 in the main game state 5 corresponds to the above-mentioned ending game state.

The game progress control process is a process that is repeatedly executed during the game, as described in the first embodiment. As shown in FIG. 82, first, a lever control process is performed (step SK1). The content of this lever control process is the same as a part of the content of the game start standby process described in the first embodiment. After the lever control process is completed, the process proceeds to step SK2, and internal lottery is performed. After the end of the internal lottery, the effect group number set process is performed (step SK3). The content of this effect group number set process is the same as a part of the content of the group number set process described in the first embodiment. Next, the process proceeds to step SK4, and the advantageous section display LED lighting process is performed. In this advantageous section display LED lighting process, control is performed to turn on the section indicator for notifying that the advantageous section is in progress. After the advantageous section display LED lighting process is completed, the advantageous section flag management lever process is performed (step SK5). In this advantageous section flag management lever processing, the lever processing for each game state, which will be described later, is performed as one process.

After the advantageous section flag management lever processing is completed, the rotation cylinder stop processing is performed (step SK6). In this spinning stop process, as a result of the internal lottery, a control process for stopping each reel is performed based on the push order and the push position by the player. Next, the advantageous section flag management all stop processing is performed (step SK7). This advantageous section flag management all stop processing will be described later. After the completion of the advantageous section flag management all stop processing, a payout process (process of paying out game medals) is performed (step SK8), and then a count process (process of updating the values of various counters) is performed (step SK9). After the count processing is completed, the process proceeds to step SK10, and the advantageous section clear counter processing is performed. The content of the advantageous section clear counter process is the same as the content of the advantageous section clear counter process described in the first embodiment.

In each game state lever processing performed in the advantageous section flag management lever processing in step SK5, first, as shown in FIG. 83, whether or not the advantageous section flag is larger than 0 (in the advantageous section or the non-advantageous section). Is there?) (Step SK21). Here, when the advantageous section flag is larger than 0 (step SK21; YES), the process proceeds to step SK22 and the instruction generation process is performed. In this instruction generation process, a preparatory process for performing push navigation is performed. After the instruction generation process is completed, the AT number counter update process described later is performed, and then the process proceeds to step SK24. On the other hand, if the advantageous section flag is not larger than 0 in step SK21 (step SK21; NO), the process proceeds to step SK24 without performing the processes of steps SK22 and SK23.

In step SK24, the main game state number is determined, and according to the main game state number, if the main game state number is 0, the main game state 0 lever process is performed (step S64), and if the main game state number is 1, the main game state 0 lever process is performed. The main game state 1 lever process is performed (step SK25), and when the main game state number is 1 or 2, the main game state 1 and 2 lever processes are performed (step SK26). When the main game state number is 3 or 4, the main game state 3 and 4 lever processing is performed (step SK27), and when the main game state number is 5, the main game state 5 lever processing described later is performed (step SK28). ). Further, when the main game state number is 6, the main game state 6 lever process is performed (step SK29), and when the main game state number is 7, the main game state 7 lever process is performed (step SK30).

In the AT number counter update process performed in step SK23, as shown in FIG. 84, first, the value of the MY counter is stored in the AT number counter (step SK41). Next, it is determined whether or not the instruction number is larger than 0 (whether or not push navigation is performed) (step SK42). Here, if the instruction number is not larger than 0 (step SK42; NO), the process proceeds to step SK43, and whether or not the production group number is N (N is a predetermined numerical value) (whether or not the push order combination is won). Or) is determined. Here, if the effect group number is N (step SK43; YES), the process proceeds to step SK44, and if the effect group number is not N (step SK43; NO), the process proceeds to step SK45. On the other hand, if the instruction number is larger than 0 in step SK42 (step SK42; YES), the process directly proceeds to step SK44.

In step SK44, F (the number of payouts when the push order combination is established) is added to the AT number counter, and then the process proceeds to step SK45. In step SK45, it is determined whether or not the main game state number is larger than 2. Here, when the main game state number is larger than 2 (step SK45; YES), the process proceeds to step SK46, and it is determined whether or not the limit arrival number is 0. Here, when the limit arrival number is 0 (step SK46; YES), the process proceeds to step SK47, and it is determined whether or not the advantageous section stay G number counter is 1. The advantageous section stay G number counter is a counter that manages the number of games continuously staying in the advantageous section, similarly to the advantageous section clear counter.

In step SK47, if the AT stay G number counter is 1 (step SK47; YES), the process proceeds to step SK49, and if the AT stay G number counter is not 1 (step SK47; NO), the process proceeds to step SK48 and the AT number counter. Is 2100 or more. Here, when the AT number counter is 2100 or more (step SK48; YES), the process proceeds to step SK49. In step SK49, 1 is stored in the limit arrival number, and then the AT number counter update process is terminated and the process returns. On the other hand, when the main game state number is not larger than 2 in step SK45 (step SK45; NO), when the limit arrival number is not 0 in step SK46 (step SK46; NO), and when the AT number counter is in step SK48. If is not 2100 or more (step SK48; NO), the AT number counter update process is terminated and a return is performed without performing any subsequent process.

In the main game state 5 lever process performed in step SK28 of FIG. 83, as shown in FIG. 85, first, it is determined whether or not the limit arrival number is 2 (step SK61). Here, if the limit arrival number is not 2 (step SK61; YES), the process proceeds to step SK62, the main game state 3 and 4 lever processing is performed, and then the main game state 5 lever processing is completed and returned. On the other hand, when the lever processing limit arrival number is 2 (step SK61; NO), the process proceeds to step SK63, and it is determined whether or not the condition device group B number is m (m is a predetermined numerical value). Here, when the condition device group B number is m (step SK63; YES), an additional lottery is performed in the limit, and it is determined whether or not the winning number is 0 (non-winning) (winning) (step SK65). .. Here, if the winning number is not 0 (step SK65; NO), the process proceeds to step SK66, and 200 is added to the ending G number counter (counter that manages the set number of games in the ending game state). On the other hand, when the condition device group B number is not m in step SK63 (step SK63; NO) and when the winning number is 0 in step SK65 (step SK65; YES), the process directly proceeds to step SK67.

In step SK67, it is determined whether or not the AT number counter exceeds 2400. Here, if the AT number counter exceeds 2400 (step SK67; YES), the process proceeds to step SK69, and if the AT number counter does not exceed 2400 (step SK67; NO), the process proceeds to step SK68. In step SK68, it is determined whether or not the advantageous section clear counter is 1. Here, when the advantageous section clear counter is not 1 (step SK68; NO), the main game state 5 lever processing is completed and returned, and when the advantageous section clear counter is 1 (step SK68; YES), step SK69 is performed. move on. In step SK69, 1 is stored in the ending G number counter. After that, the limit end flag (1 is saved in (step SK70)), the main game state 5 lever processing is completed, and the process returns.

In the advantageous section flag management total stop process performed in step SK7 of FIG. 82, first, as shown in FIG. 86, the total stop process for each game state is performed (step SK81). In this all-stop processing for each game state, the main game state 5 all-stop processing, which will be described later, is performed as one process. After the completion of all stop processing for each game state, it is determined whether or not the limit arrival number is 1 (step SK82). Here, when the limit arrival number is 1 (step SK82; YES), the process proceeds to step SK83, and the limit determination process described later is performed. After that, all stop processing for each game state is completed and a return is made. On the other hand, if the limit arrival number is not 1 in step SK82 (step SK82; NO), all stop processing for each game state is ended and the game returns.

In the main game state 5 total stop process performed in the advantageous section flag management total stop process in step SK81 of FIG. 86, as shown in FIG. 87, first, the wait reservation counter (the above-mentioned ending transition suggestion freeze execution time is managed). (Counter for) is subtracted by 1 (step SK101). Next, it is determined whether or not the wait reservation counter after subtraction is 0 (step SK102). Here, when the wait reservation counter after subtraction is 0 (step SK102; YES), the process proceeds to step SK103, and 5 is stored in the main game state number. Then, p (predetermined numerical value) is saved in the waiting effect number at the start of the game (the number for managing the type of the waiting effect at the start of the game) (step SK104), and the process proceeds to step SK105. On the other hand, if the wait reservation counter after subtraction is not 0 in step SK102 (step SK102; NO), the process proceeds to step SK105 without performing the processes of steps SK103 and SK104.

In step SK105, the ending G number counter is subtracted by 1. Then, it is determined whether or not the ending G number counter is 0 (step SK106). Here, when the ending G number counter is 0 (step SK106; YES), the process proceeds to step SK107, and it is determined whether or not the limit arrival number is 2. Here, when the limit arrival number is 2 (step SK107; YES), the process proceeds to step SK108, 1 is stored in the advantageous section clear counter, and then the process proceeds to step SK110. On the other hand, if the limit arrival number is not 2 in step SK107 (step SK107; NO), the process proceeds to step SK109, a state transition process (process for transitioning the gaming state) is performed, and then the process proceeds to step SK110. If the ending G number counter is not 0 in step SK106 (step SK106; NO), the process directly proceeds to step SK110. In step SK110, the process of clearing all stops during AT (processing of clearing predetermined data and the like used during AT) is performed, and the main game state 5 all stop process is completed.

In the limit determination process performed in step SK83 of FIG. 86, as shown in FIG. 88, first, 1 is added to the limit arrival number (step SK121). Next, it is determined whether or not the main game state number is any of 3 to 5 (step SK122). Here, when the main game state number is any one of 3 to 5 (step SK122; YES), the process proceeds to step SK123, and the value of the ATG number counter is stored in the ending G number counter. The ATG number counter is a counter that manages the number of digested games during AT, and is set to, for example, "20" when AT is set (including reset), and thereafter, every time a game is digested during AT. Is subtracted by 1.

Next, the remaining value when the value of the ending G number counter is divided by 20 is stored in the wait reservation counter (step SK124). Then, it is determined whether or not the wait reservation counter is 0 (step SK124). Here, when the wait reservation counter is 0 (step SK125; YES), the process proceeds to step SK126, and q (predetermined number) is set to the waiting effect number at the end of the game (the number for managing the type of the waiting effect at the end of the game). (Numerical value) is saved (step SK104), and the process proceeds to step SK107. On the other hand, if the wait reservation counter is not 0 in step SK125 (step SK125; NO), the process proceeds to step SK128. If the main game state number is not any of 3 to 5 in step SK122 (step SK122; NO), the process directly proceeds to step SK127.

In step SK127, 5 is saved in the main game status number, and after saving, the process proceeds to step SK128. In step SK128, a lottery for the number of ending Gs (a lottery for determining the number of games set in the ending game state) is performed. Next, the lottery result (value of the number of games) corresponding to the winning number in the ending G number lottery is acquired (step SK129). Then, the lottery result is added to the value when 20 is multiplied by the value of the AT stock counter (the counter that manages the number of charges described above) (step SK130). Subsequently, the addition result in step SK130 is added to the ending G number counter (step SK131), and 5 is stored in the main game state number (step SK132). Then, unnecessary variables and the like are cleared (step SK133), the limit determination process is completed, and the process returns.

[Fifth Embodiment]
Hereinafter, the slot machine according to the fifth embodiment (hereinafter, also referred to as “slot machine of the fifth embodiment”) will be described with reference to FIGS. 89 to 108. Hereinafter, the characteristic portions of the slot machine of the fifth form will be mainly described. The feature portion described below is not limited to the slot machine of the fifth embodiment, and can be similarly applied to other embodiments. The slot machine of the fifth embodiment has the same or similar basic configuration as the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment described above, and the description thereof will be omitted. Further, each control process such as the combination determination process and the reel control process described in the slot machine 1 can be similarly applied to the slot machine of the fifth form or by partially changing the process contents. The feature configurations of the slot machines of the second to fourth forms described above can also be applied to the slot machines of the fifth form in the same manner or with some changes in the contents.

≪Basic configuration≫
Prior to the description of the feature portion, the basic configuration of the slot machine of the fifth embodiment (the configuration particularly related to the description of the feature portion) will be outlined. Although not shown, the slot machine of the fifth form has three reels (corresponding to the above-mentioned reels 3a to 3c) and a start lever operated when starting rotation of all the reels (the above-mentioned start lever 25). (Corresponding to), and three left, middle, and right stop switches (corresponding to the above-mentioned stop switches 26a to 26c) that accept stop operations for individually stopping the rotation of each reel, and a game for directing. It is equipped with a sub-button that is operated when performing a game or displaying game machine information. Further, the slot machine of the fifth form has three control boards (the above-mentioned main control board 60, sub-main control board 70A, and sub-sub) as main control boards, that is, a main control board, a sub-main control board, and a sub-sub control board. It corresponds to the control board 70B). The main control board controls the operation reception of the start lever and the stop switch, and the sub-main control board or the sub-sub control board controls the operation reception of the sub buttons.

Each stop switch has a button-shaped operation reception unit that retracts when the player pushes it by hand and returns to its original state by spring force when the player releases it, and this operation reception unit is pressed (pressed by hand). When the contact of the electric circuit closes and switches from the off (OFF) state to the on (ON) state, and when the pressing operation is released (the hand is released), the contact opens and switches from the on state to the off state. It has become. Each time each stop switch effectively accepts a stop operation and switches from the off state to the on state, the stop operation is accepted from the main control board (main control means) to the sub-main control board (sub-main control means). Control commands (first, second and third stop reception commands) including information indicating the above are transmitted. By receiving these stop reception commands, the sub-main control board can identify that each stop switch has effectively received the stop operation (first, second, and third stop operation).

Further, after each stop switch effectively accepts the stop operation, when the stop operation is canceled and each stop switch is switched from the on state to the off state, the stop received from the main control board to the sub-main control board each time. A control command (stop operation release command) including information indicating that the operation has been canceled is transmitted. Specifically, a control command containing information indicating that the first stop operation has been released (referred to as a "first stop operation release command"), and a control command containing information indicating that the second stop operation has been released. (Referred to as a "second stop operation release command") and a control command containing information indicating that the third stop operation has been canceled (referred to as a "third stop operation release command") are transmitted. By receiving these stop operation release commands, the sub-main control board can identify that the stop operation effectively accepted by each stop switch has been released (the player's hand has been removed from the stop switch). can. The first and second stop operation release commands may not be transmitted, and only the third stop operation release command may be transmitted.

Further, when the operation of the start lever is effectively accepted, various control commands corresponding to the instruction number command and the effect group number command in the slot machine 1 (collectively, "lever operation reception") are transmitted from the main control board to the sub-main control board. Also called "time command") is sent. By receiving this lever operation reception command, the sub-main control board can identify that the start lever operation has been effectively received (the start lever has been effectively operated).

The sub-button has, for example, a button-shaped operation reception unit and a cross-shaped operation reception unit with an arrow, which retracts when the player pushes it by hand and returns to the original state by a spring force or the like when the player releases the hand. When the operation reception unit is pressed (pressed by hand), the contact of the electric circuit closes and switches from the off state to the on state, and when the pressing operation is released (hand is released), the contact opens and is in the on state. It is designed to switch from to to the off state. When the sub button is effectively operated, a predetermined effect process corresponding to the operation may be executed by the sub control board (sub control means). In addition, an effect process may be performed to urge the player to operate the sub button. Further, by operating the sub button in a predetermined procedure, it is possible to display an adjustment screen for adjusting the brightness of the screen of the image display unit and adjusting the volume of the speaker. Hereinafter, some characteristic parts of the slot machine of the fifth form will be sequentially described.

≪Display production≫
The slot machine of the fifth embodiment includes an image display unit DP (see FIGS. 89 to 98, etc.) corresponding to the image display screen 11a of the image display device 11 in the slot machine 1. Various display effects are executed. Further, the slot machine of the fifth form is provided with an audio output unit (not shown) corresponding to the speakers 15a, 15b, 44a, 44b in the slot machine 1, and the effect corresponding to each display effect is provided from this audio output unit. It is designed to output the audio for. The display effects executed in the slot machine of the fifth form include, for example, a conversation effect (also referred to as "line effect"), a subtitle effect (also referred to as "telop effect"), and an expectation degree effect (also referred to as "object effect"). , GET effect, scene switching effect, darkening effect.

Here, the subtitle effect is an effect of displaying character information like a movie subtitle. As a gaming machine that performs such an effect, for example, as described in Japanese Patent No. 5765060, a counter is set to a predetermined value at the start of displaying subtitles, and the counter is subtracted at predetermined time intervals to obtain a counter value. There was something that hides the subtitles when becomes 0.

Further, the scene switching effect is an effect of switching the scene of the moving image displayed according to the progress of the game. As a gaming machine that performs such an effect, for example, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-249024, when a switching instruction is received immediately after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of displaying a certain scene, another game machine is immediately used. On the other hand, if a switching instruction is received before the lapse of a predetermined time, the scene is switched to another scene after the lapse of a predetermined time.

Further, the blackout effect is a game result that is not preferable for the player in the final scene of the continuous effect when the effect of displaying a moving image with a story is displayed over a plurality of games (also referred to as "continuous effect"). When is shown, the display screen of the continuous effect becomes dark and the visibility is reduced. As a gaming machine that performs such an effect, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-43014.

In the conventional gaming machine that performs the various effects described above, for example, the display start timing in the subtitle effect and the scene switching timing in the scene switching effect may be bad, and therefore the displayed content cannot be recognized by the player. Or, the tempo of the game may be deteriorated, which may lead to a decrease in the interest of the game. In addition, in the darkening effect, the visibility of the entire display screen may be reduced, which makes it difficult for the player to check other information displayed on the display screen, which reduces the interest of the game. There was a risk. Therefore, in the present embodiment, measures are taken so as not to reduce the interest of the game in these various productions.

<Conversation production>
In the conversation production, for example, people, animals and plants, robots, monsters (whether real or fictitious), etc. (collectively referred to as "characters") set as image characters of the game machine talk. It is an effect, and a predetermined line emitted by each character is displayed on an image display unit such as a liquid crystal panel, and voice is output from an audio output unit such as a speaker. Conversational production provides the player with content that is not related to the game result, such as introducing the character to the player, explaining the content related to the game method, and explaining the content related to the model and specifications of the game machine. It may play a role of notifying the player, or may play a role of notifying the player of the contents related to the game result, such as suggesting the degree of expectation for giving an advantageous game. Advantageous games are games that are more advantageous to the player than usual (for example, games during AT (including during ART) on slot machines, bonus games, games during jackpots on pachinko machines, probability fluctuation games, or time saving games. It refers to games, etc., and is also referred to as "advantageous games" below). Further, the degree of expectation for granting an advantageous game is a game result (for example, AT in a slot machine) in which the probability of executing an advantageous game or permitting the execution of an advantageous game is high (including the case where it becomes 100%). Winning, AT extra winning, extra winning with a large number of AT additions, bonus winning, advantageous bonus winning, rare role winning, jackpot winning on pachinko machines, probabilistic jackpot (big hit more advantageous than no probabilistic jackpot) winning, 16 round jackpot ( It refers to the degree of expectation (reliability, accuracy) for obtaining (big hit) winning, etc.) with many big hits. In the conversation effect, a predetermined display (also referred to as “conversation effect display”) for the conversation effect is displayed on the image display unit DP at a predetermined timing. The display is not limited to a two-dimensional (planar) image display, and includes a three-dimensional (three-dimensional) display such as a hologram. The conversation effect may be a mode in which two or more characters talk to each other, or a mode in which one character talks to the player. In short, at a minimum, if there is a character image and serif characters corresponding to the character image, the requirements for conversation production are satisfied.

The conversation effect display is a display related to the remarks of each character in a conversation between a plurality of characters, and includes a display of the character and a display that can be identified as a character. Specifically, the display of a character is, for example, a display (also referred to as a "character image display") of a picture (picture) showing the appearance (appearance, mainly a face) of the character who speaks. On the other hand, the display that can be identified as a character is, for example, a display of characters (also referred to as "line display") indicating the content of the character's speech (also referred to as "line" in the conversation effect display). In addition to the character image display and the dialogue display, the conversation effect display usually includes a display in which the name of the character can be identified. Specifically, the display in which the name of the character can be identified is, for example, the display of characters indicating the name of the character who speaks (also referred to as “character name display”). The conversation effect display is configured to include a character image display, a dialogue display, and a character name display, but a conversation effect display composed of a character image display and a dialogue display without including the character name display may be provided. As a specific example of the conversation effect display, the first conversation effect display KD1 is shown in FIG. 89 (A), and the second conversation effect display KD2 is shown in FIG. 89 (B).

The first conversation effect display KD1 includes a character image display KG1 that displays the appearance of the character CH1, a character name display KN1 that displays the name of the character CH1 (“Kenji”), and lines of the character CH1 (“Today is good weather”). It is configured to include a dialogue display KS1 that displays "Dane"). Dialogue display In KS1, a frame-shaped image showing a certain range (“range”) for making it easy to understand the range of one line, making it easy to understand which character's line is, and making the line stand out. KW1 (also referred to as "picture") is also displayed together with the dialogue. Similarly, the second conversation effect display KD2 includes a character image display KG2 that displays the appearance of the character CH2 different from the character CH1, a character name display KN2 that displays the name of the character CH2 (“Pamela”), and a character. It is configured to include a dialogue display KS2 that displays dialogue by CH2 (“I'm glad you're sick”). In the dialogue display KS2, the range image KW2 is also displayed.

In the first conversation effect display KD1, the character image display KG1, the character name display KN1, the dialogue display KS1 and the range image KW1 are predetermined display components in one game as each display component constituting the first conversation effect display KD1. It is displayed in a predetermined area of the image display unit DP at the same timing. Similarly, in the second conversation effect display KD2, the character image display KG2, the character name display KN2, the dialogue display KS2, and the range image KW2 are in one game as each display component constituting the second conversation effect display KD2. It is displayed in another predetermined area of the image display unit DP (for example, an area that does not overlap with the area where the first conversation image KG1 is displayed) at the same predetermined timing. As an example of modification, for example, in the first conversation effect display KD1, the character image display KG1 and the character name display KN1 are displayed first, and then (for example, after 0.2 seconds), the dialogue display KS1 is displayed together with the range image KW1. The display timing may be slightly different between the display components. This point is the same for the second conversation effect display KD2.

Regarding the timing at which the conversation effect display is displayed, a predetermined switch controlled by the main control means side (for example, a bet switch, a start lever, a stop switch, etc., which are collectively referred to as a "main side switch") is operated. Arbitrary timing triggered by this (display trigger) can be appropriately set as the display timing (display start timing) of the conversation effect display. For example, in one game, when the operation of the start lever is effectively accepted, a predetermined timing after the time when the start lever accepts the operation (also referred to as "lever operation acceptance") (at the time of lever operation acceptance). The first conversation effect display KD1 may be displayed on the image display unit DP at the same timing as or at the timing when a predetermined time has elapsed from the time when the lever operation is received. Also, during the same game, when any of the three stop switches effectively accepts the first stop operation, the first stop operation is effectively accepted (at the time when the first stop operation is accepted). The second conversation effect display KD2 is displayed on the image display unit DP at a predetermined timing thereafter (the same timing as when the first stop operation is accepted or when a predetermined time has elapsed from the reception of the first stop operation). You may do so. Further, when the first conversation effect display KD1 to the second conversation effect display KD2 are displayed at the timing when the third stop operation is accepted, the operation reception of the bet switch for starting the next game or the operation of the start lever is performed. When the reception is performed, the first conversation effect display KD1 and the second conversation effect display KD2 displayed on the image display unit DP are configured to be erased, and the bet switch for starting the next game is used. When the operation reception or the operation reception of the start lever is performed and the first conversation effect display KD1 to the second conversation effect display KD2 are erased, all the voices of the dialogue output from the voice output unit are still output. If not, the first conversation effect display KD1 to the second conversation effect display KD2 on the image display unit DP are erased, but the voice of the dialogue may be output to the end. However, if a production that the player wants to pay attention to, such as a rare role announcement or freeze, or a new conversation production is selected by the reception of the start lever operation of the next game, the voice of the dialogue will be output at the timing after the reception of the start lever operation. It will be canceled. With this configuration, even a player who wants to advance the game quickly can understand the content of the production. Needless to say, the voice of the dialogue may be erased together with the erasure of the first conversation effect display KD1 to the second conversation effect display KD2 on the image display unit DP.

As the timing at which the conversation effect display is displayed, any timing triggered by the operation of the sub button controlled by the sub control means side (display trigger) can be set as the display timing of the conversation effect display. For example, during one game, an image prompting the player to operate the sub button (for example, an image in which the image of the sub button and the character "PUSH" are combined) is displayed on the image display unit DP. Then, the sub-button is effectively operated according to the display (including the case where it is effective by being operated once and the case where it is effective by being operated continuously a predetermined number of times). As a result, at a predetermined timing after the time when the sub button is operated (also referred to as "sub button operation") (the same timing as the sub button operation or the timing when the predetermined time elapses from the sub button operation). The conversation effect display KD1 of 1 and the second conversation effect display KD2 may be displayed on the image display unit DP. Further, as the timing at which the conversation effect display is displayed, in the case of a pachinko machine, for example, the timing when a predetermined time has elapsed from the time when the game ball wins the start opening (also referred to as “starting opening winning”) is the conversation. It can be set as the display timing of the effect display.

In one game, there are cases where none of the conversation effects are displayed, cases where only one is displayed, and cases where a plurality of conversation effects are displayed. 1 The difference in the number of conversation effect displays displayed during the game may not be related to the game result, or the game result may be different due to the difference in the number. For example, the expectation of giving an advantageous game may be higher when two or more conversation effects are displayed than when only one conversation effect display is displayed during one game. Whether or not the conversation effect display can be displayed, the type and number of dialogue effect displays to be displayed (for example, the type of dialogue in the dialogue display), the display timing, etc. are determined, for example, in the gaming state (for example, whether or not the dialogue is in an advantageous section). , Determined based on the result of the internal lottery (for example, whether or not the rare role is won), and the result of other lottery such as AT lottery and AT additional lottery (based on satisfying any other predetermined conditions). May be decided). When a plurality of conversation effect displays are displayed, only one conversation effect display is displayed at most for each display trigger.

For example, in the case where the first conversation effect display KD1 and the second conversation effect display KD2 are displayed during one game, when the first conversation effect display KD1 is displayed triggered by the operation of the start lever, the first The conversation effect display KD2 of 2 is displayed after any one of the three stop switches effectively accepts the first stop operation. That is, the second conversation effect display KD2 is not displayed before the first stop operation is effectively accepted (it is also possible to provide a case where it is displayed). As a result, for example, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by making the expectation of giving an advantageous game different depending on the timing at which the conversation effect display is displayed. In addition, by making it possible to display up to one per display opportunity, it is possible to prevent the player from misidentifying the opportunity for displaying the conversation effect display or confusing the displayed multiple conversation effect displays. It becomes possible to do.

Three or more conversation effect displays may be displayed on the image display unit DP during one game. For example, after the first conversation effect display KD1 is displayed triggered by the reception of the start lever operation and the second conversation effect display KD2 is displayed triggered by the reception of the first stop operation, the remaining 2 in the same game. When one of the stop switches effectively accepts the second stop operation, the predetermined timing after the reception of the second stop operation (the same timing as the reception of the second stop operation or the second stop operation) The third conversation effect display (not shown) is displayed at the timing when a predetermined time has elapsed from the time of reception), and the remaining one stop switch effectively accepts the third stop operation. (3) The fourth conversation effect display (not shown) is displayed at a predetermined timing after the reception of the third stop operation (the same timing as the reception of the third stop operation or the timing when the predetermined time has elapsed from the reception of the third stop operation). It may be displayed. The character in the third conversation effect display and the character in the fourth conversation effect display may be different characters from the character CH1 and the character CH2, or may be the same character.

When a plurality of conversation effect displays are displayed on the image display unit DP during one game, the conversation effect display displayed earlier is deleted from the image display unit DP even if the conversation effect display displayed later is displayed. It is displayed continuously without being displayed (hidden). For example, in the above example, the first conversation effect display KD1 displayed earlier is continuously displayed as it is without being hidden even if the second conversation effect display KD2 is displayed, and then the third conversation effect display KD2 is displayed. Even if the conversation effect display of is displayed, the first and second conversation effect displays KD1 and KD2 are not hidden and are continuously displayed as they are. Further, after that, even if the fourth conversation effect display is displayed, the first to third conversation effect displays are displayed without being hidden at that time. In this way, by making the conversation effect display displayed earlier continue to be displayed even if the conversation effect display displayed later is displayed, a plurality of conversation effect displays can be displayed simultaneously in one game. It can be displayed on the image display unit DP (so that the display periods of the conversation effect displays partially overlap each other). As a result, it is possible to obtain an effect that makes the image display unit DP look lively by displaying a plurality of conversation effects. In addition, when the player is likely to feel tired due to a gaming state (for example, during a non-advantageous section) in which it is unlikely that a favorable game result will be obtained for the player, a plurality of conversation effect displays may be displayed. By displaying the display throughout the game, it is possible to direct the player's consciousness to the conversation effect display and reduce the player's fatigue. In addition, the degree of expectation for giving an advantageous game may differ depending on when the conversation effect display is displayed, and in that case, the player can be interested in the display timing of the conversation effect. , It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the conversation effect display, what is the content of the character's dialogue (for example, the content of the dialogue display KS1 in the first conversation effect display KD1 and the content of the dialogue display KS2 in the second conversation effect display KD2)? However, it may not be related to the game result, or the game result may differ depending on the content of the dialogue. For example, there are cases where the content of the dialogue display KS2 is "I like it" (see FIG. 89 (B)) and "It really is" (see FIG. 90). It may be set so as not to affect the game result in any way, or it may be set so that the expectation of giving an advantageous game is higher in the latter case than in the former case. In addition, the content of the dialogue may be changed when the sub button is operated. In addition, as the case where the dialogue content changes due to the operation of the sub button, the dialogue is displayed (the dialogue display starts to be displayed) due to the operation of the sub button, and the sub after the dialogue is displayed. There may be a case where the content of the dialogue is changed by operating the button. If the content of the dialogue changes due to the operation of the sub button after the dialogue is displayed (the dialogue voice is also output at the same time), enable the operation of the sub button (operation reception) while the dialogue voice is not finished. Alternatively, the operation of the sub button may be enabled after the dialogue voice is finished. When the operation of the sub button is enabled when the dialogue voice is not finished, if the sub button is operated in the middle of the dialogue voice, the dialogue being output is interrupted and a new dialogue is output, so the result of the game It will be a specification preferred by players who want to know quickly. Further, when the operation of the sub button is enabled after the dialogue voice is finished, the dialogue is not interrupted, so that the specification is preferred by the player who wants to enjoy the production.

In addition, the characters in the dialogue display in the conversation effect display may always have the same font (font and style), the same size (size), and the same color, and the font and size may be changed depending on the game situation and the display timing of the conversation effect display. The colors and the like may be different. Then, the degree of expectation for giving an advantageous game may be different depending on the difference in font, size, color, and the like. For example, as a serif display, the color of either one or both of the outline (outline) of the character and the area inside the outline is displayed in blue in addition to the normal color (for example, black or white). A mode (also referred to as "blue line display") and a mode displayed in red (also referred to as "red line display") may be provided. In that case, the red line display is better than the blue line display. The degree of expectation for imparting an advantageous game may be increased.

As an example, in Fig. 91 (A), for the character Kenji's line "It's a nice day today", the blue line is displayed with the area inside the outline of the character blue, and for the character Pamela's line "Really so". , An example of red serif display in which the outline of the character is red (the area inside the outline is outlined) is shown. In this example, the size of the characters displayed in red serif is made larger than the size of the characters displayed in blue serif, and it is highly expected that the red serif display will give a more advantageous game due to the difference in size. Suggesting to the person. In the red dialogue display, not only the character size of the dialogue display but also the character size of the character image display and the character size of the character name display may be increased. That is, in the red dialogue display, any one or two or all of the character size of the dialogue display, the character size of the character name display, and the character size may be larger than those of the blue dialogue display (characters, etc.). You may change only the color of, and the font size etc. may be the same). When a plurality of conversation effect displays are displayed during one game, one type of size and font is used for the dialogue display characters in the first conversation effect display (for example, the first conversation effect display KD1). The characters in the dialogue display on the second and subsequent conversation effect displays (for example, the first conversation effect display KD1) may have a plurality of types having different sizes and fonts.

When displaying multiple conversation effect displays with different expectations for giving an advantageous game, such as the blue line display and the red line display, the conversation effect display with the higher expectation is later. It is designed to be displayed from (It is also possible to provide a case where it is displayed first). Therefore, when a plurality of conversation effect displays are displayed during one game, the conversation effect display displayed first (for example, the first conversation effect display KD1) is based on the dialogue display in normal colors or the color with low expectation. The dialogue display is easy to display, and in the conversation effect display (for example, the second conversation effect display KD2) displayed after the second, the dialogue display in a color with high expectation is easily displayed. In the case of the blue serif display and the red serif display, for example, the blue serif display is displayed when the start lever operation is accepted, and the red serif display is displayed when the first stop operation is accepted. It should be noted that there may be a case where the red serif display having a relatively high expectation is displayed so as to overlap the blue serif display having a relatively low expectation. When displaying in layers, some or all of the characters in the blue serif display may be hidden by the red serif display (see Fig. 90 (B)), and the characters in the blue serif display should not be hidden. The red dialogue display may be superimposed (see FIG. 91 (A)). When the second conversation effect display KD2 is displayed after the first conversation effect display KD1, the color indicating the expectation of the second conversation effect display KD2 indicates the expectation of the first conversation effect display KD1. It does not display colors that are less than expected than the colors shown. This is also applied when the third conversation effect display or the fourth conversation effect display is displayed, and the degree of expectation displayed in the previous conversation effect in the later conversation effect is displayed. It will never fall below. This is how much you expect when you first display the high-expected red serif display on the first conversation effect display KD1 and then display the low-expected blue serif display on the second conversation effect display KD2. It prevents it from becoming difficult to tell if there is a degree. It should be noted that displaying the red dialogue display on the first conversation effect display KD1 and then displaying the dialogue display in the normal mode on the second conversation effect display KD2 does not cause confusion for the player, so there is no problem. In addition, when the conversation effect occurs before and after the reach effect on the pachinko machine, the expectation of the conversation effect display displayed after the reach effect is lower than the expectation of the conversation effect display displayed before the reach effect. May be good. This is because the expectation is gradually increasing because the reach effect is sandwiched between them. For example, before the reach production, the player is interested in whether or not to reach, so if the red dialogue of the conversation production appears at this stage, the player expects whether or not to reach. On the other hand, since there is an interest in whether or not it will be a big hit after the reach production, if the blue dialogue of the conversation production appears at this stage, the player expects whether or not it will be a big hit. Since the expected targets are different in this way, it is possible to make the production composition easy to understand even if the degree of expectation drops before and after the reach production. The characters displayed in the conversation effect before and after the reach effect may be the same character, or the same character may be displayed in a different manner (for example, different costumes and facial expressions). , May be another character.

The colors of characters and the like (colors other than normal colors) in the serif display are not limited to blue and red. For example, in addition to the blue line display and the red line display, the green line display that makes the characters green, and the pattern line display that makes the characters a specific pattern (for example, a pattern that symbolizes the game machine maker). A rainbow serif display in which characters and the like are rainbow-colored may be provided. Then, the expectation of giving an advantageous game may be increased in the order of blue serif display <green serif display <red serif display <pattern serif display <rainbow serif display. At that time, in the case of the serif display with the highest expectation (in this example, the rainbow serif display), a definite effect with 100% expectation (for example, AT confirmation, bonus confirmation, jackpot confirmation, etc.) may be used.

The dialogue display in the conversation effect display is usually composed of words and sentences in characters that the player can understand the meaning of. However, it may be composed of characters whose meaning cannot be understood, for example, characters in ancient languages, characters that look like garbled characters, or characters that include figures, symbols (▽, ●, *), and the like. When a serif display containing characters whose meaning cannot be understood is displayed, the expectation of giving an advantageous game is higher than when a serif display composed of characters whose meaning can be understood is displayed. You may do so. In addition, the character string (sentence) in the serif display may be displayed on one line (see FIG. 89) or may be displayed over two or more lines with line breaks (consisting of two or more sentences). (Including) (see FIG. 90).

Both the range image KW1 in the first conversation effect display KD1 and the range image KW2 in the second conversation effect display KD2 have a so-called balloon shape, but the shape of the range image is not limited to such a shape and is arbitrary. Can be in the shape of. The shape of the range image may always be the same, or may be different depending on the game situation and the display timing of the conversation effect display. Then, the degree of expectation for the game result may be different depending on the shape of the range image. For example, there are cases where a range image is displayed in the shape of a balloon and cases where a range image is displayed in the shape of an arrow. It may be increased. It should be noted that such a range image may not be displayed, and the characters of the serif display may be displayed in a bare state (a state not surrounded by a frame or the like).

Further, the colors and patterns of the area inside the outer line of the range image may always be the same, or may be different depending on the game situation and the display timing of the conversation effect display. Then, the degree of expectation for imparting an advantageous game may differ depending on the difference in the color, pattern, etc. of the region inside the outer line. For example, in addition to the mode in which the area inside the outline of the range image is displayed in normal color, the mode in which it is displayed in blue (also included in the blue serif display) and the mode in which it is displayed in red (also red serif). In some cases (included in the display), the mode displayed in red may be more expected to give an advantageous game than the mode displayed in blue.

As an example, in FIG. 90 (A), for the character Kenji line display, the area inside the outer line of the range image is blue, and for the character pamela line display, the area inside the outer line of the range image. An example of red serif display with red is shown. The color of the area inside the outline of the range image is not limited to blue and red. For example, the area inside the outline of the range image is green (also included in the green dialogue display), a specific pattern pattern (also included in the pattern dialogue display), and rainbow-colored (this is also included in the pattern dialogue display). May be included in the rainbow dialogue display). Further, in the example of FIG. 90 (A), there may be a case where the red serif display is displayed so as to overlap the blue serif display.

The character image display in the conversation effect display may always have the same mode for the same character, or may be the same character or different depending on the game situation and the display timing of the conversation effect display. Then, the degree of expectation for imparting an advantageous game may differ depending on the mode of character image display. For example, in the case where the character image KG1 in the first conversation effect display KD1 is displayed in a state of wearing a hat and in a state of not wearing a hat, it is displayed in a state of wearing a hat. The degree of expectation for imparting an advantageous game may be increased in the mode in which the game is performed as compared with the mode in which the game is not suffered.

When the conversation effect display is displayed on the image display unit DP, an effect display (different image) of a different type from the conversation effect display may be displayed on the same image display unit DP. In such a case, the conversation effect display and another effect display can be drawn on another layer (layer) by using the layer function installed in the graphic software used for image creation. For example, when an image composed of a moving image or a still image (also referred to as a "background image") is displayed so as to occupy almost the entire area in the screen of the image display unit DP, a part area of the background image is displayed. When it is desired to display the conversation effect display so as to overlap with, the conversation effect display can be drawn on the layer on the front side (front side close to the player) of the layer on which the background image is drawn. By doing so, even if the conversation effect display is displayed overlaid on the background image, the visibility of the conversation effect display can be sufficiently ensured. When displaying a plurality of conversation effect displays, each conversation effect display may be drawn on a separate layer.

If an error occurs while the conversation effect display is displayed on the image display unit DP, an error notification display for notifying the occurrence of the error may be displayed on the image display unit DP. In this case, the error notification display is drawn on the layer in front of the layer on which the conversation effect display is drawn, and is displayed so as to overlap the conversation effect display. As an example, FIG. 91B shows an example in which the HP error notification display for notifying the occurrence of an HP error is displayed so as to overlap the conversation effect display. In this example, the HP error notification display hides the dialogue display of the conversation effect display, making it impossible to visually recognize the contents. In this way, when the conversation effect display and the error notification display are displayed on the image display unit DP at the same time, the error notification display is displayed overlapping with the dialogue display of the conversation effect display, and the content of the dialogue display becomes invisible (line). It is also possible to display an error notification display so that the contents of the display can be visually recognized). When displaying an error notification, there are cases where a communication error or a door opening error occurs in addition to the time when various errors described in the description of the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment occur. In the case of a pachinko machine, left-handed There are warnings and when a lower plate full tank error occurs. In addition, although it is not an error, there is a reel rotation stop suggestion image as a notification effect to the player in the slot machine. This is an effect in which "Please stop the reel" is displayed on the image display unit when the rotation of the reel has elapsed for a predetermined time (for example, 1 minute). Even when the reel rotation stop suggestion image is displayed, it is displayed in front of the conversation effect display (layer on the front side), so the conversation effect display is difficult to see (all may not be visible or only a part may not be visible). ). For this reason, the characters "Please stop the reels" are displayed in an easy-to-understand manner, which effectively alerts the player. It should be noted that the reel rotation stop suggestion image may be deleted when the stop operation is accepted for one of the plurality of rotating reels, or is deleted when the stop operation is accepted for all the reels. You may. Also, even when the volume change image is displayed due to the reception of the volume change button during the game (reel rotation in the case of a slot machine, fluctuation in the case of a pachinko machine), the volume is displayed in front of the conversation effect display. The changed image is displayed. The volume change image is a meter display showing the volume level, and the display ends after the determination operation or the passage of time after the volume change, and the conversation effect display becomes visible again.

When the assist effect is displayed on the image display unit DP, the conversation effect display may be displayed on the image display unit DP. As an example, FIG. 92 shows an embodiment in which the conversation effect display is displayed when the push navigation effect display (particularly the push order navigation effect display for notifying the push order) is displayed on the image display unit DP. .. In the case of this example, as shown in FIG. 92 (A), a push navigation effect display that informs the push order of "middle left and right" from the first stop operation to the third stop operation is displayed in the lower area of the image display unit DP. When it is displayed, the conversation effect display of the character Kenji is displayed. At this time, Kenji's conversation effect display is displayed in an area above the display area of the push navigation effect display so as not to overlap with the push navigation effect display. Further, as shown in FIG. 92 (B), after the first stop operation is accepted, the push navigation effect display for notifying the "left and right" push order from the second stop operation to the third stop operation is the lower part of the image display unit DP. When it is displayed in the area of, the conversation effect display of the character Pamela is displayed. At this time, the conversation effect display of Pamela is displayed in an area above the display area of the push navigation effect display so as not to overlap with the push navigation effect display.

In this way, when the conversation effect display is displayed on the image display unit DP while the assist effect is displayed on the image display unit DP, the conversation effect display is displayed so as not to overlap with the push navigation effect display. More specifically, the dialogue display and the character name display in the conversation effect display are displayed without overlapping with the push navigation effect display, while a part of the character image display (for example, the body and hand part of the character) is displayed. It may be displayed overlapping with the push navigation effect display. In that case, for example, the conversation effect display is drawn on the back layer (rear side away from the player), and the push navigation effect display is drawn on the front layer, thereby ensuring the visibility of the push navigation effect display. It is supposed to be done. In addition, there may be a case where a part of the dialogue display and the character name display in the conversation effect display is displayed so as to overlap with the push navigation effect display. Even in that case, for example, the conversation effect display is drawn on the back layer and the push navigation effect display is drawn on the front layer so that the visibility of the push navigation effect display is ensured. It is preferable to do. In addition, in the dialogue effect display lines shown in FIGS. 92 (A) and 92 (B) (“It seems that you should press according to the push order navigation”, “Follow the navigation”), the content of the dialogue in the conversation effect display is the game method. The case where the content is related to is illustrated. In addition to this, the contents related to the game method are "It seems to be hot to pull a watermelon during the special zone", "Push from the left during normal times", "Follow the navigation during AT", "Normal" It can be various contents such as "a chance when a UFO appears somewhere in the background image".

When the conversation effect display is displayed on the image display unit DP, the conversation effect voice is output from the audio output unit in synchronization with the display timing (display start timing). The conversation effect voice is basically the same as the character's dialogue content in the conversation effect display. For example, when the content of the dialogue display KS1 in the first conversation effect display KD1 is "Today is good weather", the corresponding conversation effect voice is "Today is good". On the other hand, there may be a case where a voice having a content different from the dialogue content of the character in the conversation effect display is output as the conversation effect sound. For example, if the content of the dialogue display KS1 is unclear, such as "* ↓ ● // g ◇ #", a conversation production voice with an understandable content "Today is good" is output. You may try to do it. Then, when the content of the dialogue in the conversation effect display and the content of the conversation effect voice are different, the degree of expectation for imparting an advantageous game may be increased as compared with the case where both contents match.

<Subtitle production>
The subtitle effect (also referred to as "telop effect") is, for example, a character that a character appearing in a background image (moving image) makes a statement (either a statement during a conversation with another character or a single statement) and indicates the content of the statement. However, it is a production that makes it look like a telop or movie subtitles that appear on the screen being broadcast on TV. The subtitle production mainly plays a role of informing the player of the contents related to the game, such as suggesting the progress of the game, but plays a role of informing the player of the contents not related to the game. May be good. In the subtitle effect, the subtitle effect display for the subtitle effect is displayed on the image display unit DP at a predetermined timing. In addition, the subtitle effect may play a role of informing the player of the content related to the game result, such as suggesting the degree of expectation for imparting an advantageous game. Advantageous games are games that are more advantageous to the player than usual (for example, games during AT (including during ART) on slot machines, bonus games, games during jackpots on pachinko machines, probability fluctuation games, or time saving games. It refers to a game, etc. (collectively referred to as an "advantageous game"). In addition, the degree of expectation for granting an advantageous game increases the probability of executing the advantageous game or permitting the execution of the advantageous game. Game results (including cases where it becomes 100%) (For example, AT winning in slot machines, AT extra winning, extra winning with a large number of AT additions, bonus winning, advantageous bonus winning, rare role winning, big hit winning in pachinko machines, Probability change jackpot (big hit that is more advantageous than no probability change jackpot), 16 round jackpot (big hit with many big hits), etc.) is the degree of expectation (reliability, accuracy) to be obtained. At a predetermined timing, the subtitle effect display for subtitle effect is displayed on the image display unit DP.

The subtitle effect display is a display related to the remark of the character appearing in the background image, and is configured to include a display that can be identified as a character. The display that can be identified as a character is, for example, a display of characters (also referred to as “telop display”) indicating the content of the character's speech (corresponding to a dialogue in a conversation effect display). It should be noted that when the subtitle effect display is displayed, the character does not necessarily have to be displayed in the background image, and in short, if the background image has a character display, the requirements for the subtitle effect display are satisfied. The subtitle effect display is drawn on the layer on the front side (front side close to the player) of the layer on which the background image is drawn. Therefore, even if the subtitle effect display is displayed overlaid on the background image, the legibility of the subtitle effect display (particularly the telop display) is sufficiently ensured. As an example of the subtitle effect display, the first subtitle effect display JD1 is shown in FIG. 93 (A), and the second subtitle effect display JD2 is shown in FIG. 93 (B).

The first subtitle effect display JD1 indicates the content of remarks of the character CH1 appearing in one scene in the background image HG1 displayed on the image display unit DP during one game (“It looks like a chance in good weather!”). It is configured to include the telop display JT1. As described above, the first subtitle effect display JD1 is configured to include the telop display JT1, and the display indicating the name (“Kenji”) of the character CH1 (referred to as “character name display” as in the conversation effect display) is Not included. In the second subtitle effect display JD2, another remark content of the character CH1 appearing in another scene in the background image HG1 displayed on the image display unit DP during the same one game (“Weather has become suspicious”). ! ”) Is included in the telop display JT2. As described above, the second subtitle effect display JD2 is configured to include the telop display JT2 and does not include the character name display (it is also possible to provide the subtitle effect display configured to include the character name display). In the telop display, the name of the character may be displayed as a part of the content of the statement. The name display in that case is considered to be different from the character name display.

Regarding the timing at which the subtitle effect display is displayed, the subtitles can be set to any timing triggered by the operation of a predetermined switch controlled by the main control means such as the bet switch, start lever, and stop switch (display trigger). It can be appropriately set as the display timing (display start timing) of the effect display. For example, in one game, when the operation of the start lever is effectively accepted, the predetermined timing (at the same time as the lever operation is accepted) after the time when the start lever is effectively accepted (at the time of accepting the lever operation). Alternatively, the first subtitle effect display JD1 may be displayed on the image display unit DP) at a time when a predetermined time has elapsed from the time when the lever operation is received. Also, during the same game, when any of the three stop switches effectively accepts the first stop operation, the first stop operation is effectively accepted (at the time when the first stop operation is accepted). The second subtitle effect display JD2 may appear on the image display unit DP at a predetermined timing thereafter (at the same time as the reception of the first stop operation or when a predetermined time has elapsed from the reception of the first stop operation). .. Further, as the timing at which the subtitle effect display is displayed, in the case of a pachinko machine, for example, a predetermined time has elapsed from the time when the game ball wins a prize at the start opening (also referred to as "starting opening winning" or "variation start"). From the timing of the time point, any time in the situation where the SP reach effect after the reach is established, or the time when the big winning opening is opened (also called "when the big winning opening is opened" or "at the start of the big hit") The timing when the predetermined time has elapsed, or the timing when the predetermined time has elapsed from the time when the game ball wins the big prize opening (also referred to as "the big winning opening winning time") is set as the display timing of the subtitle effect display. can do.

In one game, the subtitle effect display may not be displayed at all, only one may be displayed, or a plurality of subtitles may be displayed. Whether or not the subtitle effect display can be displayed, the type (for example, the type of the content of the telop display) and the number of the subtitle effect display to be displayed, the display timing, etc. are determined by, for example, the gaming state (for example, whether or not the section is advantageous). , Determined based on the result of the internal lottery (for example, whether or not the rare role is won), and the result of other lottery such as AT lottery and AT additional lottery (based on satisfying any other predetermined conditions). May be decided). Even if the results of the internal lottery are the same, the subtitle effect display is more likely to be displayed in the advantageous section than in the non-advantageous section. When a plurality of subtitle effect displays are displayed, a plurality of subtitle effect displays may be displayed for each display trigger. For example, in the case where the first subtitle effect display JD1 and the second subtitle effect display JD2 are displayed during one game, the first subtitle effect display JD1 is displayed when the start lever operation is accepted, and further 3 The second subtitle effect display JD2 may be displayed before any one of the stop switches effectively accepts the first stop operation (up to one can be displayed per display trigger). Also possible).

Three or more subtitle effect displays may be displayed on the image display unit DP during one game. For example, after the first subtitle effect display JD1 is displayed triggered by the reception of the start lever operation and the second subtitle effect display JD2 is displayed triggered by the reception of the first stop operation, the remaining 2 in the same game. When one of the stop switches effectively accepts the second stop operation, the predetermined timing (second) after the time when the second stop operation is effectively accepted (at the time of accepting the second stop operation). The third subtitle effect display (not shown) is displayed at a predetermined timing after the stop operation is received at the same time or at a predetermined time after the second stop operation is received), and the remaining one stop switch is the first. (3) With the effective acceptance of the third stop operation, the predetermined timing (at the same time as the reception of the third stop operation or the third stop) after the time when the third stop operation is effectively accepted (at the time of accepting the third stop operation) The fourth subtitle effect display (not shown) may be displayed at a predetermined timing after the predetermined time has elapsed from the time when the operation is received.

In addition, the ratio when the subtitle effect display is displayed when the start lever operation is accepted (including 0% and 100%; the same applies hereinafter) and the subtitle effect display when the third stop operation is accepted. Comparing with the ratio when it is displayed, the ratio when the subtitle effect display is displayed triggered by the reception of the third stop operation is relatively higher. This takes into consideration the psychology of the player who wants to concentrate on the operation of the stop switch after operating the start lever, and by relatively increasing the ratio of displaying the subtitle effect display after the third stop operation, the player subtitles. It becomes easier to pay attention to the production display. In addition, when the background image is a one-shot effect (an effect that starts and ends during one game), the subtitle effect display is rarely displayed triggered by the reception of the first stop operation or the reception of the second stop operation, but the background. When the image is a continuous effect (an effect that is continued over a plurality of games), the subtitle effect display is often displayed triggered by the reception of the first stop operation or the reception of the second stop operation. For example, comparing the case where the subtitle effect display is displayed when the background image is a single effect (referred to as H1) and the case where the subtitle effect display is displayed when the background image is a continuous effect (referred to as H2). In case H2, the ratio of displaying the subtitle effect display triggered by the reception of the first stop operation is relatively higher than that in case H1. This is because the continuous production plays the role of notifying a predetermined game result (AT winning, etc.) that is of great interest to the player, and in order to draw attention to the production content, the production content is often advanced for each stop operation reception. Therefore, it is easy to provide an opportunity to display the subtitle effect display according to the progress of the continuous effect triggered by the reception of the first stop operation and the reception of the second stop operation. By displaying the subtitle effect display, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the content of the continuous effect (progress of the effect).

When a plurality of subtitle effect displays are displayed on the image display unit DP during one game, the subtitle effect display displayed earlier is deleted from the image display unit DP when the subtitle effect display displayed later is displayed. Has been (hidden). That is, the subtitle effect display displayed earlier is deleted from the image display unit DP before the subtitle effect display displayed later is displayed (including substantially simultaneous timing). For example, in the above example, the first subtitle effect display JD1 displayed earlier is hidden before the second subtitle effect display JD2 is displayed, and the second subtitle effect display JD2 is the third. The subtitle effect display is hidden before the display, and the third subtitle effect display is hidden before the fourth subtitle effect display is displayed. In this way, the subtitle effect display displayed earlier is hidden before the subtitle effect display displayed later is displayed, so that the subtitles are appropriately subtitled according to the progress of the game or the background image. Subtitles can be produced while switching the effect display. Therefore, it is possible to execute a subtitle effect with a good tempo that is consistent with the progress of the game and the background image.

The subtitle effect display may be hidden when a predetermined time has elapsed after being displayed, or may be hidden when a predetermined switch is operated. , It may be hidden when the next subtitle effect display is displayed. For example, the subtitle effect display displayed when the start lever operation reception is accepted may be hidden when any of the stop operations from the first stop operation to the third stop operation is accepted, or the stop operation reception may be performed. Is hidden when a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed from the start of display, or if the next subtitle effect display is displayed even before the first stop operation is accepted, the subtitle display effect is displayed. It may be hidden just before it is displayed. As a specific example, in the case where the first subtitle effect display JD1 is displayed when the start lever operation is accepted and the second subtitle effect display JD2 is displayed when the third stop operation is accepted, the third subtitle effect display JD2 is displayed. After receiving the stop operation, the first subtitle effect display JD1 may be hidden first, and then the second subtitle effect display may be displayed.

The subtitle effect display may be displayed according to the movement of the character appearing in the background image (for example, the movement of the mouth, eyes, or hand). For example, the background image HG1 (moving image) is started to be displayed at the same time as the lever operation, and when a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) has elapsed from the start, the character CH1 in the background image HG1 moves its mouth (referred to as scene A). In a certain case, the first subtitle effect display JD1 may be displayed according to the scene A. In order to match the timing of the scene A with the display timing of the first subtitle effect display JD1, the following method may be adopted. As a premise, the sub-main control means receives the result of the internal lottery performed on the main control means side at the time of receiving the lever operation, and whether or not the background image and the subtitle effect display can be executed and the display contents are selected, and as a result, the background is selected. It is assumed that the display of the image HG1 and the display of the first subtitle effect display JD1 have been decided.

In that case, first, the sub-main control means sends a command (referred to as command A) for transmitting the determination result to the sub-sub-control means. Upon receiving the command A, the sub-sub control means reads the image file of the background image HG1 and starts displaying the background image HG1 on the image display unit DP, and at the same time, reads out the image file of the first subtitle effect display JD1. The first subtitle effect display JD1 is displayed on the image display unit DP according to the timing of the scene A (for example, determined by the number of frames leading to the scene A, the frame rate, and the like). A counter for timing may be set, and the timing of the scene A may be measured by this counter. The counter may be set by the sub-main control means or the sub-sub control means. When the counter is set by the sub-main control means, it may be set when the command A is transmitted, or when the sub-sub control means reads the image file of the background image HG1, the command (referred to as command B) is sub-main controlled. This command B may be set at the timing received by the sub-main control means by transmitting to the means. Then, when a predetermined time is reached after the counter is set, a command (called command C) for transmitting the arrival of time is transmitted to the sub-sub control means, and the sub-sub control means is the first at the timing when this command C is received. The subtitle effect display JD1 is displayed on the image display unit DP. The subtitle effect display is drawn on a layer on the front side (front side close to the player) of the layer on which the background image is drawn. By doing so, even if the subtitle effect display is displayed overlaid on the background image, the visibility of the subtitle effect display (particularly the telop display) can be sufficiently ensured.

In the subtitle effect display, what is the content of the telop display (for example, the content of the telop display JT1 in the first subtitle effect display JD1 and the content of the telop display JT2 in the second subtitle effect display JD2)? However, it may not be related to the game result, or the degree of expectation for giving an advantageous game may differ depending on the content of the telop display. For example, when the content of the telop display JT2 is "The weather is getting worse!" (See Fig. 93 (B)) and "It is a perfect sunny day in Japan !!" (See Fig. 94 (B)). In some cases, it may be set so as not to affect the degree of expectation of giving an advantageous game in either case, and the expectation of giving an advantageous game in the latter case than in the former case. It may be set to increase the degree. Further, the content of the telop display may be changed when the sub button is operated. In addition, there are conversation effect and subtitle effect as the effect that the display content changes depending on the operation reception of the sub button, but it is relatively that the display content changes by the sub button operation reception in the conversation effect rather than the subtitle effect. There are many. Further, in the pachinko machine, the conversation effect and the subtitle effect may be displayed during one fluctuation, and in such a configuration, the conversation effect and the subtitle effect may not be related to each other. For example, the conversation effect is displayed in red lines, but the subtitle effect is displayed in blue characters. In particular, when the conversation effect is displayed before the reach effect and the subtitle effect is displayed after the reach effect, the expected target is different, which is more preferable. Further, it is conceivable that the first subtitle effect display JD1 has white characters and the second subtitle effect display JD2 has red characters, so that the degree of expectation increases. Furthermore, although the second subtitle effect display JD2 is in red characters, the third subtitle effect display may be in white characters, so that the degree of expectation is lowered. This aspect is preferably used as a subtitle effect when the background image becomes a mode of displaying a failure. For example, when directing whether or not to give advantageous benefits (in the case of slot machines, bonus winning, AT winning, etc., in the case of pachinko machines, whether or not to reach or to win big hits, etc. When the subtitle effect (for example, the characters "Ikuzo!") Is displayed in red in order to raise expectations, the effect of whether or not to grant this advantageous privilege is out of the question. If the subtitle effect (for example, the word "lost") in the scene showing is displayed in red, it will be difficult to tell whether it has come off or revived, so the word "lost" is displayed in white. ..

In addition, the characters in the telop display in the subtitle effect display may always have the same font (font and style), the same size (size), and the same color, and the font and size may be changed depending on the game situation and the display timing of the subtitle effect display. The colors and the like may be different. Then, the degree of expectation for giving an advantageous game may be different depending on the difference in font, size, color, and the like. For example, as a telop display, the color of either one or both of the outline (outline) and the area inside the outline of the character is displayed in blue in addition to the normal color (black or white). A mode (also referred to as "blue telop display") and a mode displayed in red (also referred to as "red telop display") may be provided, in which case the red telop display is more advantageous than the blue telop display. The degree of expectation for granting the game may be increased.

As an example, in FIGS. 94 (A) and 94 (B), for the telop display JT1 "It looks like a chance in good weather!", The blue telop display and the telop display JT2 in which the area inside the outline of the character is blue. For "Perfect Japan Sunny !!", an example of a red telop display in which the area inside the outline of the character is red is shown. In this example, the size of the characters in the red telop display is made larger than the size of the characters in the blue telop display, and the font of the characters in the red telop display is changed. It suggests to the player that the expectation for granting the game is high. When multiple subtitle effect displays are displayed during one game, the size and font of the telop display characters in the subtitle effect display displayed first are set to one type, and the subtitle effect displayed after the second. Regarding the characters of the telop display in the display, there may be a plurality of types having different sizes and fonts. When displaying multiple subtitle effect displays with different expectations for giving an advantageous game, such as the blue telop display and the red telop display, the subtitle effect display with the higher expectation is later. It may be displayed from.

The colors of characters and the like (colors other than normal colors) in the telop display are not limited to blue and red. For example, in addition to the blue telop display and the red telop display, a green telop display in which characters and the like are green and a rainbow telop display in which characters and the like are rainbow colors may be provided. Then, the expectation of giving an advantageous game may be increased in the order of blue telop display <green telop display <red telop display <rainbow telop display. At that time, in the case of the telop display with the highest expectation (in this example, the rainbow telop display), a definite effect with 100% expectation (for example, suggesting AT confirmation, bonus confirmation, jackpot confirmation, etc.) may be used. In the case of the telop display displayed in a specific scene of the background image, the characters or the like may not be displayed in a specific color. For example, when displaying the telop display of the content related to the lyrics in the scene where the character sings on the background screen, the rainbow telop display may not be displayed. In addition, the telop display (rainbow telop display), which is the final effect, is set to be hidden when the player receives an operation of a predetermined switch or the like after the display starts, and is set to be hidden from the start of the display. It will not be hidden when time has passed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused by the fact that the finalized effect disappears with the passage of time. When the demo screen is displayed on the image display unit DP, the rainbow telop display that has been displayed up to that point may be hidden. The telop display of other colors (for example, the blue telop display) may be hidden because a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the display.

The telop display in the subtitle effect display is usually composed of words and sentences in characters that the player can understand the meaning. However, it may be composed of characters whose meaning cannot be understood, for example, characters in ancient languages, characters that look like garbled characters, or characters that include figures, symbols (▽, ●, *), and the like. When a telop display containing characters whose meaning cannot be understood is displayed, the expectation of granting an advantageous game is higher than when a telop display composed of characters whose meaning can be understood is displayed. You may do so. In addition, the character string (sentence) in the telop display is basically displayed on one line without line breaks, but when it is displayed on two or more lines with line breaks (when it is composed of two or more sentences). Including) may be provided.

The characters of the telop display in the subtitle effect display are often displayed in a bare state (a state not surrounded by a frame or the like), but may be displayed in a state of being surrounded by a frame or the like. As an example, FIG. 95 (A) shows a mode in which the characters “weather is getting worse!” Of the telop display JT2 are surrounded by a frame (referred to as a “background frame”) JW1. In the illustrated background frame JW1, the outer outline is rectangular, and the area inside the outer outline is decorated with a predetermined pattern. The aspect of the background frame (the shape of the outer outline and the color and pattern of the area inside the outer outline) is not limited to such an aspect, and may be any aspect (including the aspect without the outer outline). The mode of the background frame may be always the same, or may be different depending on the game situation and the display timing of the conversation effect display. Then, the degree of expectation for imparting an advantageous game may differ depending on the mode of the background frame. For example, in addition to the mode in which the area inside the outline of the background frame is displayed in normal color, the mode in which it is displayed in blue (also included in the blue telop display) and the mode in which it is displayed in red (also in red telop). (Included in the display) may be provided so that the expectation of granting a game that is more advantageous when it is displayed in red than when it is displayed in blue may be increased.

If an error occurs while the subtitle effect display is displayed on the image display unit DP, an error notification display for notifying the occurrence of the error may be displayed on the image display unit DP. In this case, the error notification display is drawn on the layer in front of the layer on which the subtitle effect display is drawn, but is displayed so as not to overlap with the subtitle effect display. As an example, in FIG. 95 (B), in the image display unit DP so that the HP error notification display for notifying the occurrence of the HP error does not overlap with the subtitle effect display JD2, the subtitle effect display JD2 is displayed in the screen rather than the area displayed. An example displayed in the upper area is shown. In this way, when the subtitle effect display and the error notification display are displayed on the image display unit DP at the same time, the error notification display is displayed without overlapping with the subtitle effect display (however, the background image (may include characters). ) May overlap with the error notification display and at least part of it may not be clearly visible), and the visibility of the contents of the telop display is ensured (at least part of the telop display may be hidden by the error notification display). Yes). The types of errors when displaying the error notification are the same as those described in the explanation of the conversation effect. Depending on the type of error, an error may be notified on the full screen (PAM error, error on the sub-control side, etc.). In this case, the telop display may not be visible. Further, even when the above-mentioned reel rotation stop suggestion image is displayed, it does not overlap with the subtitle effect, so that the visibility of the subtitle effect is guaranteed (however, the background image (which may include characters) overlaps with the error notification display and at least. Some may not be clearly visible). Since the reel rotation stop suggestion image is not an error, the moving image related to the subtitle effect is continuously executed. For this reason, it is difficult to grasp the progress of the production unless the character portion of the subtitle production is visible. With such a configuration, it is possible to grasp the content of the production while alerting the player. In addition, even when the volume change image is displayed due to the reception of the volume change button during the game (reel rotation in the case of a slot machine, fluctuation in the case of a pachinko machine), the character part of the subtitle effect is visible. It is possible.

When the assist effect is displayed on the image display unit DP, the subtitle effect display may be displayed on the image display unit DP. As an example, FIG. 96A shows an embodiment in which the subtitle effect display is displayed when the push navigation effect display (push order navigation effect display) is displayed on the image display unit DP. In the case of this example, when the push navigation effect display that informs the push order of "middle left and right" from the first stop operation to the third stop operation is displayed in the lower area in the screen of the image display unit DP, the first The subtitle effect display JD1 of 1 is displayed. The first subtitle effect display JD1 is displayed so as to overlap the push navigation effect display in the lower area of the screen, which is the same position as the area where the push navigation effect display is displayed. At this time, the first subtitle effect display JD1 is drawn and displayed on a layer on the back side (rear side away from the player) from the layer on which the push navigation effect display is drawn. Therefore, while some of the characters of the telop display JT1 are hidden behind the push navigation effect display and cannot be seen, the visibility of the push navigation effect display, which is of great interest to the player, is ensured. In addition, the subtitle effect display may be displayed in an area different from the display area of the push navigation effect display so as not to overlap with the push navigation effect display (however, the background image (which may include characters) may be displayed as the push navigation effect display. Overlapping, at least part of it may not be clearly visible). Further, when the push navigation effect display is displayed, the subtitle effect display may not be displayed. In particular, when displaying the subtitle display effect triggered by the reception of the third stop operation, it is preferable to display the subtitle effect display after the push navigation effect display is hidden. By doing so, the player concentrates on the operation of the stop switch while paying attention to the navigation content while the push navigation effect display is displayed, and subtitles are displayed after the operation is completed and the push navigation effect display is hidden. It becomes possible to pay attention to the production display. In addition, in the push navigation effect display, in addition to the mode of notifying the push order of "middle left and right", the mode of notifying the push order of "left middle right", the mode of notifying the push order of "right middle left", etc. There are multiple types.

When the subtitle effect display is displayed on the image display unit DP, the subtitle effect sound is output from the audio output unit in synchronization with the display timing (display start timing). The subtitle effect audio is basically the same as the content of the telop display in the subtitle effect display. For example, when the content of the telop display JT2 in the second subtitle effect display JD2 is "Perfect Japan sunny !!", the corresponding subtitle effect sound is "Kanpekinanihonbare". On the other hand, there may be a case where a sound having a content different from the content of the telop display in the subtitle effect display is output as the subtitle effect sound. For example, as shown in FIG. 96 (B), when the content of the telop display JT2 is garbled, such as "▲ /% * p ・ n ↑ →? It is also possible to output a subtitle production sound with another understandable content such as "Kanpekinanihonbare". When the content of the telop display in the subtitle effect display and the content of the subtitle effect sound are different, the degree of expectation for imparting an advantageous game may be increased as compared with the case where both contents match. Further, in the case of unclear content such as garbled characters in the telop display, the degree of expectation may be higher than in the case of the content in which the telop display can understand the meaning. If the telop display has garbled characters and other meaningless contents, the size, font, color, and the like of the characters in the telop display are displayed in a mode in which the degree of expectation for imparting an advantageous game is low. In this way, by using a subtitle effect display that is garbled but the character mode has a low expectation, it becomes unclear whether the expectation is high or low, and the player who sees it feels uncomfortable. Can be made to. Then, it is possible to give a surprise to the player who has an impression that the expectation is low for such a subtitle effect display by the gap with the actual high expectation. Further, when a telop display having an unclear content is displayed, a case may be provided in which the garbled characters are eliminated and the display content is changed so that the meaning can be understood by operating the sub button. In addition, a typographical error effect may be installed in an effect such as a telop display with garbled characters. For example, normally, when the content of the telop display JT2 in the second subtitle effect display JD2 is "Perfect Japan is sunny !!", in the typographical error effect, the content of the telop display JT2 in the second subtitle effect display JD2 is "It's a perfect sunny day in Japan !!", and the "wall" is displayed as a "wall". In this case as well, the actual expectation is that the size, font, color, etc. of the characters in the telop display are displayed in a mode in which the expectation for giving an advantageous game is low, while the expectation is higher than that of the normal telop display. It is possible to give a surprise by the gap with the high degree.

As described above, both the conversation effect display and the subtitle effect display are similar in that they include the display of characters related to the character's remark. As an effect display in which characters are displayed, one that displays the title character of the effect when a predetermined effect such as a continuous effect is started, or an image that has nothing to do with the flow up to that point is inserted in the background image. Some characters are displayed in the production (cut-in production). However, these effect displays are different from the conversation effect display and the subtitle effect display in that the content of the displayed characters is not directly related to the character's remarks. Comparing the conversation effect display and the subtitle effect display, the conversation effect display has more types (colors and sizes of characters, etc.) suggesting a difference in the degree of expectation for giving an advantageous game than the subtitle effect display. Further, the conversation effect display is displayed in the upper area of the screen of the image display unit DP rather than the subtitle effect display. As an overall tendency, the conversation effect display is relatively often displayed triggered by the start lever operation reception, and the subtitle effect display is relatively often displayed triggered by the third stop operation reception. For example, when there are a total of 80 types of conversation effect display and a total of 70 types of subtitle effect display, approximately 75% of the 80 types of conversation effect display are displayed when the start lever operation is accepted, and 70 types are displayed. Approximately 80% of the subtitle effect display is displayed when the third stop operation is accepted. In addition, the number of characters in the telop display in the subtitle effect display is relatively larger than the number of characters in the dialogue display in the conversation effect display. For example, assuming that the average value of the number of characters in each dialogue display of 80 types of conversation effect display is N, the average value of the number of characters in each telop display of 70 types of subtitle effect display is about 1.5 × N. be. The conversation effect display is relatively often displayed during normal times (during a normal game state) such as during non-AT, and the subtitle effect display is relatively often displayed during continuous effect execution or freeze. .. For example, approximately 70% of the 80 types of conversation effect display are displayed during normal operation, and approximately 75% of the 70 types of subtitle effect display are displayed during continuous production execution or freeze.

<Expectation production>
The expectation degree production is a production that suggests to the player the expectation degree and the like that give an advantageous game. In the expectation degree effect, the expectation degree effect display for the expectation degree effect is displayed on the image display unit DP at a predetermined timing. The expectation degree effect display is, for example, a display whose display mode can be changed according to the expectation degree to which an advantageous game is given, and is configured to include a display object (also referred to as an “object”) having a predetermined form. As an example of the expectation degree effect display, the expectation degree effect display OD1 is shown in FIG. 97.

The expectation degree effect display OD1 is configured to include a heart-shaped object OJ1 displayed in a predetermined area of the image display unit DP. The display mode of the object OJ1 differs depending on the degree of expectation for imparting an advantageous game. Specifically, the color of the region inside the outer line of the object OJ1 changes according to the degree of expectation. In this example, in addition to the normal color (for example, white), the color of the region inside the outline of the object OJ1 is displayed in blue (also referred to as "blue object display") and yellow. (Also referred to as "yellow object display"), mode displayed in green (also referred to as "green object display"), mode displayed in red (also referred to as "red object display"), mode displayed in blue ("" (Also referred to as "blue object display"), a mode in which a specific pattern is displayed (also referred to as "pattern object display"), and a mode in which it is displayed in rainbow colors (also referred to as "rainbow object display"). Then, the degree of expectation for giving an advantageous game is set in the order of blue object display <yellow object display <green object display <red object display <pattern object display <rainbow object display. In addition, in the case of the expectation degree effect display (rainbow object display in this example) where the expectation degree is the highest, it is set as a definite effect of 100% expectation degree (for example, suggesting AT confirmation, bonus confirmation, jackpot confirmation, etc.). There is.

As for the timing at which the expectation effect display is displayed, any timing triggered by the operation of a predetermined switch controlled by the main control means such as the bet switch, the start lever, and the stop switch (display trigger) is set. It can be appropriately set as the display timing (display start timing) of the expectation level effect display. For example, a predetermined timing after the lever operation is accepted, a predetermined timing after the first stop operation is accepted, a predetermined timing after the second stop operation is accepted, or a predetermined timing after the third stop operation is accepted. It can be set as the display timing of the expectation level effect display. In addition, as the timing at which the expectation level effect display is displayed, in the case of a pachinko machine, for example, the timing when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start opening winning, or the timing when a predetermined time has elapsed from the opening of the large winning opening. Alternatively, the timing at the time when a predetermined time has elapsed from the time of winning the grand prize opening can be set as the display timing of the expectation degree effect display.

FIG. 97 illustrates an embodiment in which the expectation degree effect display OD1 and the second subtitle effect display JD2 are simultaneously displayed on the image display unit DP. In this way, the expectation degree effect display and the subtitle effect display may be displayed on the image display unit DP at the same time, or may be displayed separately so that the display times do not overlap. Comparing the expectation degree effect display and the subtitle effect display, the number of stages (for example, the number of colors) indicating the difference in the expectation degree is larger in the expectation degree effect display than in the subtitle effect display. This is because the subtitle effect display also has a function of increasing the understanding of the progress of the game depending on the content of the telop display, so the expectation effect display whose main purpose is to notify the difference in the expectation degree. This is because the number of stages showing the difference in the degree of expectation may be smaller than that of the above. In addition, the rainbow object display in the expectation effect display and the rainbow telop display in the subtitle effect display are common in that they both represent a definite effect, but in the case of other colors, the expectation is not always the same even if they are the same color. do not have. For example, when comparing the blue object display of the expectation effect display and the blue telop display of the subtitle effect display, the blue telop display is set to suggest a higher expectation level than the blue object display. The expectation level effect display and the telop display may be superimposed. In that case, the telop display is displayed on the front side (the layer on the front side). Further, when the expectation degree effect display and the telop display are superimposed, it is difficult to understand if the colors are the same, so the same color may be avoided in the display.

Also, as an overall tendency, the difference in the color of the expectation effect display is related to the difference in the result of the internal lottery (winning combination) (for example, the red object display corresponds to the rare combination winning). ), And the difference in color between the subtitle effect display and the conversation effect display is often related to the degree of expectation of winning in a lottery other than the internal lottery such as AT winning and big hit. The form of the object in the subtitle effect display is not limited to the illustrated heart shape, but may be various forms. For example, a balloon-shaped object may be provided in addition to the heart-shaped object. Further, as another embodiment, a chair-shaped object and a desk-shaped object may be provided, or a bottle-shaped object and a cup-shaped object may be provided. It should be noted that the type of telop display (type due to the difference in the content of the telop) in the subtitle effect display is larger than the type of the object (type due to the difference in shape) in the expectation degree effect display. This is because, as described above, the subtitle effect display also has a function of enhancing the understanding of the progress of the game depending on the content of the telop display. By increasing the types of telop display, it is possible to explain various game situations. In the case of FIG. 97, there is no mode in which a specific pattern is used as the color of characters and the like in the subtitle effect display, but such a mode may be provided. However, even if the characters of the telop are used as a pattern, there is a possibility that the player cannot visually recognize that the characters are a pattern because the size of the characters is small. Therefore, when a pattern is used for characters or the like in the subtitle effect display, the expected degree effect display of the same pattern may be displayed on the image display unit DP together with the subtitle effect display.

<GET production>
In the GET effect, for example, in a notification game during AT (a game in which push navigation is executed), a game value (game medal) is given when a push order role such as a bell small role is established. It is a production shown in. In the GET effect, the GET effect display for the GET effect is displayed on the image display unit DP at a predetermined timing. The GET effect display is a display for appealing to the player the addition of the game value. As an example of the GET effect display, the GET effect display GD1 is shown in FIGS. 98 (D) and 98 (E).

The GET effect display GD1 is composed of an image of the characters "GET!" And is displayed in a predetermined area of the image display unit DP (in this example, the area is substantially the center of the screen, but can be changed as appropriate). When the GET effect display is displayed on the image display unit DP, the GET effect sound is output from the audio output unit in synchronization with the display timing (display start timing). The GET effect voice is a voice for appealing to the player to add the game value, and is, for example, a voice "Get" having the same content as the character "GET!" In the GET effect display GD1 (voice). The content may be different from the content of the characters).

The execution timing of the GET effect (GET effect display GD1 and GET effect sound) will be described with reference to FIGS. 98 and 99. As shown in FIG. 98 (A), when the push navigation effect display ND1 for notifying the push order of "middle left and right" is displayed on the image display unit DP, the first stop operation is accepted according to the push navigation effect display ND1. Then, as shown in FIG. 98 (B), the push navigation effect display ND1 changes to a mode of notifying the "left and right" push order and is displayed on the image display unit DP. Here, when the second stop operation is accepted according to the push navigation effect display ND1, the push navigation effect display ND1 changes to a mode of notifying the "right" push order and displays an image as shown in FIG. 98 (C). It is displayed in the part DP. Further, when the third stop operation is accepted (the operation unit of the stop switch (right stop switch in this example) that has accepted the third stop operation is pressed, the stop switch is switched from the off state to the on state as an opportunity. ) Push navigation effect display ND1 is hidden.

After the push navigation effect display ND1 is hidden, the game value is added (the hopper pays out the game medal and the number of credits is added) and the GET effect is executed. Specifically, the game is triggered by the release of the third stop operation (the operation unit of the stop switch that has received the third stop operation is released and the stop switch is switched from the on state to the off state). Adding value, outputting the GET effect sound, and displaying the GET effect display are started. In FIG. 99, these start timings are substantially simultaneous, but the start timings may be slightly different from each other. The GET effect sound whose output has been started ends at a point before the point at which the addition of the game value ends. After the output of the GET effect voice is completed, the addition of the game value is completed, and the GET effect display is hidden at a time after the time when the addition of the game value is completed. In this way, by delaying the display end timing of the GET effect display to be later than the output end timing of the GET effect sound and the end timing of the game value addition, the player is given the game value by listening to the GET effect sound. It is possible to pay attention to this, and it is possible to reconfirm that the game value has been added by looking at the GET effect display after listening to the GET effect voice and after the game value has been added, which gives an uplifting feeling. Can be obtained.

In the game in which the GET effect is performed, the subtitle effect display may be displayed on the image display unit DP triggered by the reception of the third stop operation. In FIG. 98 (E), the second subtitle effect display JD2 (telop) does not overlap with the GET effect display GD1 in the area lower in the screen than the area where the GET effect display GD1 is displayed in the image display unit DP. An example in which the display JT2) is displayed is shown. The subtitle effect display that is displayed when the third stop operation reception is received is displayed at the time when the GET effect display is hidden, that is, the subtitle effect is displayed before the time when the GET effect display is hidden. It is preferable that the display of the display is started. By doing so, the player's attention can be immediately directed to the subtitle effect display when the GET effect display is hidden. In the example of FIG. 99, the display start timing of the subtitle effect display is set to be located between the end time of the game value addition and the time when the GET effect display is hidden, but the present invention is limited to this. It's not something. For example, at any time within the period from the time when the third stop operation is accepted until the time when the GET effect display is hidden (also referred to as "the suitable period for starting the subtitle effect display"), or before the time when the third stop operation is accepted. The display of the subtitle effect display may be started at a predetermined timing of. As described above, the push navigation effect display disappears when the third stop operation is accepted, the GET effect display is not yet displayed when the third stop operation is accepted, and the subtitle effect display is displayed when the third stop operation is accepted. The display is started at a time before or after that, or after the display of the GET effect display is started. The subtitle effect display that started at the time of receiving the third stop operation or at a time before that is continuously displayed even after the reception of the third stop operation, but the push navigation effect display is triggered by the reception of the third stop operation. Since all of them disappear, the subtitle effect display can be seen well without being hidden by the push navigation effect display. In addition, the GET effect display is displayed when the third stop operation is canceled, but this GET effect display is originally displayed at a position that does not overlap with the subtitle effect display and disappears over time, so the subtitle effect display is displayed after the GET effect display. Is also easy to see. Therefore, even if the push navigation effect display is displayed or the blessing effect display (including the GET effect display) for improving the satisfaction of the player is displayed, the player can display the content of the telop display of the subtitle effect display. It becomes possible to grasp.

<Scene switching effect>
The scene switching effect is a display effect composed of a plurality of scenes that may be switched when the start lever is operated or the stop switch is operated (for example, it is displayed on the image display unit DP). .. Each scene is composed of a progress effect in which the display content changes with the passage of time, and a circulation effect in which the display content can be displayed after the progress effect is completed and the same display content is repeated. The progress effect is mainly composed of moving images, and the circular image is composed of moving images or still images. The scene switching effect may be configured as a single-shot effect or a continuous effect. As an example of the scene switching effect, the first scene switching effect is shown in FIG. 100 (A), and the second scene switching effect is shown in FIG. 100 (B).

As shown in FIG. 100 (A), the first scene switching effect is composed of four scenes from the first scene to the fourth scene. The first scene is composed of a progress effect P1 and a circulation effect L1, the second scene is composed of a progress effect P2 and a circulation effect L2, and the third scene is composed of a progress effect P3 and a circulation effect L3. The scene is composed of a progress effect P4 and a circulation effect L4. In the first scene switching effect, the progress effect P1 of the first scene is started to be displayed, triggered by the reception of the operation of the start lever. When a predetermined time (time T1) elapses without accepting the first stop operation after the display of the progress effect P1 is started, the display of the progress effect P1 ends and the circulation effect L1 is started to be displayed at the time when the predetermined time (time T1) elapses. This circulation effect L1 is continuously displayed until the first stop operation is accepted.

After that, when the first stop operation is effectively accepted, the reception is triggered to switch from the first scene to the second scene, and the progress effect P2 of the second scene is started to be displayed. If the first stop operation is effectively accepted after the progress effect P1 of the first scene is started and before the time T1 elapses, the circulation effect L1 is not displayed and the first scene is started from the first scene. The two scenes are switched, and the progress effect P2 of the second scene is started to be displayed. When a predetermined time (time T2) elapses without accepting the second stop operation after the display of the progress effect P2 is started, the display of the progress effect P2 ends and the circulation effect L2 is started to be displayed at the time when the predetermined time (time T2) elapses. This circulation effect L2 is continuously displayed until the second stop operation is accepted.

After that, when the second stop operation is effectively accepted, the reception is triggered to switch from the second scene to the third scene, and the progress effect P3 of the third scene is started to be displayed. If the second stop operation is effectively accepted after the progress effect P2 of the second scene is started and before the time T2 elapses, the circulation effect L2 is not displayed and the second scene is displayed. It switches to 3 scenes, and the progress effect P3 of the 3rd scene is started to be displayed. When a predetermined time (time T3) elapses without accepting the third stop operation after the display of the progress effect P3 is started, the display of the progress effect P3 ends and the circulation effect L3 is started to be displayed at the time when the predetermined time (time T3) elapses. This circulation effect L3 is continuously displayed until the third stop operation is accepted.

After that, when the third stop operation is effectively accepted, the reception is triggered to switch from the third scene to the fourth scene, and the progress effect P4 of the fourth scene is started to be displayed. If the third stop operation is effectively accepted after the progress effect P3 of the third scene is started and before the time T3 elapses, the circulation effect L3 is not displayed and the third scene is displayed. It switches to 4 scenes, and the progress effect P4 of the 4th scene is started to be displayed. When the predetermined time (time T4) has elapsed without accepting the bet operation, lever operation, clearing operation, etc. (collectively referred to as "next game operation") of the next game after the display of the progress effect P4 has started, the time point has elapsed. The display of the progress effect P4 ends and the display of the circulation effect L4 starts. This circulation effect L4 is continuously displayed until the next game operation is accepted (may end after a predetermined time elapses after the display starts).

In the first scene switching effect, the display continuation time (time T2) of the progress effect P2 of the second scene switched at the first stop operation reception and the display continuation of the progress effect P3 of the third scene switched at the second stop operation reception. Comparing the possible time (time T3) and the display continuous time (time T4) of the progress effect P4 of the fourth scene that is switched at the reception of the third stop operation, the time T4 is relatively higher than the time T2 and T3. It has been set for a long time. This is because after the first stop operation and the second stop operation, it is difficult for the player to concentrate on performing the next stop operation, so it is difficult to pay attention to the content of the progress effect, whereas the third stop is performed. After the operation, since the stop operation is completed, the player can feel relaxed and it is easy to pay attention to the content of the progress effect. That is, by setting the time of the progress effect after the third stop operation to be relatively long, it is possible to raise the player's interest in the content of the progress effect after the third stop operation and to improve the interest of the game. Become. Further, by relatively lengthening the time of the progress effect after the third stop operation, it becomes easy to suggest the game result or the like in the progress effect after the third stop operation. Such a tendency is not limited to a specific scene switching effect, but tends to extend to a plurality of types of scene switching effects as a whole. For example, if there are a total of 50 types of scene switching effects executed during a continuous production and there are a total of 10 types of scene switching effects executed during a single-shot production, a total of 60 types of scene switching effects are overall. As a tendency (mean value), the time T4 is set to be relatively longer than the times T2 and T3.

Further, in the first scene switching effect, the first stop operation is accepted from the first scene to the second scene regardless of which of the three stop switches on the left, middle, and right. .. Similarly, any stop switch that accepts the second stop operation can be switched from the second scene to the third scene, and any stop switch that accepts the third stop operation can be switched from the third scene. You can switch to the 4th scene. By doing so, the control process in the sub-control means can be simplified. That is, each time each stop operation is received, the main control means sends the first, second, and third stop reception commands to the sub control means, and the sub control means uses those commands to send the first, second, and third stop commands. You can know that the operation has been accepted. The first, second and third stop reception commands also include information on which stop switch was operated. However, in the first scene switching effect, the scene can be switched as long as the stop reception command in one game is known without referring to the information. Therefore, it is possible to omit referring to the information on which stop switch is operated, which makes it possible to simplify the process for switching the scene. In addition, regardless of the order in which the player operates the three stop switches to advance the game, the scene can be switched at an appropriate timing, so that the progress of the game and the content of the production can be matched. It becomes easier to ensure consistency. In addition, in the sub-control means, as long as it is known that it is a stop acceptance command, it is possible to determine which stop acceptance command it is based on the number of received stop commands, so that it is the stop operation acceptance. No special information is required to indicate whether or not. Therefore, as the information to be included in each stop command, it is possible to omit the information indicating which stop operation reception is performed. In this case, the amount of information of the stop reception command can be reduced and the memory capacity can be reduced. It is also possible to reduce the storage capacity.

As shown in FIG. 100 (B), the second scene switching effect is composed of two scenes from the first scene to the second scene. The first scene is composed of the progress effect P11 and the circulation effect L11, and the second scene is composed of the progress effect P12 and the circulation effect L12. In the second scene switching effect, the progress effect P11 of the first scene is started to be displayed, triggered by the reception of the operation of the start lever. If a predetermined time (time T11) elapses between the start of the display of the progress effect P11 and the reception of the third stop operation, the display of the progress effect P11 ends and the circulation effect L11 starts to be displayed. .. This circulation effect L11 is continuously displayed until the third stop operation is accepted. Further, in the second scene switching effect, the scene is not switched even if the first stop operation is accepted or the second stop operation is accepted.

After the display of the circulation effect L11 is started, when the third stop operation is effectively accepted through the reception of the first stop operation and the second stop operation, the reception is used as an opportunity to switch from the first scene to the second scene and the second. The scene progress effect P12 is started to be displayed. If the third stop operation is effectively accepted after the progress effect P11 of the first scene is started and before the time T11 elapses, the circulation effect L11 is not displayed and the first scene is started from the first scene. The two scenes are switched, and the progress effect P12 of the second scene is started to be displayed. When a predetermined time (time T12) elapses without accepting the next game operation after the display of the progress effect P12 is started, the display of the progress effect P12 ends and the cycle effect L12 is started to be displayed at the time when the predetermined time (time T12) elapses. This circulation effect L12 is continuously displayed until the next game operation is accepted (may end after a predetermined time has elapsed after the display starts).

In the second scene switching effect, the first stop operation can be switched from the first scene to the second scene regardless of which of the three stop switches on the left, middle, and right. do not have. Similarly, no matter which stop switch accepts the second stop operation, the first scene cannot be switched to the second scene. On the other hand, when the third stop operation is accepted, the first scene is switched to the second scene regardless of which stop switch accepts the third stop operation. For example, if the middle stop switch accepts the first stop operation or the second stop operation, it cannot be switched to the second scene, but if the middle stop switch accepts the third stop operation, it is switched to the second scene. Further, when the middle stop switch accepts the third stop operation, it is switched to the second scene, and when the left stop switch or the right stop switch accepts the third stop operation, it is switched to the second scene. By doing so, the control process in the sub-control means can be simplified. That is, it is not necessary to refer to the information on which stop switch is operated, which is included in the first, second, and third stop reception commands transmitted from the main control means to the sub control means each time each stop operation is received. Since it is possible to switch scenes, it is possible to simplify the process for switching scenes. In addition, regardless of the order in which the player operates the three stop switches to advance the game, the scene can be switched at an appropriate timing, so that the progress of the game and the content of the production can be matched. It becomes easier to ensure consistency.

As described above, in the second scene switching effect, the scene is not switched even if the first stop operation is accepted or the second stop operation is accepted. In the present embodiment, there is also a scene switching effect other than the first or second scene switching effect, but as an overall tendency, in the scene switching effect, the scene is switched when the third stop operation reception is received. Comparing the case with the case where the scene is switched triggered by the reception of the first stop operation or the second stop operation, the case where the scene is switched triggered by the reception of the third stop operation is the first stop operation or the second stop operation. The rate of scene switching is relatively higher than when the scene is switched at the reception (the former case can be 0%, the latter case can be 100%). This is because after the first stop operation and the second stop operation, it is difficult for the player to concentrate on performing the next stop operation, so it is difficult to pay attention to the content of the progress effect, whereas the third stop is performed. After the operation, since the stop operation is completed, the player can feel relaxed and it is easy to pay attention to the content of the progress effect. That is, by setting a relatively high ratio when the scene is switched triggered by the third stop operation, the player's interest in the content of the progress effect after the third stop operation is raised, and the interest of the game is improved. Is possible. Further, by setting the ratio when the scene is switched with the third stop operation as a trigger, it becomes easy to suggest the game result in the progress effect after the third stop.

<Darkening effect>
The darkening effect is a display effect that makes the display appear to be less visible. The blackout effect is executed, for example, when a predetermined effect display suggests a game result that is disadvantageous to the player (for example, AT non-winning, bonus non-winning, AT addition non-winning, big hit non-winning in pachinko machine, etc.). .. Further, the darkening effect is often executed when the final scene of the continuous effect is displayed, but it can also be executed in the single-shot effect. An example of the blackout effect is shown in FIG.

FIG. 101A shows the display state of the image display unit DP immediately before the darkening effect is executed. In this example, the image display unit DP has a final scene display RD1 showing the final scene of the continuous production, a subtitle production display JD3 having a telop display JT3 with the content "Is it a storm tomorrow?", And the number of remaining games of AT ( The first area RY1 indicating "remaining 23G") and the second area RY2 indicating the name of the gaming state ("decisive battle stage") are displayed. In the continuous production, for example, a moving image in which the character CH1 challenges something is displayed over a plurality of games. Further, the final scene display RD1 expresses a state in which the character CH1 that has failed in the challenge is drooping, which suggests that a game result disadvantageous to the player has been obtained. Further, although the sound is output at the start of the final scene display RD1, the sound output may be terminated when the darkening effect is performed on the final scene display RD1. In the case of such a configuration, it is possible to clearly indicate to the player that the end is due to the absence of sound. Needless to say, when an error occurs in this state, an error sound is output.

FIG. 101B shows the display state of the image display unit DP when the darkening effect is executed. In the darkening effect of this example, the final scene display RD1 is displayed so as to be darkened as a whole and the visibility is lowered. In addition, the visibility of the subtitle effect display JD3 is also reduced. On the other hand, the original brightness of the first region RY1 and the second region RY2 is maintained and the visibility is not deteriorated. By doing so, it is possible to impress the player that the game result that is disadvantageous to the player has been obtained, while ensuring the visibility of the information related to the subsequent game to the player. It is possible to clearly notify. The region (also referred to as “non-darkening region”) in the image display unit DP that does not reduce the visibility even during the darkening effect is not limited to the first region RY1 and the second region RY2. In the case of slot machines, the area for displaying the number of credits, the area for displaying the number of bets, the area for displaying the number of executed games, the area for displaying the number of acquired game values, the area for displaying sub-effects such as mini games, etc. are not included. It can be a blackout area, and in the case of a pachinko machine, an area for displaying a hold, an area for displaying a variable symbol (so-called mini symbol) different from the decorative symbol, an area for displaying the number of pending numbers, and the variable hold. The area showing the icon can be set as a non-darkening area. The mini-design is also referred to as the second design, and is a design that is always displayed even when the first design disappears due to a reach effect, etc., and represents the progress of the game. It is a pattern that makes the player always understand the progress of the game.

Further, if a predetermined time elapses without performing the next game operation or the like after the darkening effect is executed, the visibility of the final scene display RD1 may be further lowered (for example, darker). good. By doing so, it becomes possible for the player to distinguish between the darkening as a result of the continuous production and the darkening due to the fact that the game is not progressing so as not to be misunderstood. In addition, instead of reducing the visibility in two steps, the visibility may be gradually lowered with the passage of time.

A layer structure may be used to reduce the visibility of the display in the darkening effect. For example, the first layer for drawing the final scene display RD1 is placed on the back side, the second layer for drawing the subtitle effect display JD3 is placed on the front side, and the first area RY1 is placed further on the front side. And a third layer for drawing the second area RY2 (a layer for drawing the first area RY and a layer for drawing the second area RY2 may be separated) are arranged. Then, at the time of darkening effect, the fourth layer is arranged between the second layer and the third layer, and the brightness of the entire area of the fourth layer is reduced, so that the final scene display RD1 and the subtitle effect display JD3 are displayed. The visibility of the first region RY1 and the second region RY2 can be maintained while reducing the visibility.

Instead of reducing the brightness of the 4th layer, the opacity of the 4th layer is increased, and a large number of fine lines and fine patterns are drawn on the 4th layer to reduce the visibility. good. Instead of using a layer, the visibility may be lowered by applying a blurring process such as a mosaic to the image of the final scene display RD1. Further, the visibility may be lowered by lowering the brightness of the backlight of the image display unit DP. In this case, it is possible to reduce the power consumption by lowering the brightness of the backlight. Further, in the example of FIG. 101 (B), the subtitle effect display JD3 having reduced visibility is displayed as it is, but it may be hidden during the darkening effect.

If a game result that is advantageous to the player (for example, AT winning, bonus winning, AT additional winning, big hit in a pachinko machine, etc.) is obtained in the game during the continuous production, the advantageous game result is obtained in the final scene of the continuous production. In many cases, a display (also referred to as "success display") suggesting that is obtained is displayed, in which case no darkening effect is performed. On the other hand, a display (also referred to as a "failure display") suggesting that an unfavorable game result was obtained despite the favorable game result being obtained is once displayed, and then the advantageous game result is actually displayed. In some cases, a display (also referred to as a "revival display") suggesting that the product has been obtained may be made. In this case, the darkening effect may be executed while the failure display is displayed. When the darkening effect is executed while the failure display is displayed and then the resurrection display is displayed, the darkening effect is terminated before the resurrection display is displayed. By doing so, it is possible to display the revival display while ensuring visibility, so that it is possible to make the player clearly recognize that a favorable game result has been obtained.

Here, with reference to FIG. 102, changes in the effect image with the progress of the game will be described in the case of performing a failure display in the darkening effect. The effect example shown in FIG. 102 shows the process from the final scene display RD1 displayed on the image display unit DP to the failure display when the player performs the third stop operation.

FIG. 102A shows an effect displayed on the image display unit DP when the player presses the stop switch for which the third stop operation is performed (more specifically, when the finger is not released from the pressed stop switch). It is an image, and is the same effect image as the effect image of FIG. 101 (A). Therefore, in this figure, the same components as those in FIG. 101 are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted. Further, in FIG. 102 (A), the character string (is it a storm tomorrow?) Written in the dashed line indicated by the symbol CV is not displayed on the image display unit DP, but is output by voice. It is a character representation of the contents. Hereinafter, the character string sandwiched between the two straight lines in FIG. 102 indicates the content of the dialogue or sound effect output by the voice.

As described above, at the stage of FIG. 102 (A), the stop switch is pressed (in other words, the finger is not separated from the stop switch), and the game is whether to shift to the failure display or the success display. The situation is such that no one can judge. Therefore, the telop display JT3 in FIG. 102 (A) is not limited to the normal color (black or white), but is displayed in a color (blue, green, red, etc.) such as characters that are expected to be given an advantageous game. You may. However, it is desirable not to use a special color such as a rainbow color, which is used for a definite effect with 100% expectation, when it is planned to shift to a failure display.

In the state of FIG. 102 (A), when the player releases the finger from the stop switch on which the third stop operation is performed, the display of the image display unit DP switches to the failure display or the success display. FIG. 102 (B) shows an example of a failure display, and the image display unit DP shows a state in which the character CH1 is blown by a strong wind and disappears out of the screen. A cry of "Ah" and a sound effect (sound of the wind) of "Gooooooo" are output. Further, at this time, the subtitle effect display JD4 having the telop display JT4 "Wow!" Is displayed on the image display unit DP. Here, the character string of the telop display JT4 is displayed in a normal color (black or white), and is not displayed in a character color (blue, green, red, etc.) that increases the expectation that at least an advantageous game is given. There is.

In this way, by not displaying the character color of the telop display JT4 included in the image in which the darkening effect is executed with the character color that raises the expectation that an advantageous game is given, the player's expectation is not disappointing. In addition, it is possible to avoid impairing the reliability of the high degree of expectation represented by the character color.

Further, in the situation shown in FIG. 102 (B), when the output of the cry “Wow aaa” and the sound effect “Gooooooo” is completed, as shown in FIG. 102 (C), FIG. The same blackout effect as in B) is performed. That is, the effect of reducing the visibility of the screen is performed except for the first region RY1 and the second region RY2, which are non-darkening regions. Here, for example, if the blackout effect is performed before the voice of the dialogue ends, it becomes difficult to see the telop of the dialogue before the character finishes saying the dialogue, so that the dialogue heard by the player and the eyes. It becomes difficult to match the lines seen in, and there is a risk of giving the player a sense of discomfort. Therefore, by clearly displaying the telop display JT4 of the dialogue until the dialogue by the voice of the character is finished, it is possible to eliminate the possibility of giving the player a sense of discomfort as described above.

When the character string of the telop display JT4 is displayed in white or black, the color of the character string may not be changed even if the darkening effect is performed (it may remain white or black). .. As a method of showing a decrease in visibility when the character color is black, the character color may be changed to gray or the like (increased brightness). Further, the character color of the telop display JT4 displayed on the screen immediately before the darkening effect is executed (see FIG. 102 (B)) may be limited to only one type of white or black, for example, display. Either white or black (which enhances visibility) may be selected depending on the color of the screen. However, it is desirable that the type of character color displayed on the screen immediately before the darkening effect is executed is smaller than the type of character color that is expected to give an advantageous game. Further, the timing at which the darkening effect is performed may be after the voice corresponding to the telop display JT4 is output. For example, the sound effect (wind sound) output in the situation shown in FIG. 102 (B) is shown in FIG. 102. The output may be continued even during the darkening effect shown in (C).

As described above, a blackout effect may be performed while the failure display is displayed, and then a revival display may be performed. In this case, the above-mentioned sub-button (more specifically, a button-shaped operation reception unit (hereinafter, "push") The revival display may be performed when the player (also referred to as "button")) is operated. Here, the operation of the push button that triggers the revival display may be performed only once, or may be repeated hits a predetermined number of times. In this way, when the revival display is performed triggered by the operation of the push button, the image of the push button may be displayed on the screen shown in FIG. 101 (C) in order to prompt the player to operate the push button. .. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 101 (D), an image (hereinafter, also referred to as “push button image”) PB showing the operation surface of the push button is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display unit DP.

The image PB of this push button faithfully expresses the texture of the push button actually provided in the housing of the slot machine 1, and is displayed in a size larger than that of the actual push button. Further, even during the darkening effect, the image PB of the push button is not darkened so as not to reduce its visibility. That is, by making the image PB of the push button stand out, it is possible to more strongly appeal the existence of the push button to the player and enhance the effect of encouraging the operation of the push button.

In the actual push button provided on the housing, the operation surface of the push button is blinked (for example, by a light source such as an LED provided inside) in order to encourage the player to operate the push button. In that case, the image PB of the push button may also be displayed in a manner as if it were blinking (for example, repeating light / dark). In this case, it is preferable to set so that the blinking of the image PB of the push button and the blinking of the actual push button are not synchronized. In the present embodiment, the blinking speed of the image PB of the push button is made faster than the blinking speed of the actual push button, so that the image PB of the push button is more conspicuous than the actual push button. ..

As a method of urging the player to operate the actual push button by the image PB of the push button, in addition to displaying in the above-mentioned blinking mode, the display of the state in which the push button is pressed and the pressing of the push button are displayed. It is also possible to switch between the display in the non-displayed state and the display in the undisplayed state alternately. In this case, the actual push button may or may not be moved up and down by, for example, providing a solenoid inside.

In the example shown in FIG. 102, the display of FIG. 102 (A) is performed when the stop switch on which the third stop operation is performed is being operated, and FIG. 102 (B) is displayed when the operation is canceled. ) Is displayed. For example, FIG. 102 (A) is displayed when the operation of the stop switch on which the second stop operation is performed is released, and FIG. 102 is displayed when the third stop operation is performed. (B) may be displayed. In this case, (i) when the operation of the stop switch on which the third stop operation is performed is released, or (ii) when the audio output is completed, the blackout effect is produced according to either timing (FIG. 102 (C)). See). Further, the darkening effect may be performed at the earlier timing of (i) and (ii) above, and if the revival display is not performed, the darkening effect is performed at the timing of the above (i) and the revival display is displayed. If it is done, the darkening effect may be performed at the timing of (ii) above. At this time, even when the darkening effect is performed at the timing of (ii) above, the revival display may not be performed according to a predetermined condition (for example, based on a predetermined probability).

In addition, the advantageous game result given when the failure display, the darkening effect, and the resurrection display are performed (there may be no darkening effect) and the advantageous game result given when the success display is performed without the resurrection display. By comparison, it is more advantageous to have a revival display (for example, winning a special zone for adding AT, winning an AT with a large number of initial games, and a big hit with a large number of rounds on a pachinko machine. , The probability fluctuation jackpot) in which the jackpot probability becomes a high probability may be relatively increased. By doing so, it becomes possible for the player to maintain a sense of expectation without being disappointed even when a failure display or a blackout effect is performed.

When the visibility is reduced due to the darkening effect, for example, a sub button may be operated to display an adjustment screen for adjusting the light intensity (brightness) of the screen or the volume of the speaker. In that case, the legibility of the light amount and volume adjustment screen is ensured even during the darkening effect. Further, when an error occurs during the execution of the blackout effect, an error notification display for notifying the occurrence of the error may be performed. In this case, the legibility of the error notification display is ensured even during the darkening effect. It should be noted that the blackout effect can be executed in situations other than the continuous effect. For example, the blackout effect may be performed when the stop operation of the stop switch is performed in a push order different from the push order notified by the push navigation effect (also referred to as “push order failure”). In this case, it is possible to perform a blackout effect at the time of the push order failure, regardless of whether the push order fails in the first stop operation or the push order fails in the second stop operation. At that time, it is possible to set a non-darkening region in which the visibility does not deteriorate, which is the same as in the case of the darkening effect in the continuous effect.

<TOTAL display>
The slot machine of the fifth form has an image (hereinafter referred to as "end image") indicating that the game period has ended when the game period advantageous to the player such as a bonus game or AT ends, and the game period. The number of games played during the game and the total number of medals acquired during the game period are displayed on the image display device. Hereinafter, the display indicating the number of games played during the game period and the total number of medals acquired is referred to as "TOTAL display". Here, the trigger for displaying the TOTAL will be described separately for the case where the TOTAL display is triggered by the third stop operation and the case where the TOTAL display is triggered by the operation of the start lever.

(When displaying TOTAL triggered by the third stop operation)
First, with reference to FIGS. 103 and 104, an example of a case where the TOTAL display is performed triggered by the third stop operation will be described. Here, FIGS. 103 and 104 show the display contents of the image display device in the final scene of the AT capable of performing 300 games, and FIG. 103 shows the image display in the 299th game (the remaining 1 game). The display contents of the device are shown, and FIG. 104 shows the display contents of the image display device in the game (final game) of the 300th time (the remaining 0 games). Further, in FIGS. 103A and 104A, the same components as those of the slot machine 1 shown in FIG. 1 are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted. Further, in FIGS. 103 (B) to (F) and 104 (B) to (F), the notation of the reference numeral for the same configuration as in FIGS. 103 (A) and 104 (A) is omitted.

First, FIG. 103 (A) shows a state in which the 298th game (the remaining 2 games) of the current AT is completed and a specified number of medals (here, 3 medals) are inserted in order to perform the 299th game. Is shown. At this time, the remaining game number RG of the AT is displayed on the upper left side of the screen of the image display device 11, and the difference number DN in the AT is displayed on the upper right side of the screen. In FIG. 103 (A), the display of the number of remaining games RG is "remaining: 2G" (remaining 2 games), and the display of the difference number DN is "TOTAL: 150 sheets" (the difference number is 150). Further, on the screen of the image display device 11, the ally character FC and the enemy character EC are displayed.

During AT, if the push order combination is won, a battle between the ally character FC and the enemy character EC is performed, and if the stop switch is operated in the push order notified by the push order navigation, the ally character FC wins. At this time, the winning mode of the winning push order combination is configured, and a predetermined number of medals are paid out. In the present embodiment, the winning mode of the push order combination is a state in which the "bell" symbols are aligned on any of the upper horizontal line, the middle horizontal line, the lower horizontal line, the diagonal line rising to the right, and the diagonal line rising to the left. In that case, 10 medals will be paid out. On the other hand, if the stop switch is not operated in the push order notified by the push order navigation, the enemy character EC wins and a smaller number (for example, one) of medals than the above-mentioned predetermined number is paid out. Or, it may be missed depending on the operation timing of the stop switch.

When the start lever 25 is operated after the specified number of medals have been inserted, all reels start to rotate and the display of the number of remaining games RG is "remaining: 1G" (as shown in FIG. 103 (B)). There is only one game left), and the display of the difference number DN is reduced by the number of input sheets (3 sheets) to become "TOTAL: 147 sheets". Further, when the push order combination is won in this game, the battle between the ally character FC and the enemy character EC is started on the screen of the image display device 11, and the push order navigation is displayed at the lower side of the screen. Here, in FIG. 103 (B), the push order navigation of "middle right left" is displayed.

Then, when the player first stops the middle stop switch 26b (FIG. 103 (C)) and then the second stop operation of the right stop switch 26c, lightning strikes the enemy character EC on the screen of the image display device 11. An image is displayed (FIG. 103 (D)). Finally, when the left stop switch 26a is operated to stop the third stop, the image in which the ally character FC wins is displayed on the image display device 11, all reels are stopped, and the bell symbols are aligned on the diagonal line rising to the right (FIG. 103 (FIG. 103). E)). Then, when the player releases his finger from the left stop switch 26a, the payout of medals starts, and the display of the difference number DN is updated from "TOTAL: 147" to "TOTAL: 157". At the same time, the above-mentioned GET effect is performed, and the GET effect display is displayed on the image display device 11 (FIG. 103 (F)). Here, the display of the difference number DN may be updated to 157 when the player releases the finger from the left stop switch 26a, or updated to 157 when the payout of medals is completed. May be good. Further, the value of the difference number displayed according to the payout of medals may be increased by 1 until the value reaches 157.

Next, when the player inserts a specified number of medals to perform the final game of AT and operates the start lever 25, all the reels start to rotate as shown in FIG. 104 (A), and the number of remaining games RG. Is displayed as "remaining: 0G" (remaining 0 games), and the display of the difference number DN is reduced by the number of inserted medals (3) to become "TOTAL: 154". Further, when the push order combination is won in this game, the battle between the ally character FC and the enemy character EC is started on the screen of the image display device 11, and the push order navigation is displayed at the lower side of the screen. Here, in FIG. 104 (A), the push order navigation of "left middle right" is displayed.

Then, when the player first stops the left stop switch 26a (FIG. 104 (B)) and then second stops the middle stop switch 26b, lightning strikes the enemy character EC on the screen of the image display device 11. An image is displayed (FIG. 104 (C)). Finally, when the right stop switch 26c is operated to stop the third stop, the image in which the ally character FC wins is displayed on the image display device 11, and all the reels are stopped and the bell symbols are aligned on the upper horizontal line (the upper horizontal line is aligned). FIG. 104 (D). Then, when the player releases the finger from the right stop switch 26c, the payout of medals is started, and the display of the difference number DN is updated from "TOTAL: 154 sheets" to "TOTAL: 164 sheets". Further, the above-mentioned GET effect is also performed, whereby the GET effect display is displayed on the image display device 11 (FIG. 104 (E)). Here, the display of the difference number DN may be updated from 154 to 164 when the player releases the finger from the left stop switch 26a, or from 154 when the payout of medals is completed. It may be updated to 164 sheets. Further, the value of the difference number displayed according to the payout of medals may be increased by 1 until the value reaches 164.

If the bell symbols are not aligned and only one medal is paid out because the stop switches 26a to 26c are operated in a push order different from the push order notified by the push order navigation in the final game of AT. The display of the difference number DN is updated from "TOTAL: 154 sheets" to "TOTAL: 155 sheets". In addition, if it is missed, the display of the difference number DN remains "TOTAL: 154 sheets". Further, the display of the difference number DN may be updated at the timing when the player releases the finger from the stop switch where the third stop operation is performed, or may be performed at the timing when the payout of the medals is completed. Further, the value of the displayed difference number may be increased by 1 according to the timing at which the hopper pays out the medals one by one.

When a predetermined time has elapsed since the GET effect display shown in FIG. 104 (E) is performed, first, as shown in FIG. 104 (F), an image of a concentrated line toward the center of the screen is imaged as the end screen of the AT. After being displayed on the display device 11 and then the squeeze prevention display HS (for example, the message "Be careful of squeezing" and "Pachislot is a play to enjoy moderately") is displayed in the upper right corner of the screen, "TOTAL display" is displayed. Number of continuous G: 300G "(indicating that the number of games played during this AT was 300) and" TOTAL: 164 "(indicating that the difference in the number of cards during this AT was 164) The characters are displayed.

Here, the value of the difference number DN on the screen of the GET effect display shown in FIG. 104 (E) and the value of the difference number of sheets in the TOTAL display shown in FIG. 104 (F) are in agreement. Therefore, when the difference number of cards at the start of the final game of AT is 154, the stop switches 26a to 26c are operated in a push order different from the push order notified by the push order navigation, so that one piece can be used. Needless to say, if only medals are paid out, the difference number displayed in the TOTAL display will be "TOTAL: 155", and if it is missed, it will be "TOTAL: 154".

As described above, in the example shown in FIG. 104, the TOTAL display is performed triggered by the third stop operation in the final game of the AT, and the difference number included in the TOTAL display is paid out in the final game of the AT. The number of medals has been added. As a result, the number of medals won during the AT, which is of most interest to the player, is accurately displayed on the TOTAL display displayed as the end of the AT, so that the player's sense of accomplishment and superiority can only be satisfied. However, for example, by recording the TOTAL display on a photograph or the like, the player can accurately and clearly show to others the final number of ATs acquired, not the number of ATs in the middle stage. ..

Further, in FIG. 104 (F), since the squeeze prevention display HS is displayed before the TOTAL display, the squeeze prevention display can be reliably presented to the player. For example, the player pays attention only to the TOTAL display. However, it is possible to reduce the risk of overlooking the entanglement prevention display.

In the example shown in FIG. 104, the number of medals acquired in the final game of AT is reflected (specifically, added) in the value of the difference number DN when the GET effect display is performed (FIG. 104). See (E)). On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 105, the number of medals acquired in the final game of the AT may be reflected when the TOTAL display is performed. Here, FIG. 105 shows the display contents of the image display device in the 300th game (final game) in the AT capable of performing 300 games. It is assumed that the display content (particularly the value of the difference number DN) in the 299th game (the remaining 1 game) one game before is the same as that in FIG. 103.

FIG. 105 (A) shows a state in which the 299th game (1 game remaining) of the current AT is completed and a specified number (3 medals) of medals are inserted in order to perform the 300th game. At this point, the display of the number of remaining games RG of the AT is "remaining: 1G", and the display of the difference number DN is "TOTAL: 157". Then, when the player operates the start lever 25 to perform the final game of the AT, all the reels start to rotate and the display of the number of remaining games RG is "remaining: 0G" (as shown in FIG. 105 (B)). (Remaining 0 games), and the difference number DN display is reduced by the number of inserted medals (3) to become "TOTAL: 154". Further, when the push order combination is won in this game, the battle between the ally character FC and the enemy character EC is started on the screen of the image display device 11, and the push order navigation is displayed at the lower side of the screen. Here, in FIG. 105 (B), the push order navigation of "left middle right" is displayed.

Then, when the player first stops the left stop switch 26a (FIG. 105 (C)) and then second stops the middle stop switch 26b, lightning strikes the enemy character EC on the screen of the image display device 11. An image is displayed (FIG. 105 (D)). Finally, when the right stop switch 26c is operated to stop the third stop, the image in which the ally character FC wins is displayed on the image display device 11, and all the reels are stopped and the bell symbols are aligned on the upper horizontal line (the upper horizontal line is aligned). FIG. 105 (E). Then, when the player releases his finger from the right stop switch 26c, the payout of medals is started, but the display of the difference number DN is not updated as "TOTAL: 154 sheets", and the AT end screen and the display for preventing squeezing are prevented. After HS is displayed, TOTAL display is performed in addition to this (FIG. 105 (F)).

In the TOTAL display shown in FIG. 105 (F), "TOTAL: 164 cards" is displayed, and the final difference number of ATs is displayed with the number of medals paid out in the final game of AT added. ing. As for the display mode of the difference number, the display of the difference number is "TOTAL: 154 sheets" at the beginning when the TOTAL display is performed, and then the value of the difference number is incremented and displayed one by one, and finally. May be displayed as "TOTAL: 164 sheets". When this increment display is performed, the value of the displayed difference number may be increased by 1 according to the timing at which the hopper pays out the medals one by one.

Here, if the bell symbols are not aligned and only one medal is paid out because the stop switches 26a to 26c are operated in a push order different from the push order notified by the push order navigation in the final game of AT. It goes without saying that the display of the difference number in the TOTAL display is "TOTAL: 155 sheets", and if it is missed, it remains "TOTAL: 154 sheets".

It should be noted that the GET effect (for example, the GET effect display shown in FIG. 104 (E)) is performed between the time when the player releases the finger from the stop switch on which the third stop operation is performed and the time when the TOTAL display is performed. May be good. Further, in the final game of AT, when the TOTAL display is performed triggered by the third stop operation, the small winning combination associated with the largest number of payouts is won after the third stop operation is performed. Occasionally, the TOTAL display may be performed after the time required to pay out the medals (hereinafter, also referred to as "maximum payout time") has elapsed. Here, for example, in the case of the symbol combination shown in FIGS. 10 to 13, the maximum number of payouts associated with the small winning combination is 15, so the maximum payout time in this case is 15. It will be the time required to pay out the medals.

In the case of such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the final difference number in AT from being displayed during the payout of medals, so that the actual difference number and the difference number included in the TOTAL display can be compared. It can be matched exactly. Also, for example, if some error (for example, hopper empty error) occurs in the hopper during the payout of medals and the payout is interrupted, there is a difference between the actual difference number and the difference number included in the TOTAL display. Can be shortened.

The timing start timing of the maximum payout time may be when the stop switch for performing the third stop operation is pressed (when the last operated stop switch changes from the OFF state to the ON state), or the third stop operation. It may be when the finger is released from the stop switch in which the above operation is performed (when the last operated stop switch changes from the ON state to the OFF state). Further, instead of the maximum payout time, the time required to pay out the medals of the number of medals associated with the push order combination (particularly, the number of medals to be paid out when the push order is correct) may be adopted.

(When displaying TOTAL triggered by the operation of the start lever)
Next, with reference to FIG. 106, an example of a case where the TOTAL display is performed triggered by the operation of the start lever will be described. Here, FIG. 106 shows the display contents of the image display device in the 300th game (final game) in the AT capable of performing 300 games. It is assumed that the display content (particularly the value of the difference number DN) in the 299th game (the remaining 1 game) one game before is the same as that in FIG. 103.

FIG. 106 (A) shows the GET effect display from the screen of the image display device 11 after a predetermined time has elapsed since the GET effect display was performed in the previous (299th) game (see FIG. 103 (F)). Indicates that has disappeared. At this point, the display of the number of remaining games RG of the AT is "remaining: 1G", and the display of the difference number DN is "TOTAL: 157". Then, when the player inserts a specified number (3 medals) of medals to perform the final game of AT and operates the start lever 25, all the reels start to rotate with this as an opportunity, and as shown in FIG. 106 (B). As shown, the screen is switched to the AT end screen, and the immersive prevention display HS and the TOTAL display are performed. In this TOTAL display, the number of continuous games is 300 games, which means the final game of AT, and the value of the difference number is 154, which is obtained by subtracting the number of inserted medals (3). Further, the TOTAL display may be performed after a predetermined time has elapsed after the start lever 25 is operated, but it is desirable that the TOTAL display is performed at the latest before the third stop operation is performed.

Further, when the push order combination is won, the push order navigation is displayed at the lower side of the screen on the screen of the image display device 11. Here, although the push order navigation of "left middle right" is displayed in FIG. 106 (B), the TOTAL display is performed at a position that does not overlap with the display of the push order navigation. On the other hand, when the TOTAL display and the push order navigation display are displayed in an overlapping manner, the TOTAL display does not interfere with the push order navigation display (for example, the push order navigation display is displayed on top of the TOTAL display. It is desirable to display them in such a way that they overlap.

The player first stops the left stop switch 26a (FIG. 106 (C)), then operates the middle stop switch 26b for the second stop (FIG. 106 (D)), and further stops the right stop switch 26c for the third stop. It is assumed that the bell symbols are aligned on the upper horizontal line by the operation (FIG. 106 (E)). From the first stop operation to the third stop operation, the contents of the TOTAL display do not change as they were at the beginning.

Then, when the player releases the finger from the right stop switch 26c, the payout of medals is started, and the value of the difference number in the TOTAL display is updated to 164 as shown in FIG. 106 (F). Here, the value of the difference number may be changed from 154 to 164 at once, or may be added one by one from 154 to 164. In addition, if the bell symbols are not aligned and only one medal is paid out because the stop switches 26a to 26c are operated in a push order different from the push order notified by the push order navigation in the final game of AT. Needless to say, the display of the difference number in the TOTAL display is "TOTAL: 155 sheets", and if it is missed, it remains "TOTAL: 154 sheets". Further, if any small winning combination is won when all reels are stopped, a GET effect display may be performed in addition to the TOTAL display. The GET effect display at this time may be superimposed on the TOTAL display for a predetermined time, or may be displayed for a predetermined time at a position that does not overlap with the TOTAL display.

As described above, in the example shown in FIG. 106, the TOTAL display is performed triggered by the operation of the start lever in the final game of the AT, and the difference number included in the TOTAL display is paid out in the final game of the AT. The number of medals has been added. As a result, the number of medals won during the AT, which is of most interest to the player, is accurately displayed on the TOTAL display displayed as the end of the AT, so that the player's sense of accomplishment and superiority can only be satisfied. However, for example, by recording the TOTAL display on a photograph or the like, the player can accurately and clearly show to others the final number of ATs acquired, not the number of ATs in the middle stage. ..

In addition, when medals are paid out in the final game of AT, the value of the difference number in the TOTAL display is added and displayed one by one until the value obtained by adding the number of paid medals is added. Since the player will witness the process of updating the value of the difference number in AT, it is clear that the number of medals won in the final game of AT is also included in the difference number in TOTAL display. Can be recognized.

In the example shown in FIG. 106, when medals were paid out in the final game of AT, the number of medals paid out was added to the difference number in the TOTAL display, but the medals were paid out in the final game of AT. It is not necessary to add the number of medals issued to the difference in the TOTAL display. In this case, when the TOTAL display is performed in FIG. 106 (B), the value of the difference number is the value obtained by subtracting the number of medals inserted in the final game of AT (that is, 154), but it is inserted. It may be a value that does not subtract the number of medals (that is, 157). In other words, the difference number indicated by the TOTAL display may be the difference number up to one time before the final game of AT.

In this configuration, the TOTAL display does not change according to the result of the final game of the AT, so for example, an effect that suggests the setting value of the slot machine on the end screen of the AT or a revival effect (actually, the AT ends). When performing an effect (indicating that a new AT is started), the player is less likely to be distracted by the TOTAL display, and can draw attention to those effects.

Further, it is assumed that the number of medals inserted in the final game of AT is subtracted as the difference number to be displayed when the TOTAL display is performed, especially when the start lever 25 is operated, and then the medals are paid out. However, if the payout number is not added to the already displayed difference number, the difference number determined at the time when the TOTAL display is performed can be displayed, and the content of the TOTAL display after the AT end screen is displayed. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel a sense of discomfort due to the fluctuation of.

Next, in the case where the TOTAL display is performed triggered by the operation of the start lever 25, the process from the operation of the start lever 25 to the performance of the TOTAL display will be described with reference to FIG. 107. Here, FIG. 107 shows the display contents of the image display device in the 300th game (final game) in the AT capable of performing 300 games. It is assumed that the display content (particularly the value of the difference number DN) in the 299th game (the remaining 1 game) one game before is the same as that in FIG. 103.

FIG. 107 (A) shows the GET effect display from the screen of the image display device 11 after a predetermined time has elapsed since the GET effect display was performed in the previous (299th) game (see FIG. 103 (F)). Indicates that has disappeared. At this point, the display of the number of remaining games RG of the AT is "remaining: 1G", and the display of the difference number DN is "TOTAL: 157". Then, when the player inserts a specified number (3 medals) of medals to perform the final game of AT and operates the start lever 25, all the reels start to rotate with this as an opportunity, and as shown in FIG. 107 (B). As shown, the screen is switched to the AT end screen, and the immersive prevention display HS is displayed. At this time, when the push order combination is won, the push order navigation is also displayed at the lower side of the screen of the image display device 11. In FIG. 107 (B), the push order navigation of "left middle right" is displayed, but this push order navigation is displayed so as not to be obstructed by the AT end screen and the squeeze prevention display HS.

When a predetermined time has elapsed since the display shown in FIG. 107 (B) is performed, the total number of games played during AT (“continuous G number: 300 G”) is first displayed in the TOTAL display (FIG. 107 (C)). )), Then the difference number in AT at that time (“TOTAL: 154 sheets”) is displayed (FIG. 107 (D)). Here, as for the difference number displayed in FIG. 107 (D), the number of medals inserted in the final game (3 pieces) is subtracted from the difference number (157 pieces) at the end of the previous game. Further, the transition from FIG. 107 (B) to FIG. 107 (D) may be completed until the operation of the stop switch can be accepted (at least until all reels are in a constant speed rotation state). , The operation of the stop switch may not be accepted until the display of FIG. 107 (D) is performed (for example, the above-mentioned "freeze at the start of reel rotation" may be set).

As a result of operating the stop switches 26a to 26c in the push order notified by the push order navigation from the state of FIG. 107 (D), as shown in FIG. 107 (E), when the bell symbols are aligned on the upper horizontal line. When the player's finger is released from the right stop switch 26c operated by the third stop operation, the payout of medals is started, and as shown in FIG. 107 (F), the value of the difference number in the TOTAL display is 164 sheets. Will be updated to. Here, the value of the difference number may be changed from 154 to 164 at once, or may be added one by one from 154 to 164. In addition, if the bell symbols are not aligned and only one medal is paid out because the stop switches 26a to 26c are operated in a push order different from the push order notified by the push order navigation in the final game of AT. Needless to say, the display of the difference number in the TOTAL display is "TOTAL: 155 sheets", and if it is missed, it remains "TOTAL: 154 sheets".

If any small winning combination is won when all reels are stopped, GET effect display may be performed in addition to TOTAL display. The GET effect display at this time may be superimposed on the TOTAL display for a predetermined time, or may be displayed for a predetermined time at a position that does not overlap with the TOTAL display.

In this way, when the TOTAL display is performed triggered by the operation of the start lever 25 in the final game of the AT, as shown in FIG. 107 (B), the entanglement prevention display HS is displayed before the TOTAL display. , The squeeze prevention display can be reliably presented to the player, and for example, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the player pays attention only to the TOTAL display and overlooks the squeeze prevention display.

(About the effect when a stop operation different from the notified push order navigation is performed)
Next, with reference to FIG. 108, a change in the effect when the stop switches 26a to 26c are operated in a push order different from the notified push order navigation (hereinafter, also referred to as “when the push order is missed”) will be described. do. First, the contents of the effect when the push order is mistaken in the game in which the TOTAL display is not performed will be described with reference to FIGS. 108 (A-1) to (A-3). As a premise, it is an effect related to push order navigation in an AT that can play 300 games, and FIG. 108 (A-1) shows the 298th time (remaining 2 games) of the current AT as in FIG. 103 (A). ) Has been completed, and a specified number (3 medals) of medals have been inserted to perform the 299th game.

At this time, the remaining number of games RG is displayed as "remaining: 2G" (remaining 2 games) on the upper left side of the screen of the image display device 11, and the difference number DN in the AT is "TOTAL: 150 sheets" on the upper right side of the screen. "(The difference is 150) is displayed. Then, when the start lever 25 is operated by the player, as shown in FIG. 108 (A-2), all the reels start to rotate, and the display of the number of remaining games RG is "remaining: 1G" (remaining 1 game). ), And the display of the difference number DN is reduced by the number of inserted sheets (3 sheets) to become "TOTAL: 147 sheets".

Further, when the push order combination is won in this game, the battle between the ally character FC and the enemy character EC is started on the screen of the image display device 11, and the push order navigation is displayed at the lower side of the screen. Here, in FIG. 108 (A-2), the push order navigation of "left middle right" is displayed. Here, if the player mistakenly operates the middle stop switch 26b for the first stop, an image of a lightning strike is displayed on the ally character FC displayed on the image display device 11, and then the above-mentioned blackout is displayed. Similar to the effect, the display of the image display device 11 becomes dark as a whole and the visibility is lowered (FIG. 108 (A-3)). However, the area where the push order navigation is displayed is the non-darkening area described above, and the visibility is not deteriorated.

Next, the contents of the effect when the push order is mistaken in the game in which the TOTAL display is performed will be described with reference to FIGS. 108 (B-1) to (B-3). FIG. 108 (B-1) is predetermined after the GET effect display was performed in the previous (299th) game (see FIG. 103 (F)), similarly to FIGS. 106 (A) and 107 (A). It shows a state in which the GET effect display disappears from the screen of the image display device 11 due to the passage of time. At this point, the display of the number of remaining games RG of the AT is "remaining: 1G", and the display of the difference number DN is "TOTAL: 157".

Then, when the player inserts a specified number (3 medals) of medals to perform the final game of AT and operates the start lever 25, all the reels start to rotate and all the reels start to rotate, and FIG. 108 (B-2). ) Is switched to the end screen of the AT, and the TOTAL display is performed next to the immersive prevention display HS. At this time, when the push order combination is won, the push order navigation is also displayed at the lower side of the screen of the image display device 11. In FIG. 108 (B-2), the push order navigation of "left middle right" is displayed.

Here, as shown in FIG. 108 (B-3), even if the player mistakenly operates the middle stop switch 26b for the first stop, the end of the AT displayed on the image display device 11 There is no darkening effect that reduces the visibility of the screen or TOTAL display. However, if a sound effect (for example, a buzzer sound) that means that is generated when the pressing order is mistaken is performed, the sound effect may be generated.

In this way, in a gaming machine that executes a blackout effect if the push order is missed during AT, if the push order is missed while the TOTAL display is being performed, the blackout effect is not executed by the AT. To conclude, the visibility of the TOTAL display, which indicates the number of medals won during AT, which is of most interest to the player, is not reduced, so there is a risk that the sense of accomplishment and superiority that the player will experience at the end of AT will be reduced. Can be reduced.

The TOTAL display shown in each of FIGS. 104 to 108 shifts to the demo screen when an error occurs, the clearing switch 24 is operated to start the clearing process, or the clearing process is completed. When the menu screen is displayed, when a medal is inserted to play the next game (specifically, when the 1-BET switch 22 or MAX-BET switch 23 is operated, or when the medal insertion slot is inserted. (When medals are inserted into 21), when the start switch 25 is operated with a specified number of medals inserted, at any one timing, or by a combination of a plurality of events among the above-mentioned events. , May be erased from the screen of the image display device 11.

Further, when the TOTAL display is deleted from the screen of the image display device 11 due to the occurrence of the above-mentioned event, when the event causing the deletion is resolved, the TOTAL display before the deletion is displayed again as an image. It may be displayed on the screen of the device 11, or it may be shifted to the effect screen displayed in a normal game without displaying it.

In the slot machine of the fifth form described above, the type of character displayed in the conversation effect and the demo effect (the effect displayed during non-game, which is executed after a predetermined time has elapsed after the end of the game, "standby". When compared with the types of characters displayed in (also referred to as "effect"), the types of characters in the conversation effect may be larger. Characters that appear infrequently (so-called premium characters) may not be displayed in the demo production, but may appear in conversation production or other production. This makes it possible for a situation in which a character that is unknown in advance (a character that knows its existence but does not know to appear) appears, and the appearance of such a character effectively raises expectations. Can be enhanced to. In addition, the demo production is configured so that the conversation production and the subtitle production are not displayed.

In each of the above-described embodiments, as an example of the gaming machine to which the present invention is applied, a slot machine (rotary drum type gaming machine) using a gaming medal as a gaming value has been described as an example, but the present invention is limited to this. For example, a revolving pachinko machine that uses a gaming ball as a gaming value, a revolving gaming machine that uses information recorded on an electronic recording medium as a gaming value, a sparrow ball gaming machine, and an arrange ball. It can be applied to machines, pachinko machines, etc. in the same way, and the same effect can be obtained. Further, the present invention can be similarly applied to a slot machine having four or more reels, and the same effect can be obtained.

1 Slot machine 2 Front door 3a, 3b, 3c Reel 25 Start lever 26a, 26b, 26c Stop switch (1st embodiment)
60 Main control board 70 Sub control board 70A Sub main control board 70B Sub sub control board 100 Main control means 200 Sub control means 200A Sub main control means 200B Sub sub control means 500 Stop switch unit 510, 520, 530 Stop switch (second embodiment) )
512,522,532 Stop switch cover 514,524,534 Stop switch lamp 540 Stop switch panel 600 AT notification display 611, 612,613 7-segment display W display window DA1, DA2 Design display area GK1, GK2, GK3 display design DP image display

Claims (1)

Setting value display and
With the start switch,
With a specific switch
Equipped with
If power is supplied and certain conditions are met, the setting change mode can be activated.
In the setting change mode, the setting value display corresponding to the setting value can be displayed on the setting value display.
In the setting change mode, the first state in which the setting value display displayed on the setting value display is changed when a specific switch is operated, and the setting value display displayed on the setting value display even if a specific switch is operated. There is a second state where the setting value display is not changed,
In the first state, the setting value display displayed on the setting value display can be changed when a specific switch is operated.
In the first state, when the start switch is operated, it becomes the second state, and in the second state, the display content of the set value display cannot be changed by operating a specific switch.
The power is turned off in a specific situation where the first set value is set, and then the power is turned on in a situation where both the start switch and the specific switch are operated, and the power is supplied by the power on. After the predetermined condition is satisfied and the setting change mode is activated, the setting value display corresponding to the second setting value, which is the first state and is different from the first setting value, can be displayed on the setting value display. ing
Pachinko machine.

Images